33735869 Ohl Manual Vol 1 Lv to 33kv Specifications v4 July 2006

Distribution Business

Version Prepared by Approved by Issue Date 4 Tony Haggis Pat Booth July 2006

Overhead Line Manual Vol.1

East Midlands Electricity Overhead Line Manual Vol.1

Version: 4 July 2006 Page 2 of 4

Revision Log For Overhead Line Manual Vol.1

Changes made in version 4 July 2006 Title Notes about the change Documents Removed

New Documents

Amended Documents

Section 7 Pole Mounted Fuse-Gear, Auto-Reclosers & Air Break Switches, Disconnectors Drawings & Materials List

Drawings A020 revised – expulsion fuse bracket changed

Section 7 Pole Transformer Drawings & Materials

Details of expulsion fuse bracket changed. Orientation of bolted anchor clamps corrected

Changes made in version 3 May 2005 Title Notes about the change Documents Removed

New Documents

Section 7 Pole Transformers Drawings & Materials

Drawing A022B added – single phase free standing ole transformer

Amended Documents

Changes made in version 2 Jan 2002 (Significant changes shown bold)

Manual / Section Changes OHL Vol 1 Section 5 Overhead Line Joints

Reference to Network Performance & Standards changed to Technology & Standards Manager

OHJ 6, 26 & 72 Photos added

OHJ 144 E615 Steel Block Earth Clamp added

OHL Vol 1 Section 6 - ABC Fittings & Commodity Codes

ABC end caps – range taking caps introduced - some commodity codes deleted

CCL code number included for roller suspension clamps and tension clamps – range taking of tension clamps changed

OHL Vol 1 Section 6 ABC Drawings

Pictures of Network switch and service box included



OHL Vol 1 Section 6 HV Single Circuit Fittings & Commodity Codes

E361 – commodity code corrected

cc 234 871 – 36 kV ball-ball composite insulator added

Triplex cable cleats added

cc 234 871 - 36kV composite ball / ball insulator - com code corrected

OHL Vol 1 Section 7 Pole Mounted Switchgear Drawings & Materials A020 minor alterations to fuse mounting details

OHL Vol 1 Section 7 Pole Transformers Drawings & Materials

Detailed changes to expulsion fuse mounts and free standing transformer drawings modified to show radial and loop versions

OHL Vol 1 Section 7 HV Single Circuit Drawings & Materials

Drawings A004 & A005 - max deviation corrected from 30 to 60 deg

OHL Vol 1 Section 7 Cable Terminations Drawings & Materials

Cable cleat commodity codes included for 11kV & 33kV triplex cables

OHL Vol 1 Section 10 - Design Of Stays

Stay fencing drawings re-drawn for clarity

Changes made in version 1 February 2001 Title Notes about the change Documents Removed

Section 12 Miscellaneous Section deleted

New Documents

Section 1 Introduction

No major changes

Section 2 Safety

No major change

Section 3 Regulations & Wayleaves

ESI references changed to EATS

Section 4 Survey & Profile

Content reduced to basic requirements

Section 5 Approved Materials

All fittings and commodity code list from other sections have been moved into this section.

Amended Documents

Section 6 LV ABC

Drawings clarified to improve Adobe Acrobat presentation References to non-standard ABC sizes ‘greyed out’. Design & erection tables for non-standard sizes moved into ‘superseded’ sub-section



Section 7 HV Single Circuit

Drawings clarified to improve Adobe Acrobat presentation. ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ moved into section 5 as it contains LV as well as HV joints.

Section 8 25 kV Double Circuit

No major changes

Section 9 33kV Double Circuit

Drawings clarified to improve Adobe Acrobat presentation.

Section 10 Staying

No major changes

Section 11 Requirements for Earthing and Bonding of the Overhead Network

Contents deleted and reference directed to the Earthing Manual


Database Ref: 15 File Ref: Intro & Specification Feb2001

Manual Name: Overhead Line ManualVol.1

Version Prepared by Approved by Issue Date2 Tony Haggis See Database 02/2001

Overhead Line Manual Volume 1

Introduction and Specification

East Midlands Electricity Overhead Line Manual Volume 1Introduction and SpecificationOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Intro & Specification Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 6 Version: 2

Revision Log For Introduction & Specification

Changes made in version 1

Section Notes about the change1 Full revision of content and style


Section Notes about the change1 Standardisation Of Format Of Document



CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 4

1.1 Foreword 4

2. SCOPE 5

3. SPECIFICATION OF THE OVERHEAD LINE MANUAL - VOLUME 1 5

3.1 Sections of the Overhead Line Manual - Volume 1 5



1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Foreword

The Overhead Line Specifications contained in this Volume cover design specifications,assembly drawings and calculations in respect of LV, 11kV and 33kV overhead lines.

NOTE

N.B. The Specifications in this volume are those currently in use. Details of previousspecifications e.g. the LV open wire system, 40mm² ACSR and pre EATS 43-40specifications are contained in Volume 4 ‘Superseded Systems’.

The complete range of Volumes which form the Overhead Line Manual is as follows:

VOLUME 1. LV to 33kV Specifications

VOLUME 2. Drawings and Reference Information

VOLUME 3. Code of Practice

VOLUME 4. Superseded Systems

VOLUME 5. Live Line

VOLUME 6. Work Specifications

VOLUME 7. 132kV Steel Tower Lines

Further information on Overhead Line Services can be found in the Service Survey Manual.

NOTE

IF IN DOUBT, AND YOU REQUIRE FURTHER INFORMATION, CONSULTNETWORK PERFOMANCE & STANDARDS , ASSET DEVELOPMENT.

Occasionally reference may be made to National Specifications, e.g. the Electricity SupplyRegulations 1988, or other Volumes of the Overhead Line Manual, and in such instances,these must be consulted for further information as required.



2. SCOPE

The Specifications contained in this volume cover:

Single phase and three phase LV overhead lines on wood poles and undereaves systems usingAerial Bundled Conductors to ESI Standards 43-12, 13 and 14 (see also the Service SurveyManual for services).

High Voltage single circuit overhead lines supported on wood poles to EATS Standard 43-40.High voltage in this context covering voltages in the range of 1,000 to 33,000 volts.

33kV double circuit overhead lines of heavy construction on wood poles.

25kV double circuit overhead lines of heavy construction on wood poles (special constructionfor supplies to British Rail Sites).

No provision is made in the Specifications for street lighting switch wires and control cores.

Where a single phase line is required omit the centre conductor and fittings from the standard3 phase construction.

All components used in the construction of lines to the Specifications shall comply with thevarious Standards contained in the document ‘Approved Materials for Overhead Lines’.

3. SPECIFICATION OF THE OVERHEAD LINE MANUAL - VOLUME 1

This volume is divided into sections relating to various aspects of Overhead LinesSpecification.

Each of the sections contains the individual documents relevant to the section, preceded bythe document specifying the contents of the section.

3.1 Sections of the Overhead Line Manual - Volume 1SECTION 1 IntroductionSECTION 2 SafetySECTION 3 Regulations and Wayleave RequirementsSECTION 4 Survey and ProfileSECTION 5 Approved MaterialsSECTION 6 LV ABCSECTION 7 HV Single CircuitSECTION 8 25kV Double CircuitSECTION 9 33kV Double CircuitSECTION 10 StayingSECTION 11 Earthing and BondingSECTION 12 Miscellaneous



This Page Is Intentionally Blank


Database Ref: 14 File Ref: Definition Of Terms UsedFeb 2001

Manual Name: Overhead Line ManualVol. 1


Definition of Terms Used in

Association with Overhead Lines

East Midlands Electricity Definition of Terms Used in Association with Overhead LinesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Definition Of Terms UsedFeb 2001.doc Page 2 of 8 Version: 2

Revision Log For Definition of Terms Used inAssociation with Overhead Lines


Section Notes about the changeDefinition Of Terms Used InAssociation With Overhead Lines

Full revision of content and style.


Section Notes about the changeDefinition Of Terms Used InAssociation With Overhead Lines

Standardisation Of Format Of Document



1. DEFINITIONS

The following definitions apply to terms used in the documents issued by East MidlandsElectricity relating to the specification, design and construction of overhead lines:

AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

Equipment other than that forming part of this line design which may be placed onsupports, such as transformers, fuse-gear etc.

AVERAGE SPAN

The arithmetic average length of a number of spans in a line or section of line.

BASIC SPAN

The span length adopted for sag/tension calculations.

CATCH END

The end of the conductor at which the tensioning procedure is undertaken.

CLASHING

This term is used to describe the physical contact between two different lineconductors of an overhead line displaced from their normal operating position byenvironmental forces, e.g. wind.

CONDUCTOR

A generic term that means simply any conductor of electrical energy. The word can beused with an adjunct to specify the function or performance. e.g. "circuit conductor"means a conductor that is intended to carry electrical current in normal conditions, butdoes not include a conductor provided solely to perform a protective function byconnection to earth or other reference point.

CONDUCTOR DOWNPULL

The vertical loading imposed by the conductors corresponding to a gradient measuredbetween adjacent points of support.

CROSSARM HAMPER

A descriptive term used to include all pole top crossarm components and fixings.

DISTRIBUTION LINE

A line fed from a transformer, providing a supply to more than one customer,separately tapped.



EFFECTIVELY INSULATED CONDUCTOR

A line conductor which is insulated for the working voltage and, where necessary,sheathed to afford mechanical connection.

FLYING STAY

A means of providing a horizontal load to an angle support where it is impractical touse the conventional method of staying.

FREEZING POINT TENSION (FPT)

The design tension of a conductor unloaded at 0°C.

GUARD WIRE

An earthed conductor that is suspended above the power conductors to provideprotection to over-running Telephone wires in the event of a failure.

'H' POLE

See "PORTAL STRUCTURE"

ICE CO-ORDINATE

The intercept on the ice axis of the weather incidence load line (as it applies to EastMidlands Electricity Lines).

INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT

A support in a straight run of a line on which the conductors are either supported insuspension insulator clamps, or on reel, pin or line post insulators.

MAXIMUM CLASHING SPAN

The maximum span length approved for each site, conductor and arrangementcombination.

MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR PRESSURE (MCP)

The likely maximum transverse horizontal component of applied conductor loadcalculated.

MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR RESULTANT LOAD (MCR)

The likely maximum conductor resultant load calculated at 0°C.

MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR TENSION (MCT)

The likely maximum conductor tension assessed at 0°C which is limited either by theapplication of the MCR or of a vibration limit.



MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR WEIGHT (MCW)

The likely maximum transverse vertical component of applied conductor load.

MAXIMUM SPAN

The maximum span length permitted using normal conductor spacing.

OCCASIONAL LONG SPAN

A span of line contained in a run of normal line construction but having a lengthabove the maximum specified for normal span construction.

OFFSET ARRANGEMENT

An arrangement where the conductors are supported offset from the pole by means ofa bracket.

OVERTENSIONING

Excess tension applied above normal theoretical tension at time of erection.

PIN/POST ANGLE SUPPORT/THROUGH SUPPORT

A support at which a line deviates and the conductors are either supported insuspension insulator clamps or, on reel, pin or post insulators.

PRE-TENSIONING

The tension treatment applied to a conductor before final erection tension isestablished.

PORTAL STRUCTURE

A combination of sub-structures erected parallel to each other to give an openarrangement, such as an 'H' pole.

RECOMMENDED SPAN

The average span length in any section to which the line should be planned.Individual spans will normally be within ±20% of the chosen basic span.

REMOTE END

The end of the conductor which is fastened to a support whilst the conductor is notunder tension.

SAG

The vertical distance, under any system of conductor loading, between the conductorand a straight line joining adjacent supporting points, measured mid-span.



SECTION ANGLE SUPPORT

A support at which a line deviates and the conductors are made off on either side ofthe Crossarm on tension insulator sets.

SECTION LENGTH

The horizontal distance between section supports.

SECTION SUPPORT

A support in a straight run of line on which the conductors are made off on either sideof the crossarm on tension insulators.

SERVICE LINE

A line feeding one customer from a distribution line or transformer, consisting of oneor more spans excluding the last span to the premises.

SERVICE SPAN

The last span to a customer terminating on a customer's building.

SPAN

The horizontal distance between adjacent supports.

STAY

High Tensile steel wire with insulators and fittings that transfers the pole topconductor tension to a ground anchor maintaining the balance of the structure.

STRUT

Any support that carries a compressive force caused by conductor tension.

STUB LEG

An additional support to carry or share the weight of heavy equipment, such as atransformer.

TEMPORARY CLAMP

A clamping device (e.g. cum-a-long) which is attached to, and holds the conductorduring tensioning.

TENSIONING DEVICE

A device (e.g. Pull Lift) which is used to temporarily tension a conductor duringinstallation or removal.



TERMINAL SUPPORT

A support at which the conductors are terminated on one side of the support only.

TERMINATION

The end of the conductor which is securely fixed to an end fitting.

WIND CO-ORDINATE

The intercept on the wind pressure axis of the weather incidence load line whose valueis given for differing heights and East Midland Electricity locations.

WEIGHT SPAN

The down weight on a structure caused by the conductor weight measured from thelowest point of the conductor curve in each adjacent span.

WIND LOADING SPAN

The wind loading span associated with any support is half the sum of the spansadjacent to the support.





Database Ref: 16 File Ref: Source References Feb2001

Manual Name: Overhead Line ManualVol. 1


Source of References Used

for Overhead Line Construction

East Midlands Electricity Source of References Used for Overhead Line ConstructionOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Source References Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 10 Version: 2

Revision Log For Source of References Used

for Overhead Line Construction


Section Notes about the change1 Full Revision of Content and Style


Section Notes about the change1 Standardisation of Format of Document



1. REFERENCES

The source of references used in the documents issued by East Midlands Electricity relatingto the specification, design and construction of overhead lines are as follows:

BS 125

Hard-drawn Copper and Copper-Cadmium conductors for Overhead PowerTransmission purposes.

BS 137

Insulators of Ceramic Material or Glass for Overhead Lines with a Nominal Voltagegreater than 1000 V.

BES - 183

General Purpose Galvanised Steel Wire Strand.

BS 215

Aluminium Conductors and Aluminium Conductors, Steel Reinforced, for OverheadPower Transmission.

BS 729

Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles.

BS 913

Wood Preservation by means of Pressure Creosoting.

BS 1320

High Voltage Overhead Lines on Wood Poles, 11kV Conductor Size 0.05 inches².

BS 1990

Wood Poles for Overhead Lines (Power and Telecommunication Lines).

BS 2914

Specification for Surge Diverters for Alternating Current Power Circuits.

BS 3242

Aluminium Alloy Stranded Conductors for Overhead Power Transmission.



BS 3288

Insulator and Conductor Fittings for Overhead Power Lines.

BS 3452

Copper/Chrome Water-borne Wood Preservatives and their Application.

BS 4072

Wood Preservation by means of Water-borne Copper/Chrome/Arsenic Compositions.

BS 4190

ISO Metric Black Hexagon Bolts, Screws and Nuts.

BS 4360

Specification for Weldable Structural Steels.

BS 5649

Lighting Part 1, Definitions and Terms. Columns Part 2, Dimensions and Tolerances

BS 6004

PVC Insulated Cables (Non-Armoured) for Electric Power and Lighting.

BS 6485

PVC Covered Conductors for Overhead Power Lines.

BES - L1

British Electricity Specification for Medium and Low Voltage Overhead Lines onWood Poles.

BES - L38

Protective greasing of PVC covered Copper and Bare and PVC Covered AluminiumBased Conductors.

EATS Standard 09.7

PVC Insulated Concentric Service Cables with Stranded Copper or Solid AluminiumPhase Conductors and Copper Concentric Conductors.

EATS Standard 43-8

Overhead Line Clearances



EATS Standard 43-10

11kV Single Circuit Overhead Lines of Light Construction on Wood Poles.

EATS Standard 43-12

Insulated Aerial Bundled Conductor - Erection Requirements for LV OverheadDistribution Systems.

EATS Standard 43-13

Aerial Bundled Conductors (ABC) Insulated with Cross-Linked Polythene for LowVoltage Overhead Distribution.

EATS Standard 43-14

Conductor Fittings and Associated Apparatus for use with LV Aerial BundledConductor.

EATS Standard 43-15

Insulator Binds and equivalent Helical Fittings for Overhead Lines.

EATS Standard 43-20

11kV and 33kV Single Circuit Overhead Lines of Heavy Construction on WoodPoles.

EATS Standard 43-40

High Voltage Single Circuit Overhead Lines on Wood Poles

EATS Standard 43-88

Treatment of Wood Poles and associated timber for Overhead Lines.

EATS Standard 43-90

Anti-Climbing Devices for HV Lines up to and including 132kV.

EATS Standard 43-91

Stay Strands and Stay Fittings for Overhead Lines.

EATS Standard 43-92

Conductor Terminations, Joints and Insulation Binds for Overhead Lines up to andincluding 132kV.

EATS Standard 43-93

Line Insulators.



EATS Standard 43-94

Earth Rods and their Connectors

EATS Standard 43-95

Steelwork for Overhead Lines.

EATS Standard 43-96

Fasteners and Washers for Wood Pole Overhead Lines.

ERA Report 90/0386

Current Carrying Capacity of LV Aerial Bundled Conductor.

EATS 43-103

LV Overhead Line Temporary Shrouding Materials.

Health & Safety Executive Guidance Notes GS 6

Avoidance of danger from overhead electric power lines.

Design Memorandum 043/2

Design Memorandum 099/100

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988.

The Electricity (Overhead Lines) Regulations 1970

Statutory Instrument 1970 No 1355

Engineering Recommendation EB/BT1

Conditions for British Telecom and Electricity Board joint use of poles.

Engineering Recommendation G35

Precautions to be taken by persons working in the vicinity of Overhead ElectricalLines on construction.

Engineering Recommendation G39

Model Code of Practice covering Electrical Safety in the planning Installation,Commissioning and Maintenance of Public Lighting and other street furniture.

Engineering Recommendation G42/1

Overhead Lines in the Vicinity of Recreational Sites.



Engineering Recommendation G45/1

Notes of guidance for Electric Boards on the use of Irrigators Slurry Guns and HighPressure hoses in the vicinity of Overhead Lines.

Engineering Recommendation PO.1

Post Office Memorandum A80(e), ‘Protection of Post Office Lines from Contact withLow or Medium Voltage Power Lines’.


Post Office Memorandum A231(b), ‘Protection of Post Office Lines from HighVoltage Power Lines’.


‘Technical Conditions Applicable under Master Wayleave Agreements between thePost Office and the Electricity Supply Industry for Wayleaves on Post OfficeTelecommunications Property’.

SMCC 004

Notes of Guidance on the Safe working of third parties in close proximity to live lowvoltage overhead conductors.

East Midlands Electricity Manuals and Codes of Practice.

The specific manuals and codes of practice are referred to in the documents.

NOTE

CERTAIN STANDARDS QUOTED MAY HAVE BEEN SUPERSEDED.

EATS (Electricity Association Technical Standard) and BS (British Standards) arerevised when necessary by the issue either of revised pages or complete new editions. Itis important that users of these Standards should ascertain that they are in possession ofthe latest issue.

2. RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER BODIES

Where lines are erected over or alongside the plant of British Telecom or British Rail, theprovisions agreed shall be complied with. Additionally, the requirements of the followingbodies should be noted:

The British Waterways Board.

The Ministry of Transport and Local Authorities for Motorway and 'A' classified roadcrossings.



3. METRIC/IMPERIAL CONVERSIONS

Length

1 millimetre = 0.03937 inches1 centimetre (cm) = 10 mm = 0.3937 inches1 metre (m) = 1000 mm = 1.0936 yards1 kilometre (km) = 1000 m = 0.6214 miles1 inch = 25.400 mm1 yard = 36 inches = 0.9144 m1 mile = 1760 yards = 1.6093 km

Area

1 sq metre (m²) = 10,000 cm² = 1.1960 sq yds1 hectare (ha) = 10,000 m² = 2.4711 acres1 sq km (km²) = 100 hectares = 0.3861 sq mile1 sq yd = 9 sq ft = 0.8361 m²1 acre = 4840 sq yds = 4046.9 m²

Capacity

1 cu dm (dm³) = 1000 cm³ = 0.0353 cu ft1 cu metre (m³) = 1000 dm³ = 1.3080 cu yds1 litre = 1 dm³ = 0.2200 gallon1 cu yd = 27 cu ft = 0.7646 m³1 pint = 4 gills = 0.5683 litre1 gallon = 8 pints = 4.5461 litres

Weight

1 gramme (g) = 1000 mg = 0.0353 oz1 kilogramme (kg) = 1000 g = 2.2046 lb1 tonne (t) = 1000 kg = 0.9842 ton1 ounce = 437.5 grains = 28.350 g1 pound = 16 oz = 0.4536 kg1 ton = 2240 pounds = 1.0161 tonnes



Force

1 lb. F. = 4.448 Newtons 1 N = 0.2248 lbs. f.1 lb. F. = 0.453 kg. f. 1 kg. f. = 2.2046 lbs. f.1 kg. f = 9.81 Newtons. 1 N = 0.10197 kg. f.1 kN = 224.8 lbs. f. 1 kN = 101.972 kg. f.

1 kN. is approximately equal to 2 cwts.

Tooling Examples

Pul-lift 15 cwt. Pulling 7.5 kN. Max. Lifting 765 kg. max.Pul-lift 30 cwt. Pulling 15 kN. Max. Lifting 1530 kg. max.Pul-lift 3 ton. Pulling 30 kN. Max. Lifting 3060 kg. max.





Database Ref: 21 File Ref: Safety Feb 2001 Manual Name: Overhead Line ManualVol. 1


Safety

East Midlands Electricity SafetyOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Safety Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 4 Version: 1

Revision Log For Safety


Section Notes about the change2 Changes made to format of document only.



2 SAFETY

2.1 HEALTH AND SAFETY

The Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974 whilst placing a duty upon employers toensure, so far as is reasonably practical, the health, safety and welfare of employees whilstat work also places duties on every employee whilst at work to take care for the health andsafety of himself and of other persons who may be affected by his acts or omissions.Every employee is also required to co-operate with his employer, or any other person, sofar as is necessary to enable that employer or other person to discharge the duties orrequirements imposed by the Act.

2.2 EAST MIDLANDS ELECTRICITY POLICY

It is East Midlands Electricity policy that the persons in charge of the various stages of thework or activity shall have the appropriate competence and authority and shall understandthe Distribution Safety Rules, related documents and procedures, the methods of workand any Local Management Instructions. Such persons shall understand the dangers thatmight arise and the precautions to be taken over the whole period of the work or activity.

East Midlands Electricity policy requires that all persons at work are adequately instructedand supervised and are competent to avoid danger, according to the circumstances of thework they are doing. It is also East Midlands Electricity policy that the relevant legalrequirements, the Distribution Safety Rules and other required health and safetyprecautions are observed at all times.

2.3 WORK ON SITE

Safety procedures and requirements for work on site are contained in Volume 3 of thisManual and the Safety Manual.

2.4 WORKING ON SUPPORTS

When work is carried out on supports or structure supporting LIVE HIGH VOLTAGEAPPARATUS or CONDUCTORS it shall be carried out in accordance with theDistribution Safety Rules and related APPROVED procedures. Particular care should beexercised for signs of rot in wood poles and corrosion in steel poles, concrete poles andtowers especially in lines in excess of 25 years.

2.5 WORKING ON CONDUCTORS

Before working on any conductor or conductor fittings (dead and earthed lines), ensurethere are no signs of deterioration, i.e. broken strands, bulging etc, especially in lines inexcess of 25 years. See Volumes 3 and 4 of this Manual.

2.6 SAFETY TO THE PUBLIC (PLAY AREAS ETC)

When working over land which is accessible to the public, in particular over playingfields and caravan sites etc., it is essential that measures are taken to ensure safety topersons or their property on preparation of this work and both during and on completionof site work.





Database Ref: 22 File Ref: Clearances Feb 2001 Manual Name: Overhead Line manualVol.1


Overhead Line Clearances

East Midlands Electricity Overhead Line ClearancesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Clearances Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 24 Version:2

Revision Log For Overhead Line Clearances


Section Notes about the change3 Full revision of content and style.


Section Notes about the change3 Revised in line with EATS 43-8 Issue 3 November 2000



CONTENTS

1. COMPLIANCE 4

1.1 Clearances to ground and roads 4

2. CLEARANCES TO OBSTACLES 4

2.1 Clearances Where Power Lines Cross or are in Close Proximity 4

2.2 Railway Crossings 4

2.3 Waterway crossings 5

2.4 British Telecom lines 5

2.5 Recreational sites 5

2.6 Clearances of excavations to existing Overhead Line Supports 5

3. DRAWINGS 17

APPENDIX A - CLEARANCES TO OBSTACLES - PHILOSOPHY 22

FIGURESFIG.1. CLEARANCE TO LIGHTING COLUMNS 17

FIG.2. CLEARANCES FROM LV CONDUCTORS 18

FIG.3. CLEARANCE TO OBJECTS (ON WHICH A PERSON MAY STAND) 19

FIG.4. EXCAVATIONS ADJACENT TO OVERHEAD LINE SUPPORTS - 19

FIG.5. CLEARANCE TO TREES 20

FIG.6. CLEARANCES TO FENCES AND WALLS 21

FIG.7. NORMAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLEARANCE BETWEEN UNINSULATED HVCONDUCTOR AND A BUILDING OR STRUCTURE 21

TABLESTABLE 1. CLEARANCES TO GROUND AND ROADS 6

TABLE 2. LV ABC CLEARANCES FOR INSULATED CONDUCTORS 8

TABLE 3. CLEARANCES TO OBSTACLES 9

TABLE 4. MINIMUM CLEARANCES WHERE POWER LINES CROSS 13

TABLE 5. PRINCIPAL VERTICAL CLEARANCES TO RAILWAY 14

TABLE 6. PRINCIPAL VERTICAL CLEARANCES TO WATERWAYS, CANALS ANDRESERVOIRS 15



1. COMPLIANCE

The minimum heights of line conductors are shown in Tables 1 to 6 and shall comply with:

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988.

The requirements of EATS 43-8 Issue 3 November 2000 and EATS 43-12.

1.1 Clearances to ground and roads

Clearances specified in Table 1 and 2 must not be infringed at the specified maximumconductor temperature with the conductor (including its suspension insulators if fitted)hanging vertically in still air or deflected at any angle up to 45° from the vertical. Anadditional clearance to ground of 300mm may be allowed to compensate for long term creep,including crossing over other lines, plant or property.

2. CLEARANCES TO OBSTACLES

Clearances specified in Table 3 must not be infringed at the specified maximum conductortemperature with the conductor (including its suspension insulators if fitted) hangingvertically in still air or deflected at any angle up to 45° from the vertical towards the objectunless otherwise specified. The clearances apply in any direction.

2.1 Clearances Where Power Lines Cross or are in Close Proximity

Clearances in Table 4 shall apply where power lines cross or are in close proximity to oneanother. In all cases the clearances shall be determined by the ultimate system voltage of theupper or lower line, whichever is the greater.

2.2 Railway Crossings

Clearances to railways and their associated lines, buildings and yards are covered by thesecond schedule (General and Engineering) of the Condition Railway Master WayleaveAgreement.

Table 5 lists the principal vertical clearances referred to in the above agreement. Forhorizontal clearances and clearances to railway circuits (excluding traction wires) referenceshould be made to the Agreement.



2.3 Waterway crossings

Clearances to waterways are not subject to a single National Agreement but are dealt with byagreement with the appropriate Authority. Table 6 gives clearances specified by selectedAuthorities. Actual clearances over waterways and rivers should be negotiated direct with theAuthority concerned.

2.4 British Telecom lines

Special consideration needs to be given to British Telecom lines and joint attachmentarrangements.

The relevant requirements are specified in the current Engineering Recommendations andJoint Use Agreement documents available at all Business Unit offices.

2.5 Recreational sites

Special consideration needs to be given to all clearances in the vicinity of recreational sites.

Appropriate guidance is given in Engineering Recommendation G42/1.

2.6 Clearances of excavations to existing Overhead Line Supports

To ensure the integrity of existing supports under tension it is essential that new excavationsare maintained at the minimum distances specified in FIG.4.



TABLE 1. CLEARANCES TO GROUND AND ROADS (For conductors at60°C maximum)

Min clearance (m)Item Description of clearance system voltage

LV† 11kV 33kV 132kV1.1 Line conductor at any point not over road. 5.2 5.8* 5.8* 6.7

(Note 1)Pre October 1971 at 50°C 5.2 5.2 5.2 6.7

1.2 Line conductor to road surface other thanas specified in 1.3, 1.4, 1.5. (Note 2) 5.8 5.8 5.8 6.7

Pre October 1971 at 50°C 5.8 6.0 6.0 6.71.3 Line conductor to road surface of designated

“6.1m high load” routes 6.9 6.9 7.1‡ 7.8§(Note 3)

1.4 Line conductor to motorway or other roadsurface where “Skycradle” can be used. (Note4) 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.8

1.5 Line conductor to motorway road surface wherescaffolding is to be used on:

1. Normal 3 lane motorways 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.62. Elevated 2 lane motorways. 11.0 11.0 11.0 11.6(Note 5)

1.6 Bare live metalwork, transformer terminals,jumper connections, etc. 4.3 4.3 4.3 CZSR(Note 6)

† Open Wire System

* 5.8m clearance used as for Item 1.2 (EATS 43-8 specifies 5.2m)

‡ 7.1m clearance used in accordance with previous practice. (EATS 43-8 specifies6.9m)

§ 7.8m clearance used in accordance with previous practice. (EATS 43-8 specifies7.5m)

CZSR Controlled Zone Safety Rules Apply



NOTES TO TABLE 1.The following notes are based on EATS 43-8 notes to Table 1:

1. There is no specified ground clearance for effectively insulated conductors atlocations which are not over roads accessible to vehicular traffic, but such conductors must bepositioned so that they are not likely to be damaged or cause injury. These clearances arebased on a vehicle height not exceeding 4.5m (except for the 6.1m high load routes)(See Table 2 for LV ABC clearances for insulated conductors EATS 43-12). Where there isno possible access by vehicles the 11kV and 33kV clearance(s) may be reduced to 5.2m

2. The height of any wire or cable (other than a line conductor) which is attached to asupport carrying a line conductor is 5.8m above any roadway irrespective of the line voltage.The clearances specified allow for the safe passage below the line of a vehicle of maximumheight 5m.

3. ‘High load’ routes are roads designed by the Department of the Environment forwhich the higher load clearance of 6.1m must be maintained. Details of ‘High Load’ routescan be obtained from Technical Support, Network Development.

4. These clearances apply to situations where it is possible to use the Skycradle forconductor erection and maintenance. These clearances allow for the positioning of theSkycradle under a live circuit. Where the circuit under which the Skycradle is to be positionedand at any adjacent circuit can be made dead during the slewing of the Skycradle, theseclearances can be reduced to 7.6m for all voltages.

5. In situations where the Skycradle cannot be used to erect or maintain lines which crossa motorway, these clearances should be adopted. They allow for the erection of scaffold/guard netting with the overhead circuits live.

6. Should the use of Skycradles or the erection of temporary scaffolding in proximity tooverhead lines be considered then appropriate guidance must be sought relating to acceptableworking methods and appropriate preparation prior to work commencing.

7. These clearances are not required for effectively insulated jumper connections butmust be maintained from any bare jumpers and terminals.



TABLE 2. LV ABC CLEARANCES FOR INSULATED CONDUCTORS -CLEARANCES TO ROADS, GROUND, OBSTACLES ANDTREES. (See Note 1) (For Conductors at 75°C maximum)

MinimumItem Description of clearance clearance

(m)2.1 Line conductor to road surface (for high load and motorway routes

refer to Table 1).5.8

2.2 Line conductor along the line of fences, boundary walls, hedgerowsand similar situations.

4.0

2.3 All other situations (to ground level) 5.2*2.4 Line conductor to road surface between domestic properties

(inaccessible to vehicles).3.5

2.5 Line conductor to surface of building or structure on which a man maystand (vertical).

3.0

2.6 Line conductor to surface of building or structure on which a man maystand (horizontal and in still air)

1.0

2.7 As for 2.5 inaccessible to a man standing 1.02.8 As for 2.6 inaccessible to a man standing (deflected) 0.52.9 Line conductor to lighting column or BT support 0.32.10 All other clearances as denoted for LV systems in Tables 1, 3, 4, 5, and

6.0.3

* See Note 2

NOTES TO TABLE 2.

1. The use of the cable system through trees is permissible and can provide considerablebenefits when compared with open wire systems. The construction should take intoaccount potential dangers of abrasion and unauthorised access.

2. This clearance may be increased to 5.8m if large agricultural vehicles (e.g. CombinedHarvesters) are required to pass beneath.



TABLE 3. CLEARANCES TO OBSTACLES

Min clearance (m)Item Description of clearance system voltage

LV† 11kV 33kV 132kVBare live metalwork e.g. transformer terminals,jumper connections, conductors, etc. on any

3.1 overhead line support to any object on which a 4.3 4.3 4.3 *person may stand including ladders, accessplatforms etc. (Note 1).Line conductor to any object on which a person,

3.2 may stand including ladders, access platforms 3.0 3.7‡ 3.7‡ 3.7§scaffolding etc. (Note 2)Line conductor to any object to which access is not

3.3 required AND on which a person cannot stand or 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4lean a ladder. (Note 3)Line conductor to trees under/adjacent to line and:1. Unable to support ladder/climber. 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4

3.4 2. Capable of supporting ladder/climber. 3.0 3.7‡ 3.7‡ 3.7§3. Trees falling towards line with line

conductors hanging vertically only. 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4(Note 4 and FIG.5 based on CLEAR 5).

3.5 Line conductor to trees in orchards and hop 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.6gardens. (Note 5)

3.6 Line conductors to irrigators, slurry guns and highpressure hoses. (Note 6) 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0Line conductors to street lighting standards with:1. Standard in normal upright position 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.3

3.7 2. Standard falling towards line with lineconductor hanging vertically only 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.3

3. Standard falling towards line 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.8(Notes 7 to 13 and FIG.1. based on CLEAR 1)

† Open Wire Systems

‡ 3.7m clearance used in accordance with previous practice. (EATS 43-8 specifies 3.0m)

§ 3.7m clearance used in accordance with previous practice. (EATS 43-8 specifies 3.6m)

* Controlled Zone Safety Rules Apply



NOTES TO TABLE 3.

The following notes are based on EATS 43-8 notes to Table 2:

1. These clearances apply to supports of overhead lines which in addition supporttransformers, isolators, cable sealing ends etc. (See Table 2 for LV ABC clearances forinsulated conductors).

2. These clearances are the nearest to an overhead line conductor that a person may standand only allow for free movement of short hand held objects. Detailed guidance onclearances to electric lines on construction sites is given in the HSE guidance bookletGS6.

3. Account should be taken of the possible movement of the object, e.g. flag pole in thewind. These clearances also apply to moving objects to which access is precludedduring passage below the line. The height or position of the object should take intoaccount any possible undulating or rocking movement of the object, e.g. a mobilecrane jib travelling over uneven ground. Detailed guidance on clearances to electriclines on construction sites is given in HSE guidance booklet GS6.

4. Clearances quoted in 3.4 (1) and (2) are minimum acceptable clearances but in practicelarger clearances will be necessary to take account of growth rates of trees and of theswaying of trees/branches in the wind. Clearances quoted in 3.4 (3) are recommendedin order to protect lines from falling trees but due to wayleave considerations will notalways be attainable. Detailed guidance on the avoidance of danger from electric linesin forests is contained in Engineering Recommendation G55.

5. These clearances must be obtained vertically when any part of a tree is within 7.5mhorizontally of a line. For hop gardens the clearances apply to the strain wires formingthe mesh supporting system.

6. The clearances quoted are for general guidance only. Detailed guidance on the use ofirrigators, slurry guns and high pressure hoses in the vicinity of overhead lines iscontained in Engineering Recommendation G45/1.

7. The clearances quoted in 3.7 (1) assume that maintenance platforms will be positionedsuch that clearances quoted in item 3.2 are maintained. Where effectively insulatedLV conductors are used, clearances may be reduced to those indicated in Fig 2. Theclearances quoted in 3.7 (3) can be neglected if the location of the lighting standard issuch that impact by a vehicle is impossible. Engineering Recommendation G39contains guidance on maintenance of street lighting standards in proximity to overheadlines. Where for maintenance purposes the operative requires to work on the upperpart of a lantern, within the clearances specified in 3.2, appropriate safety measuresshall be taken, which shall be agreed in advance between the distribution ortransmission company and the lighting maintenance company or authority. Theclearances quoted in 3.7 (2) include additional clearance to allow for the erection ofstreet lighting standards.

8. Lighting columns shall not be erected within 0.5m of LV ABC lines or 3m for OpenWire. (The LV phase conductors shall be insulated for a distance of 2m either side of



the column if a column is within 3m of the conductors).

NOTE TO TABLE 3. (cont.)

9 Minimum Clearances of Overhead Lines to Street Lighting Columns

a. Motorway and trunk road lighting - Columns adjacent to and under lines should behinged and base plate mounted.

b. In exceptional circumstances when a column is required within 1m of LVconductors then it shall be so sited that the conductors can be attached to thecolumn with approved insulators and fittings (consideration should be given toreplacing LV Open Wire conductors with ABC), and the column bonded to theneutral conductor, the LV system being converted to PME where required.

c. Lanterns may be sited both above and below ABC lines with 0.5m separation

d. No lantern shall be erected above bare conductors.

10. Lanterns (Low Level) Attached to East Midlands Electricity Structure

a. Street Lighting brackets of an approved type may be attached to the Company’s LVpoles a minimum distance of 0.5m below the neutral conductors present or futurelowest position and fed from conductors on that pole.

b. The bracket shall be bonded to the neutral in the case of PME systems or earthed bymeans of an electrode 10 ohms maximum resistance installed at the base of thepole.

11. Lanterns (High Level) Attached to Company’s Structures

a. Lanterns shall only be erected on brackets above LV conductors subject to theapproval by East Midland Electricity as to the material, type and design of thebracket and subject to the pole supporting the mains, conductors on line insulatorsonly. This prohibits the attachment of lanterns and brackets to poles fitted withoutrigger brackets, cable boxes and section insulators. Where services are attached,lanterns and brackets may only be fitted where no hazard is created.

b. The phase conductors shall be insulated for a minimum distance of 2m either sideof the pole including any jumpers and connections.

12. Access

a. The installation of high level lanterns or the erection of columns shall be carried outby personnel authorised by East Midland Electricity.

b. Access for maintenance of the lanterns shall be made by using approved nonconducting ladders, tower wagon or hoist in the case of low level fittings or by



approved tower wagon or hoist only in the case of high level fittings.

c. Maintenance work other than above, shall be restricted to the lantern fitting andbracket and any work carried out to the leads and connections to East MidlandElectricity’s conductors shall be carried out by East Midland Electricity staff.

13. Indemnity

a. East Midland Electricity will be indemnified against any damage loss or claimarising from the attachment of any lantern of fittings to the Company’s pole.



TABLE 4. MINIMUM CLEARANCES WHERE POWER LINES CROSSOR ARE IN CLOSE PROXIMITY

Minimum clearance (m)Item Description of clearance System voltage

LV 11 33 66 132 275 400kV kV kV kV kV kV

Lowest line conductor or earth wire of4.1 upper line to highest line conductor of 1.0 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.7 3.7 4.4

lower line (Note 1 and 3).Lowest line conductor or earth wire of

4.2 upper line to earth wire over lower line 0.7 1.4 1.6 2.3 2.7 3.7 4.4where erected (Note 1 and 3)Lowest line conductor or earth wire of

4.3 upper line to any point on a support of 2.7 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.6 4.6 5.3the lower line on which a person maystand (Note 2 and 3)

4.4 Support of upper line and any conductor 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 15.0 15.0 15.0of lower line (Note 2 and 3)

NOTES TO TABLE 4.


1. One of the following methods of determining clearances must be adopted. With theupper conductors/earth wire hanging vertically and the lower conductors/earth wiredeflected at 45° under the following conditions:

a. Upper conductor at its specified maximum temperature coincident with lowerconductor at an assumed temperature of 25°C less than its specified maximumTemperature.

b. Lower conductor at a temperature of -5.6°C (no ice) coincident with upperconductor at an assumed temperature of 20°C

c. LV clearances cover LV ABC and Open Wire Systems.

Or Alternatively

With the upper conductor/earth wire hanging vertically at its specified maximumtemperature and the lower conductor/earth wire deflected at any angle up to 45° at atemperature of -5.6°C (no ice). In localities where there is a high likelihood ofconductor icing it may be appropriate to consider the effects of such icing.

2. Clearances must be obtained with the conductor/earth wire at its specified maximumtemperature and deflected by any angle up to 45°.



3. Sectionalising Cable Crossing Facilities.

Consideration should be given to sectionalising the lower line at each side of thecrossing and, or providing an underground cable section

TABLE 5. PRINCIPAL VERTICAL CLEARANCES TO RAILWAY ANDASSOCIATED STRUCTURES

Min clearance m (ft)Item Description of clearance system voltage kV

Conductor or earth wire to: LV 11 33 132kV kV kV

5.1 Ground level 6.1m 6.1m 6.1m 6.7m20ft (20ft) (20ft) (22ft)

5.2 Ground level at roads or yards where road 10.7m 10.7m 10.7m 11.2mmobile cranes are likely to be employed (35ft) (35ft) (35ft) (37ft)

5.3 Rail level (see Note 1) 7.3m 7.3m 7.3m 8.0m(24ft) (24ft) (24ft) (27ft)

5.4 Buildings, gantries or other structures on 3.0m 3.0m 3.0m 3.7mwhich a man might stand and to trace wires (10ft) (10ft) (10ft) (12ft)(see Note 1)

The imperial values take precedence since they are specified in the Agreement.

NOTES TO TABLE 5.


1. The clearances specified in 5.3 and 5.4 do not incorporate any allowances for use ofscaffolding or Skycradle across railway tracks/traction wires duringerection/maintenance of overhead lines. Clearances of 2.75m (9 ft) and 4.9m (16 ft)are required between scaffold net or Skycradle boom and traction wires and railrespectively.

2. LV clearances cover LV ABC and Open Wire Systems.



TABLE 6. PRINCIPAL VERTICAL CLEARANCES TO WATERWAYS,CANALS AND RESERVOIRS

Line voltage not exceedingWaterway LV 11-33kV 132kV 275kV Over 275kV

(m) (m) (m) (m) (m)River Trent 18.3 19.2 19.8 20.7 21.3Special canals and reservoirs 14.3 15.2 15.9 16.8 17.4Chesterfield Canal Harthill New Worksop, Notts.

Harthill Top Worksop, Notts.Killamarsh Pond Worksop, Notts.Pebley Pond Worksop, Notts.Woodall Pond Worksop, Notts.

Coventry Canal Oldbury Nr Atherstone, WarwicksCromford Canal Butterley Nr Ripley, Derbys.

Codner Park Nr Alfreton, Derbys.Grand Union Canal Braunston Nr Daventry, Northants.

Daventry Daventry, Northants.Drayton Daventry, Northants.Napton Lower Nr Southam, Warwicks.Napton Upper Nr Southam, Warwicks.Naseby Naseby, Northants.Saddington Nr Market Harborough.Stockton Nr Southam, Warwicks.Sulby Nr Welford, Northants.Welford Nr Welford, Northants.

Grantham Canal Denton Nr Grantham, Lincs.Knipton Nr Grantham, Lincs.

Nottm Canal Moorgreen Nr Eastwood, Notts.Oxford Canal Boddington Nr Byfield, Northants.

Byfield (Old Pool) Nr Byfield, Northants.Clattercote Nr Cropredy, Oxon.Newbold Rugby, Warwicks.Wormleighton Nr Fenny Compton Warwicks.



NOTES TO TABLE 6.

1. Schedule of minimum clearances above Waterways and Reservoirs owned or managedby British Waterways Board

a. The clearances indicated are to be regarded as a basis for negotiations and lowerclearances may be acceptable by consultation with the British Waterways Board’sArea Engineer.

b. The minimum clearances are measured at the lowest point of that part of theoverhead line crossing (having regard to its likely maximum temperature) over theBritish Waterways Board’s property. Measurements are from the level of thetowpaths, or in the case of reservoirs, from the adjacent bank.

c. LV clearances cover LV ABC and Open Wire Systems.



3. DRAWINGS

FIG.1. CLEARANCE TO LIGHTING COLUMNS

MAXIMUMSWING

45°

MINIMUM CLEARANCE(STANDARD FALLING IN STILL AIR)AS TABLE 3 ITEM 3.7.2

SAG OF C0NDUCTORS ATPOSITION ADJACENT TOLIGHTING STANDARD ATMAXIMUM TEMPERATURE.

POINT OF SUPPORT

1

MINIMUM CLEARANCE(STANDARD FALLING TOWARDSSWING CONDUCTOR)AS TABLE 3 ITEM 3.7.3

MINIMUM CLEARANCEAS TABLE 3 ITEM 3.7.1

2:

1:

2

CLE

AR1X

1.SK

F



FIG.2. CLEARANCES FROM LV CONDUCTORS

ALL DIMENSIONS RELATE TO LV OPEN WIRE SYSTEMS (SEE NOTE 3)

A: 1: ALL PHASE NEUTRAL AND SWITCHWIRE CONDUCTORS IN THIS AREA SHALL BE INSULATED FOR 1.5M FROM THE COLUMN OR LANTERN.

B: 2: ALL PHASE NEUTRAL AND SWITCHWIRE CONDUCTORS BENEATH THE OVERHANGING ARM OF THE COLUMN SHALL BE INSULATED THROUGHOUT THE SPAN OR INSULATED AS IN 'A' ABOVE BUT WITH SUITABLE CONDUCTOR SPACERS.

N.B. LV ABC CLEARANCES ARE CONTAINED IN TABLE 2.

3: CLEARANCES DENOTED IN APPROPRIATE TABLES

NEAREST LV POLE1.5m MIN

1.5mMIN

SEENOTE A

SEE NOTE A

PLANNOTES:

ELEVATION

NO CONDUCTORS

LANTERN

1.0mMIN

0.3 MIN

SEE

LANTERN

NO CONDUCTORS

SEE

NOTE

B

CLEA

R2X1

.SKF

1mMIN

1.5mMIN

1mMIN

1mMIN

1.5mMIN

NO

TE B

1.5mMIN

1.5mMIN



FIG.3. CLEARANCE TO OBJECTS (ON WHICH A PERSON MAY STAND)

FIG.4. EXCAVATIONS ADJACENT TO OVERHEAD LINE SUPPORTS -

POINT OF SUPPORT

FENCE / WALL

CLE

AR3X

1.SK

F

STRUCTURE

SAG OF CONDUCTOR ATCROSSING POSITION ATMAXIMUM TEMPERATURE

SEE TABLE 3ITEM 3.2

MAXIMUM SWINGALLOWABLE MINIMUM CLEARANCE

TV/RADIO AERIAL

BUILDING

45° 45°

POLE DEPTH TAKEN FORPOLES IN EXCESS OF 12m

1. NO POINT OF EXCAVATION SHALL COME NEARER THAN 8m FROM NEAREST POINT OF TOWER MUFF.2. THE ANGLE OF REPOSE FOR THE SOIL MUST BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT (AVERAGE VALUE 30 DEGREES)

TABLE FOR GUIDANCE ONLY:SITE CONDITINDS TO BE ASSESSED FOR SPECIFIC PROPOSALS

EXCAVATIONS IN UNSUPPORTED GROUNDDISTANCE FROM POLE EXCAVATION DEPTH

2.2m 0.58m3.2m 1.15m4.2m 1.73m5.2m 2.30m

B: STEEL TOWERS (ALL VOLTAGES)

3. IN WET SOILS ADDITIONAL CARE MUST BE TAKEN.

NOTES:

TOWER LEG

8m

EXCAVATION CAN BE CARRIEDOUT UP TO THIS POINT IF FULLY TIMBERED AND SUPPORTEDDURING EXCAVATION ANDREINSTATEMENT.

A: WOOD POLES (ALL VOLTAGES)

GROUND TO REMAIN UNDISTURBED

30°

CLE

AR

4E1.

SKF



FIG.5. CLEARANCE TO TREES

CONDUCTOR SAG ATMAXIMUM TEMPERATURE

ORCHARDS

TREE BELOW SWUNGCONDUCTOR

MINIMUM CLEARANCE :AS TABLE 3ITEM 3.4.3

MINIMUM CLEARANCEAS TABLE 3 ITEM 3.5

<7.5m

CONDUCTOR SAGAT POSITION ADJACENT TO TREE AT MAXIMUMTEMPERATURE

POINT OF SUPPORT

CONDUCTOR SAG ATMAXIMUM TEMPERATURE

TREE FALLING TOWARDSLINE IN STILL AIR

≥≥≥≥ 7.5m 7.5m≥≥≥≥

MINIMUM CLEARANCE :AS TABLE 3ITEM 3.4.1/2

45° MAXIMUM HEIGHTOF TREES

CLE

AR

5X1.

SKF



FIG.6. CLEARANCES TO FENCES AND WALLS

FIG.7. NORMAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLEARANCE BETWEENUNINSULATED HV CONDUCTOR AND A BUILDING OR STRUCTURE

CONDUCTORS (AT MAX SAG IN STILL AIR)NOT TO COME WITHIN THE AREA BOUNDED BY THE HATCHED LINE

3.7m HV

1.5 x H OR 14m WHICH EVER ISTHE LESSER

'H'

CL5

-EXT

2.SK

F

CONDUCTOR AT MAXIMUMTEMPERATURE

POINT OF SUPPORT

FENCES OR WALLS

NOTE:STATUTORY HEIGHT TO GROUND LEVEL MUST BE MAINTAINED IN ALL CASES

CLEARANCE

CL4

-EXT

2.SK

F



EA Technical Specification 43-8Page 18 Issue 3November 2000

APPENDIX A - CLEARANCES TO OBSTACLES - PHILOSOPHY

INTRODUCTION

The clearances to obstacles specified in 6.2 and Table 2 have been computed, in general,using the philosophy set out below.Clearances to obstacles shall be maintained such that under no circumstances will the 'safetydistance', as quoted in the Distribution Safety Rules, be infringed. This condition shall applyto both fixed obstacles and to any temporary obstacles that can be placed on or adjacent tofixed obstacles, for example a ladder against a building, or a mobile platform adjacent to astreet lighting column. Clearances to obstacles must be maintained under all likely lineconditions, i.e. at maximum and minimum sag and with conductors hanging in still air anddeflected due to wind. The two most probable conditions relative to obstacles are set outbelow.The 'safety distances' as quoted in the Distribution Safety Rules are computed by thesummation of the Basic Electrical Clearance and an Additional Allowance, and at the varioussystem voltages, are:

System Voltage <33 66 132 275 400

Basic Electrical Clearance m 0.4 0.7 1.1 2.1 2.8Additional Allowance m 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3Safety Distance m 0.8 1.0 1.4 2.4 3.1

A.I NORMAL CLEARANCE

This is the distance between the conductor at maximum sag hanging vertically or deflected byany angle up to 45° and an obstacle. It is not normal to permit any obstacle to be placed abovean electric line. If a person can stand on the obstacle or any temporary obstacle adjacent to it,then the normal clearance shall include an 'application factor' of 2.2 m to allow for the personto move their arm whilst holding a short metallic object. Should it be necessary for a personto move their arm whilst holding a longer object, then this normal clearance may have to beincreased by a distance of up to the length of the object.



A.2 PASSING CLEARANCE

This is the minimum distance between the conductor at maximum sag hanging vertically or atan angle of up to 45° towards an obstacle and the obstacle itself when it is moving relative tothe line. The passing clearance therefore does not normally require an 'application factor'since it is intended for obstacles which are moving, and on which no person is standing,relative to the line. This clearance can also be applied to any obstacle when there is nolikelihood of any temporary platform being situated adjacent to it.The Normal and Passing Clearances, which have been derived from the 'safety distances', atthe various system voltages are:

System Voltage <33 66 132 275 400Normal Clearance m 3.0 3.2 3.6 4.6 5.3Passing Clearance m 0.8 1.0 1.4 2.4 3.1





Database Ref: 23 File Ref: Guidance on WayleavesFeb 2001



Guidance on Wayleave Requirements

for Overhead Lines

East Midlands Electricity Guidance On Wayleave Requirements For Overhead Lines Overhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Guidance on Wayleaves Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 8 Version: 2

Revision Log For Guidance On Wayleave Requirements ForOverhead Lines




Section Notes about the change3



CONTENTS

1. WAYLEAVES 4

2. LIAISON WITH OTHER AUTHORITIES 4

3. LONG AND SHORT TERM NOTICES TO OWNERS/OCCUPIERS 4

4. ACCESS 4

4.1 Notice Required 4

4.2 Access Routes 4

5. POLE OR TOWER PEGGING 5

5.1 Defining the Route 5

5.2 Access Areas 5

5.3 Trees 5

6. WORK ON SITE 6

6.1 Site Work 6

6.2 Animals 6

6.3 Fencing 6

6.4 Site Damage 6

6.5 Storage 7

6.6 Pumping 7

6.7 Field Drains 7

6.8 Care of Soils in Unsurfaced Land 7

6.9 Pole or Tower Erection 8

6.10 Conductor Stringing 8

6.11 Scaffolding 8

6.12 Site Maintenance 8

7. FINAL ACCESS WALK 8

8. OVERHEAD CLEARANCES 8



1. WAYLEAVES

Overhead lines are mainly routed over private property consisting of farmland, gardens,buildings, forests and parks. In return for a wayleave granted to East Midlands Electricity bythe landowner for the erection and maintenance of supports, stays, conductors and fittings,East Midlands Electricity has a duty to carry out site work with due care and attention and inaccordance with agreements reached between the landowner(s) and Wayleave Officer(s).

2. LIAISON WITH OTHER AUTHORITIES

Before undertaking any work on conductors over Motorways, Trunk Roads, Railways, Riversor Canals, permission must be obtained from the relevant Authority, who will then arrange toco-ordinate this work with East Midlands Electricity personnel, local Councils and Police etc.East Midland Electricity involvement must be co-ordinated by the Business StreamEngineering Representative, e.g. Project Manager , and the Wayleave Officer.

3. LONG AND SHORT TERM NOTICES TO OWNERS/OCCUPIERS

Long term notices will be sent out by Wayleaves & Property Section . Short term notices tobe sent by Wayleaves & Property Section or Contractors, as appropriate. Seven days aftershort term notices have been sent out, pegging out of poles or towers may commence.

4. ACCESS

4.1 Notice Required

The Contractors or Project Manager is to give fourteen days notice when making requests foraccess walks.

4.2 Access Routes

Following each access walk Wayleaves & Property Section will supply the Contractors orProject Manager with one marked up copy of the agreed routes and a number of blank maps,as requested.

Only agreed access routes must be used. Should it be necessary to deviate from an agreedaccess route (usually at the request of an Occupier) as agreed by the Occupier, the Contractoror Project Manager must advise the Wayleaves & Property Section, in writing, as soon aspossible, with a copy of the revised map.

When access is arranged, agreement must be obtained from the Occupier for the removal offences and hedges and, unless otherwise approved, a temporary fence must be erected



immediately after their removal. Access roads must be kept clean and tidy and in useablecondition to the reasonable satisfaction of the Occupier until all site work is complete. It isimportant to keep to agreed accesses, in particular when using vehicles. Every effort must bemade to minimise the inconvenience to the Owners and Occupiers of the property or land.

5. POLE OR TOWER PEGGING

5.1 Defining the Route

The importance of marking out and pegging the line route, support positions and occasionallyaccess areas is to ensure that site personnel keep to the agreements with the owners. It is alsonecessary to peg support positions at site(s) indicated on the route map, or line profile, inorder to maintain minimum conductor to ground conditions.

From the overhead line route map, or the profile, mark out the centre of each angle position.Then between angles, establish straight lines using ranging rods.

Once a line has been established, it is pegged at each support position and at all junctionswith hedges, roads, rivers, power lines and railways etc.

Where poles or tower legs are within 6 metres of a hedge, ditch or fence, the centre peg, stubpositions and outside limits of foundations must be pegged prior to access walks. Similarpegging out must also be under taken in the vicinity of other power lines. In arable land allpegs must be driven below ground level and a suitable stake (1m in length) inserted besidethem to indicate their position. Poles or towers in centre of fields will only require centre pegand/or stake to indicate their position on the access walk.

Any damage caused to farm implements by protruding pegs will be an engineeringresponsibility (Contractor, if applicable) or Company Insurance claim.

5.2 Access Areas

If necessary, designated areas should be pegged out to define line accesses and safety, orworking clearances, as required by the line crew. This may be particularly desirable whenworking close to adjacent live power lines.

5.3 Trees

It may be necessary to mark trees for felling as denoted on the overhead line profile. Each treeto be felled should be marked by a ring of white paint on its main trunk approximately 1mfrom ground level.



6. WORK ON SITE

Listed below are points to be considered before and during site work.

6.1 Site Work

All work is to be carried out in a workmanlike manner to minimise interference to farming.In particular excavations must be guarded, fenced and illuminated as appropriate, withbackfilling and removal of surplus spoil being carried out as soon as possible. All ditches,water courses, drains, etc., must be kept clean and must not be allowed to become blockedwith site material. Adequate precautions must be taken to prevent damage or injury to personsand livestock.

6.2 Animals

No animal shall be brought on or near to the site. Adequate provision shall be made toprevent the straying of, or damage to livestock. Gates must be kept closed, temporary fencingkept secure and, where required, sites fenced.

6.3 Fencing

On all pasture land, adequate stock-proof fencing must be provided and all material andexcavations be kept within the fenced-off area.

Fencing will also need to be provided in areas accessible to the public, in order to keep withinthe Health and Safety at Work Act.

6.4 Site Damage

Land damage should be confined to as small an area as possible.

Poles, tower steelwork and other materials should be placed alongside access routes as closeto pole or tower position as possible and neatly stacked. (Within fenced area on pasture land).

Where the making of conductor joints necessitates the cutting back of conductor strands,tarpaulin sheets must be used for the collection of conductor strand trimmings etc.

Any dangerous material such as wire trimmings, barbed wire, battens, crates, tools anderection equipment, litter including bottles etc. must not be left on site.



6.5 Storage

Wayleaves and/or access facilities do not allow for long term storage of materials on site.Should it prove necessary for any material to be stored on site (pole or tower position) for anindeterminate period, the Estates and Wayleaves Section should be notified by Contractor orProject Manager, to enable them to advise the Occupier.

Where agreement has been made, material must be tidily stored and adequate arrangementsmade for site security and transportation to and from sites. All waste material must beremoved from site immediately. All surplus materials, and vehicles etc. are to be removedfrom sites as necessary.

6.6 Pumping

The Contractor (or Project Manager) is responsible for piping or channelling all pumpedwater from excavations to the nearest ditch, wherever possible, to avoid damage to crops andneighbouring land and they will be held responsible for the cleaning out of the ditch shouldthis become silted up due to pumping operations.

6.7 Field Drains

Should field drains be encountered during excavating pole or tower foundation holes, theposition of these drains must be noted and replaced to the Occupier’s satisfaction duringbackfilling or at such time as required by the Occupier.

Where a cable trench is to be excavated, appropriate enquiries should be made to determinethe extent of likely damage to land drains and agreement reached with the Occupier as to themethod of reinstatement prior to the commencement of works on site.

6.8 Care of Soils in Unsurfaced Land

When the carrying out of works will have an adverse effect on the physical condition ofagricultural and other unsurfaced land, the works should be planned to reduce the occupationtime to a minimum.

Provision should be made for the use of low ground pressure vehicles or protective trackwayto minimise damage to the soil structure.

Whether for cable trenches, pole erection or tower foundation work, care should be taken toensure that excavated topsoil and subsoil are kept separate from other excavated material andare not brought into contact with, or compressed by, any machinery. All excavated soilsshould be reinstated in the correct sequence.

When backfilling is completed sufficient top soil should be heaped over the excavation(s) toallow for settlement and all surplus soil removed from the site.



6.9 Pole or Tower Erection

Should it be necessary to have any guy wires or ropes in fields not crossed by a line it isessential that prior notification is given to the Wayleaves & Property Section in order thatpermission may be negotiated with the Occupier of the particular plot concerned.

6.10 Conductor Stringing

Prior to conductor stringing commencing a further access walk is required and Wayleaves &Property Section should be given adequate notice. When requesting this access walk theContractor or Project Manager should advise the Estates and Wayleaves Section of theproposed drum, winch and scaffolding positions.

No drums or equipment to be taken to site until the proposed positions have been agreed withthe Occupier.

6.11 Scaffolding

Should special scaffolding be required in the case of public highways, ‘New Roads and StreetWorks Act (NRSWA) Notices will be issued by the Project Manager.

6.12 Site Maintenance

Particular attention should be paid by all parties associated with Overhead Line constructionto public relations. These involve ensuring that gates are kept shut, fences and hedges arekept stock-proof, farm roads or tracks kept clear of obstructions or deep rutting and generallyadhering to the agreed access routes. No dogs or other animals are to be brought on site.

7. FINAL ACCESS WALK

The Contractor should give the Company seven days’ notice prior to a final clearance walkwith the Project Manager and Wayleave Officer when apportionment of damage claims canbe agreed.

8. OVERHEAD CLEARANCESThe minimum heights of line conductors are shown in the document ‘Overhead LineClearances’.


Database Ref: 24 File Ref: Survey & Profile Feb2001



Survey and Profile

of Overhead Lines

East Midlands Electricity Survey & Profile Of Overhead LinesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Survey & Profile Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 6 Version: 2

Revision Log For Survey & Profile Of Overhead Lines







CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 4

2. SURVEY 4

3. PROFILE 4

FIGURESFIG.1. A TYPICAL PROFILE 5



1. INTRODUCTION

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 give minimum conductor to ground clearanceswhich are statutory and must be observed at all times. These clearances are also detailed inthe Section 3 - Overhead Line Clearances.

The minimum clearance condition for overhead line supports is taken at maximum conductortemperature, i.e. maximum ambient plus temperature rise due to load current. Generally themaximum ambient for the UK is 35°C with increase due to load current on conductors of25°C, thereby making maximum conductor temperature condition 60°C. Lines built beforeOctober 1971 were designed to regulations assuming a maximum conductor temperatures of50°C.

Therefore it is essential that all line routes are profiled and designed to ensure East MidlandsElectricity comply fully with these statutory requirements.

2. SURVEY

In order to provide data upon which a ground profile can be based, each line route must beindividually surveyed. During this surveying process, basic level and distance informationalong the route is recorded, including side slope where necessary, on which the ground profilewill be based, together with other relevant information such as the position of trees, hedges,fences, buildings, other overhead lines etc. Particular details will be recorded in the case oflocations which may require additional clearance to those specified in The Electricity SupplyRegulations 1988 - i.e. railways, roads, canals, rivers, etc., as will details of any locationwhere significant side slope exists.

The survey itself is usually carried out using modern electronic surveying equipment. Allsurvey data is recorded electronically, and on completion of the survey is transferred to acomputer for calculation. This same computer will draw up a standard scale paper copy of theground profile for use with the Company's standard sag templates.

3. PROFILE

Once the ground profile has been received by the engineer, he can then proceed, using eitherthe printed paper copy or appropriate computer software, to position the poles in accordancewith the locations agreed with the landowners/occupiers. Having done this, he is then able todraw the line profile by (a) using the appropriate sag template, or (b) switching the catenarycurve on in computer software. Ground clearances along the route can be checked, taking intoaccount any special circumstances such as roads, railways etc. He will adjust pole sizes toincrease clearance as required, check for uplift, create section poles where necessary, andfinally produce a list of poles in size order.

Based upon this information, he will calculate and schedule all items required for theconstruction of the new line, in order that all materials are to hand well in advance of workcommencing.



A typical profile is shown in FIG.1.

FIG.1. A TYPICAL PROFILE





Database Ref: 26 File Ref: Approved Materials forOverhead Lines Feb 2001

Manual Name: Overhead Line manualVol.1


Approved Materials For

Overhead Lines

East Midlands Electricity Approved Materials For Overhead LinesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Approved Materials For OverheadLines Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 18 Version: 3

Revision Log For Approved Materials For Overhead Lines




Section Notes about the change5 Sections 8.2.5, 8.2.14, 8.2.15 revised


Section Notes about the change5 Preference to oil type MT instead of BS 144:2



CONTENTS

1. APPROVED MATERIALS 5

2. POLES 5

3. FOUNDATIONS 5

4. CROSSARM/SUPPORT STEELWORK 5

5. INSULATORS 6

6. INSULATOR/SUPPORT FITTINGS 6

7. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 6

7.1 Aerial Bundled Conductor (ABC) 6

7.2 Hybrid Service Cable - EATS Standard 09.7 6

7.3 Other Conductors 7

8. JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS 7

8.1 Types of Fittings 7

8.2 Mechanical Fittings 8

8.3 Pre-insulated Lugs and Splices (for use with ABC) 14

8.4 Tooling 15

9. FASTENERS AND WASHERS 15

10. EARTHING 16

11. STAYS 16

12. PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 16

12.1 ABC Service Distribution Box 16

12.2 Outdoor Cable Terminations 17

12.3 Surge Arresters 17

12.4 Fuses, Transformers and Reclosers 17



TABLESTABLE 1. OTHER CONDUCTORS 7

TABLE 2. TUBULAR COPPER FITTINGS 11

TABLE 3. TUBULAR ALUMINIUM FITTINGS 11

TABLE 4. TUBULAR BI-METALLIC FITTINGS 13



1. APPROVED MATERIALS

All components used in the construction of lines to the Specifications for Overhead Linescomply with British, EATS and/or Company Standards as indicated.

This document defines the design parameters of the approved materials used in theconstruction of Overhead Lines. In certain instances a description of the approved material, orcomponent(s) is also given.

Further details, i.e. drawings and application, can be found in the appropriate documents.

2. POLES

Poles shall comply with: BS 1990 ‘Wood Poles for Overhead Power andTelecommunications Lines Part 1 - Specification for Softwood Poles’ and EATS Standard43-88 ‘Treatment of Wood Poles and associated timber for Overhead Lines’

Species may be Scots Pine (Pinus Sylvestris) grown in Northern Europe or Britain andpressure treated with creosote or water-borne salts, or alternatively Corsican Pine (PinusNigra) grown in Britain and pressure treated with water borne salts by the sap-displacementmethod.

In order to minimise the environmental effects, instead of using creosote oil according to BS144:2, oil type MT should be specified. This oil gives a better penetration due to lowerviscosity. Another advantage is that the surplus oil in the last phase of impregnation (vacuum)more freely sucks out of the wood and minimises bleeding. MT-oil has a reduced content ofBenzo(A)pyrene to max 50m ppm against more that 1.000 ppm for the oil specified in BS144:2. This reduction gives the MT-oil a classification as non-carcinogen according toEuropean Union directive 67/548.

3. FOUNDATIONS

Single Pole Kicking/Baulk Blocks, ‘H’ Pole Brace Blocks and Wood Stay Blocks shallconform with EATS Standard 43-88.

4. CROSSARM/SUPPORT STEELWORK

LV ABC terminating steelwork shall conform with EATS Standard 43-96 and 43-14.

HV Steelwork shall comply with EATS Standard 43-95 and/or BS 4360 Grade 43A.



5. INSULATORS

String insulator units, pin and line post insulators shall comply with EATS Standard 43-93and with BS 137. Disc insulators will normally be porcelain. Special anti-vandal insulators ofpolymeric material may be used with agreement from Network Performance & Standards.

6. INSULATOR/SUPPORT FITTINGS

LV ABC fittings shall conform to EATS Standards 43-14 and 43-96. HV Insulator fittingsand pins shall comply with BS. 3288, Parts 1 and 2, 1977.

7. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

East Midland Electricity Overhead Line Conductors are to the following specifications:

Aluminium conductor, steel reinforced (ACSR) - BS 215 Part 2.

Hard drawn aluminium (HDA) - BS 215 Part 1.

PVC Covered conductors - BS 6485.

NOTE

Aluminium based conductors are to be greased in accordance with the requirements ofL38/2 Category 4 during manufacture.

7.1 Aerial Bundled Conductor (ABC)

The bundle comprises either two or four Cross Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) insulated,stranded hard drawn partially compacted aluminium conductors, of equal cross section, laidhelically together in accordance with EATS Standard 43-13.

The three phase conductors are identified by one, two or three continuously raisedlongitudinal ribs extruded on the insulation.

The neutral is lightly ribbed with at least sixteen ribs spaced evenly around the circumference.

Two-core bundles will have one rib on the phase, and neutral ribbing as for the four-corebundle.

7.2 Hybrid Service Cable - EATS Standard 09.7

This can be either a PVC or XLPE insulated cable with a solid aluminium phase core and aconcentric stranded copper neutral. The use of this cable is limited to underground servicesand/or surface wiring and is NOT to be used as an aerial cable.



7.3 Other Conductors

These shall be used for, and comply with:

TABLE 1. OTHER CONDUCTORS

USE STANDARDEarthing - Various BS 6485Bonding - Various BS 6485Tapping - 95mm² insulated (Flexible) BS 6485Transformer Tails :120mm² PVC/PVC BS 648595mm²ABC EATS 43-13

8. JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS

Conductor terminations, joints and binders shall comply with EATS Standards 43-92, 43-14,43-15 & 43-120

8.1 Types of Fittings

Conductor fittings may be categorised according to the way in which the force necessary togrip the conductor is applied.

(a) A mechanical fitting is one in which the force is provided by means other than thosedescribed in (b) and (c) below.

(b) A helical fitting is one in which the force is provided by helical wires which are self-tightening on the conductor.

(c) In a compression fitting the force is provided by permanent plastic deformation of thefitting, the deformation being applied by an appropriate tool.

Further categorisation may be achieved according to the intended use of the connector.

(1) A tension joint is an in-span fitting for the connection of two consecutive pieces ofconductor which are to be held at line tension.

(2) A tension termination is a fitting for terminating a conductor which is to be held at linetension.

(3) A non-tension joint is a fitting for the connection of two consecutive pieces ofconductor which are to be held but not at line tension.

(4) A non-tension tee joint is a fitting for the connection of the end of one conductor to apoint on the length of a second conductor. The connection is not subject to line tensionalthough the conductor to which the fitting is applied on its length may be at linetension.

(5) A non-tension termination is a fitting for application to the end of a conductor not



subject to line tension, to permit connection to equipment or other fittings. This mayinclude a transition connector for stranded-solid aluminium conductor.

(6) A bi-metallic fitting is used for the connection of conductors of different materials.

8.2 Mechanical Fittings

8.2.1 Bolted Anchor Clamp (for between 30 and 150mm² ACSR Conductors)This is a mechanical tension termination suitable for the company’s range of conductors.

The main body of the clamp is of cast aluminium alloy. The conductor is turned through anangle of approximately 60° in the clamp and is held in place between a grooved keeper andthe clamp body by three or four U bolts. The clamp has a pulling eye able to accommodatethe pin diameter of a shackle used (with a pull-lift) during conductor landing and sagging.The clamp is to be used with the extended socket tongue.

8.2.2 Wedge Type Connector

The wedge connector is able to perform duty as a non-tension joint or tee-joint. It consists oftwo parts: an outer ‘C’ body and an inner wedge. On the aluminium wedge, the outer body isformed from an extrusion and the inner wedge made by a pressure die casting. On the copperconnector the outer body is cast and the wedge is forged. The wedge connector is applied bymeans of percussion tool or similar.

8.2.3 Insulation Piercing Connector (IPC)

Insulation Piercing Connectors come in a range of sizes for all types of ABC-ABC, ABC-Hybrid and ABC-Bare conductor (copper and aluminium), and conform to EATS Standard43-14. They can be range taking, weatherproof or waterproof and may include shear boltheads for positive application. Sizes stocked may vary, refer to the document ‘LV Overheadlines mains and services Fittings and Current Commodity Codes’.

The two halves of the clamp of plastic material with copper alloy contact plates are arrangedsuch that, on tightening the clamp, the teeth of the contact plates penetrate the insulation andestablish contact with both main and branch conductors without the need to strip off anyinsulation.

The service connectors are suitable for bi-metallic connections and for ABC/Hybridconnections. See the documents ‘LV Overhead lines mains and services Fittings and CurrentCommodity Codes’. and ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’.

8.2.4 ABC Tension Clamp

Two types are stocked, one for heavy duty and a separate one for low duty services, all theseare in accordance with EATS Standard 43-14.



The ABC is terminated by means of a bolted type tension clamp which grips all the insulatedconductors between insulated mouldings placed either side of a central wedge. The tensionclamp is secured to the pole by means of an eye bolt, curled hook bolt or hook bolt withkeeper plate and to a wall by a Rawlbolt hook anchor.

8.2.5 ABC Suspension Clamp

Light and heavy duty clamps are stocked for both pole and services in accordance with EATSStandard 43-14. The ABC is suspended at intermediate poles by means of a suspension clampcomprising a metallic clamp supplied with a split insulated sleeve and tightening bolt orclamp with integral roller.

8.2.6 Weaklink

These are mild steel and rated at 7.5kN in accordance with EATS Standard 43-14. This has alimited use at certain intermediate positions, see the document ‘Design of ABC LV OverheadLines’.

8.2.7 Wall Clamp Bracket

These are metallic with an insulated insert for all sizes up to and including 95mm² ABC andconform to EATS Standard 43-14. These are not to be used with 120mm² ABC. Limiteduse of these are restricted to short aerial spans with narrow take-off angles, or normal cleatingto wall if desired.

8.2.8 Wall Cleat

These are PVC and fit all sizes of stand-off i.e. 10, 50 and 100mm and conform to EATSStandard 43-14. Spacing is 1.0m (maximum) apart.

8.2.9 Split Bolt Line Tap

Split bolt line taps conform to EATS Standard 43-92.

They may be used as a non-tension joint or tee joint. They are made of brass or bronze and areavailable in four sizes as shown on Drawing OHJ80 in the document ‘Overhead Line JointingCharts’. The fittings are for use with stranded and solid copper conductors at both low voltageand 11kV.

The required tap for a particular application is simply the minimum size which willadequately accommodate the two conductors to be jointed; no table need be consulted.



8.2.10 Live Line Tap

Live Line Taps conform to EATS Standard 43-92

This is a mechanical non-tension tee joint designed to be applied by live line tools.

Two types are available for copper and aluminium conductor, see the document ‘OverheadLine Jointing Charts’.

NOTE

Live line taps should not be applied directly to the line conductor, they should be usedin conjunction with bail fittings.

8.2.11 Helical Fittings (Distribution Ties)

Distribution ties are to EATS Standard 43-15.

The distribution tie is a helically formed tie, comprised of two aluminium or copper coatedsteel wires. The centre section is contoured to fit a variety of insulators and a wide range ofconductors.

Helical fittings are used as distribution ties at intermediate supports. An elastomeric tubular-type pad provides abrasion protection. Grit is applied to the gripping section of the tie toenhance its holding strength.

In exposed situations, an alternative double tie may be used.

8.2.12 Compression Fittings

Range

The fitting drawings contained in the document ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ provide thefollowing information for each compression fitting stocked, together with appropriate fittinginstructions.

- Types and sizes of conductor that can be accommodated

- The manufacturer’s type number

- The commodity code

- The compression tool and die set required

It cannot be stressed too strongly that the right type and size of fitting must be used at alltimes, and that if this is not available the next size must not be used.

All tools must be maintained as recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions.



8.2.13 Tubular Copper Fittings

The following range of connectors is approved:

TABLE 2. TUBULAR COPPER FITTINGS

TYPE GENERAL NAMETension Joint Midspan joint or spliceTension Termination Dead endNon-tension Termination

(a) Single bolt Lug(b) Two bolt Lug

Most of the fittings are range taking and stranded hard drawn copper, solid hard drawn copperand cadmium copper conductors are catered for. Single bolt lugs are available with a varietyof stud hole sizes to facilitate connection to the different equipment terminal studs whichexist. Double bolt lugs, regardless of conductor size, have standard palm dimensions and holesizes suitable for the M12 bolts of a backplate. This enables any double bolt lug to be boltedto any other double bolt lug or to any dead end dropper plate.

All connectors are stamped with the manufacturer’s catalogue number which can be related tothe Company’s Commodity Code by reference to the fitting drawings. The connectors alsocarry knurl marks to indicate crimping positions and the required sequence.

8.2.14 Tubular Aluminium Fittings


TABLE 3. TUBULAR ALUMINIUM FITTINGS

TYPE GENERAL NAMETension Joint Midspan joint or spliceTension Termination Dead endNon-tension Termination

(a)Single bolt Lug(b) Two bolt Lug(c) Cable Pin for LLT cable Cablepin(d) Transition Stranded Al - Solid Al

Non-tension jointCNE cable to line conductor Cable splice

To prevent water ingress the lug barrel is stepped to grip the ABC conductor sheath. Theseconnectors are not range taking to any great extent and so care must be exercised in conductorselection.



Midspan joints incorporate a stopping device in the centre of the joint barrel which facilitatescorrect insertion, the conductor being pushed home until the stop is felt. Dead ends are nolonger specified for HV ACSR new construction since Bolted Anchor Clamps are nowavailable for all sizes. However, the full range of dead ends are retained on stock for HotGlove Working

Single bolt hole lugs are suitable for use with M12 bolts. Double bolt hole lugs have standardpalm dimensions for use with backplates, and may be bolted to each other or to dead enddropper plates.

The range of available aluminium lugs has been rationalised so that only lugs for currentstandard conductors are now stocked. When work is necessary on jumpers of non-standardconductor, these should be replaced by standard conductor of an appropriate cross-sectionalarea.

Cablepins are used with aluminium live line taps.

Cableterm fittings are designed to make a permanent non-tension joint between CNE cablesand overhead lines. Non-tension connectors are factory filled with the grease recommendedby the manufacturer, a compound containing suspended zinc granules which help to establishgood electrical contact.

Full tension connectors are factory filled with the grease recommended by the manufacturerwhich has silicon carbide added. In addition to establishing good electrical contact thisassists conductor grip. Under no circumstances should the grease recommended by themanufacturer be removed from a tension fitting, other than to coat the cleaned strands of theconductor onto which the fitting is to be compressed.

All connectors are stamped with the manufacturer’s catalogue number which can be related tothe Company’s Commodity Code by reference to the fitting drawings. The connectors are alsomarked with the conductor size accommodated, the tooling required, the die index numberand the crimping sequence.

Only 10,000psi hydraulic compression tools (such as the G10) shall be used to compresstension joints.



8.2.15 Tubular Bi-metallic Fittings


TABLE 4. TUBULAR BI-METALLIC FITTINGS

TYPE GENERAL NAMENon-tension terminationSingle bolt, straight palm LugSingle bolt, 30° backward raked palm LugTwo bolt, straight palm LugNon-tension jointCNE cable to line conductor Cableterm

The bi-metallic lug is a friction welded connector designed for terminating an aluminiumconductor onto a brass or copper stud. For conductors of up to 150mm² area they are availablewith either a straight or a 30° backward raked palm.

Double bolt lug with two 12mm holes are available for terminating 50, 100& 150mm² ACSRand 300mm² HDA onto cable terminations

The Double bolt lug with two 10mm holes and 30° forward raked palm for terminating150mm² ACSR and 300mm² HDA on sealing ends have been withdrawn from stock assealing ends are no longer preferred construction.

Straight and raked palm bi-metallic lugs are available which are suitable for both ACSR andlive line tapping cable.

For all bi-metallic connectors the surface area around the aluminium-copper weld is protectedby the application of a special anti-corrosive coating. The aluminium compression barrelportion of the connectors is factory filled with the manufacturer’s recommended grease.

Lugs are stamped with the manufacturer’s catalogue number, the conductor sizeaccommodated, the tooling required, the die index number and the crimping sequence. Forcableterm connectors the manufacturer’s catalogue number and die-set information is eithermarked on the connector or given on a card contained in the package. Compression diepositions are stamped on the connectors. Only G10 type of compression tooling is suitable.

8.2.16 Compression Fittings for Live Line Tapping Cables

For live line tapping applications on ACSR overhead lines 95mm² tapping cable is to beemployed.

The cablepin connector, is for use with the aluminium live line tap.



The cablepin consists of a 12mm diameter solid aluminium pin connected to an aluminiumbarrel whose bore is ‘stepped’ to accept not only the bared conductor but also a length ofsheathed conductor.

The gripping of the sheath in the barrel ensures protection of the conductor strands againststress fatigue due to flexing and vibration. The pin, which is set at 30° with respect to thebarrel, is terminated on the tap.

Bi-metallic lugs are available and are suitable for use with live line tapping cable.

Again the compression barrels are stepped to accept and grip the sheath of the live linetapping cable.

Appropriate lugs and Live Line Taps are available for 25mm² and 75mm² Copper Cable

Cablepins are not available for copper cables.

8.2.17 House Service Fittings

“Isosplices” or similar are purchased and used as non-tension joints between any combinationof aluminium and copper conductors from 14mm² to 50mm² cross section. The range offittings is detailed in the document ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’.

The “Isosplice” consists of an aluminium inner sleeve which is internally blocked half wayalong its length. The bores are filled with a compound recommended by the manufacturer.The splice is insulated by a two part nylon sleeve.

Each end of the sleeve may have one of two bore diameters and the range comprises of threeconnectors. Each end of the connector is colour coded and the combinations available areBlack/Black, Black/Silver and Silver/Silver. (Black for conductors from 14mm² to 35mm²,Silver for conductors from 32mm² to 50mm²)

The splice is supplied in quantities of four. The conductor range and step by step installationinstructions are given on the packet.

8.3 Pre-insulated Lugs and Splices (for use with ABC)

The lugs consist of an aluminium barrel with a thermoplastic insulating jacket designed towithstand the crimping stress. The barrel is friction welded to a copper or aluminium tongue.A flexible ring, secured to the end of the barrel, provides a tight seal on to the cable sheathwhen installed.

The splice consist of an aluminium barrel with a thermoplastic insulating jacket designed towithstand the crimping stress with a flexible ring, secured to each end of the barrel, to providea tight seal on to the cable sheath when installed.

The colour at the ends of the fitting is the code to denote the size of conductor to be used.



The sheath needs to be stripped to the length specified on the fitting, and the conductor needsto be thoroughly cleaned with the appropriate scratch brush.

Fully insert the conductor into the connector. Then, using the correct tooling and dies, crimpin the sequence indicated on the connector.

The range of splices consist of:

• Full tension with both ends taking the same size. The full tension splices are also used asnon-tension sizes for splicing the same size conductor.

• Non-tension splices with the ends taking different sizes are available in various sizecombinations.

8.3.1 Compression non-tension joints for copper conductors

These fittings, which may be used for both non-tension joints and non-tension tee joints, areusually referred to by the following manufacturer’s trade names e.g. CRIMPIT (Burndy) andCEETAP (BICC). The fittings are manufactured from ‘C’ shaped sections of copper.

This type of connector should be used for the making of connections between earthingconductors only.

NOTE

Experimental work has shown that the use of the ‘C’ crimp type connector as a non-tension tee joint can cause a drop in the line conductor tension due to deformation of theline conductor at the connector position.

For making non-tension joints and Tee joints on copper line conductors, it isrecommended that pairs of split bolt line taps are employed on both low voltage and11kV lines as it has been known for the edge of ‘C’ crimp type connectors to bite intoand cause fracture of conductor strands.

8.4 Tooling

All the compression fittings described meet the mechanical and electrical requirements of BS3288 Part 1 when compressed using the appropriate die set and approved tool. See thedocuments ‘Compression Jointing in Overhead Line Work’ and ‘Overhead Line JointingCharts’.

9. FASTENERS AND WASHERSAll fasteners and washers shall comply with EATS Standard 43-96 and EATS Standard 43-14.

Bolts, nuts and washers shall comply to BS 4190.



Metric Dimensions and galvanised to BS 729.

Cleats are to be in accordance with the document ‘Overhead Lines Equipment Drawings’.

10. EARTHING

Earth rods and fittings shall comply with EATS Standard 43-94.

11. STAYS

All steel parts, other than wires, shall be to BS 4360, Grade 43A unless otherwise specified,and shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with BS 729.

Stay strands shall be galvanised steel and manufactured in accordance with BS 183, Sizesshall be:-

GRADE 1150 - 7/3.25mm

GRADE 1150 - 7/4.00mm

The following stay components shall comply with EATS Standard 43-91:

Stay make-off (helical type)

Stay rods

Stay insulators

Stay blocks

Stay thimbles

Stay shackles

12. PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

12.1 ABC Service Distribution BoxIn accordance with EATS Standard 43-14. This takes up to 6 single phase (non-fused)services of Hybrid and/or ABC from any pole or property. Care must be taken to preventingress of moisture and to be secure against vandalism and un-authorised access.



12.2 Outdoor Cable Terminations

12.2.1 LV outdoor cable terminations

These shall be of the shrinkable type for Waveform to ABC cable. These should be jointed inaccordance with East Midland Electricity Cable Jointing COP No 15.

See the document ‘LV Overhead Lines Mains and Services General Arrangement Drawings’.

12.2.2 11kV outdoor cable terminations

Various approved types include shrinkable, cast resin filled and polymeric designs. Theseshould be jointed in accordance with East Midland Electricity Cable Jointing COP No 14.

See the document ‘General Arrangement Drawings and Materials Lists for HV Lines’.

12.2.3 33kV outdoor cable terminations

These are now polymeric. These should be jointed in accordance with East MidlandsElectricity Cable Jointing COP No 14.


12.3 Surge ArrestersArresters should comply with IEC 99-4-1991


12.4 Fuses, Transformers and ReclosersEquipment is detailed in East Midlands Electricity Substation Manual. Pole arrangements areillustrated in See the document ‘General Arrangement Drawings and Materials Lists for HVLines’.





Database Ref: 25 File Ref: 33kV DC Overhead LinesFittings & Commodity Codes Feb2001



33kV Double Circuit Overhead Lines

Fittings and Commodity Codes

East Midlands Electricity 33kV Double Circuit Overhead Lines Fittings & Commodity CodesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: 33kV DC Overhead Lines Fittings& Commodity Codes Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 4 Version: 2

Revision Log For 33kV Double Circuit Overhead LinesFittings & Commodity Codes




Section Notes about the change5 Items E313B and C replaced by item E361



1. FITTINGS AND CURRENT COMMODITY CODES

E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTIONE107 - Wood poleE111 231580 Brace Block

E220 233200 Top or Bottom CrossarmE220 233210 Middle CrossarmE221 233215 Crossarm - (Top)E221 233215 Crossarm - (Bottom, Straight Line Section) orE222 233220 Crossarm - (Middle)E223 233225 Crossarm (Bottom, Section Angle)E243 233560 Insulator BracketE260 238800 Square curved washerE261 238885 Square flat washer

E305 234822 33kV line post insulatorE306 234830 Insulator string PorcelainE312 236100 Socket/Clevis AdaptorE317 236171 Socket TongueE326 232595 Conductor term: 100/150mm² ACSRE361 235100 Ball Ended Eye Hook

E503 514950 Number Plateto 514958

E504 513547 Circuit I.D Plate (33kV)E508 513640 Safety signE610 236604 Bonding Strap

OHJ60 232596 Compression Fitting 300mm² HDA

- M20 Bolts (Pole)- 232304 M20 x 70 Bolts- 232303 M20 x 60 Bolts- 232302 M20 x 50 Bolts- 232301 M20 x 45 Bolts- (Locknuts not on Stock)



DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTIONHelical Distribution Ties - Post Insulators

- 235431 Single Dist: Tie - Top 150mm² ACSR- 235432 Single Dist: Tie - Top 300mm² HDA- 235433 Single Dist: Tie - Side 150mm² ACSR- 235434 Single Dist: Tie - Side 300mm² HDA- 235435 Double Dist: Tie - Top 150mm² ACSR- 235436 Double Dist: Tie - Top 300mm² HDA- 235437 Double Dist: Tie - Side 150mm² ACSR- 235438 Double Dist: Tie - Side 300mm² HDA


Database Ref: 27 File Ref: Earthing & BondingFittings & Commodity Codes Feb2001



Earthing and Bonding

Fittings & Commodity Codes

East Midlands Electricity Earthing & Bonding Fittings & Commodity CodesOverhead LineManual Vol.1

File Ref: Earthing & Bonding Fittings &Commodity Codes Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 4 Version: 2

Revision Log For Earthing & Bonding Fittings & CommodityCodes








E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTIONE709 232985 3m PVC Earth Wire GaurdE613 235604 14.3mm X 1.2M Extensible Copperbond Earth Rod (5/8”)E614 235605 14.3mm X 1.5M Non-extensible Copperbonded Earth Rod (5/8”)

235612 Phosphor Bronze Earth ClampE612 235606 14.3mm Rod Coupling (5/8”)E611 235607 14.3mm Driving Stud (5/8”)

513851 PME Label - Type 1513852 PME Label - Type 2513854 PME Label - Type 4513856 PME Label - Type 6513855 PNB Label518496 Copper Staples551150 Anti-Corrosion 'Denso' Tape080720 Stranded Copper Wire Black PVC covered - 16mm²080730 Stranded Copper Wire Black PVC covered - 25mm²807815 Stranded Copper Wire Black PVC covered - 50mm²080750 Stranded Copper Wire Black PVC covered - 70mm²080230 Stranded Copper Wire Bare - 50mm²

Compression Non-Tension Tee Joint for stranded HDCOHJ10 261141 25mm² -25mm²OHJ10 261144 16mm² & 25mm²-50mm²OHJ10 261145 50mm²-50mm² & 70mm²-70mm²

Single Bolt Compression Lugs for CopperOHJ26 261610 12mm Hole For 16mm² ConductorOHJ26 261614 12mm Hole For 25mm² ConductorOHJ26 261617 12mm Hole For 50mm² & 70mm² Conductor

Elpress deep driven earthing235608 Elpress leading rod235609 Elpress hardened steel tip235610 Elpress extension rod

Exothermic Weld395504 Mould 50mm-14.3mm (5/8”) rod tee. (Cat.No.CR2-4-14250)395526 Powder 90gram x 10 (Cat No. 90P10)395528 Handle Clamp PK4 (Cat No. HCPK4)395529 Tool Kit - flint gun, file brush, cleaning brush, scraper, & mould





Database Ref: 28 File Ref: HV Single Circuit Fittings& Commodity Codes Feb 2001

Manual Name: Overhead Line manualVol.1


HV Single Circuit


East Midlands Electricity HV Single Circuit Fittings & Commodity CodesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: HV Single Circuit Fittings &Commodity Codes Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 6 Version: 2

Revision Log For HV Single Circuit Fittings & CommodityCodes




Section Notes about the change5 Items E313B and C replaced by item E361. E112, E250,E242

withdrawn. General Revision




E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTIONE105 - Wood PoleE111 231554 Kicking block - Type 1E111 231555 Kicking block - Type 2E111 231580 Brace block - Type 1E111 231586 Brace block - Type 2E113 - Wood pole - Universal pole – use two for ‘H’ Pole.E114 - Wood poleE213 233148 Crossarm memberE214 233149 Crossarm memberE216 233155 Crossarm memberE219 233180 Crossarm memberE228 233240 Crossarm memberE230 233510 Crossarm strutE231 233050 Fuse Mounting Platform Single PoleE233 233053 Fuse Mounting X Arm & strut SpurE234 235448 Pole Transformer Platform/Fuse mounting xarmE235 233300 Pilot Insulator/Tx/Cable SupportE237 233530 Crossarm braceE238 233540 Section strapE239 233550 Terminal strapE243 233560 Insulator BracketE244 235720 Underground brace barsE247 232583 Insulator BracketE248 235730 Underground tie strapsE249 235785 Tie rod - Type 3E254 235167 Universal Steelwork: ABIE258 232593 Triggered Gap Support BracketE260 238800 Square curved washerE261 238885 Square flat washerE262 232370 'J' BoltE263 234500 Anti-Climbing GuardE271 233063 Single Phase Surge Arrester BracketE272 233062 Surge Arrester Support ‘H’PoleE273 233061 Surge Arrester Support BracketE274 233060 Mounting Crossarm support and support strut for surge arresters -

1Phase Transformer



E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTIONE275 233056 to Brentford - type Surge Arrester Brackets

233059E276 233065 Support Bracket for Transformer Mounted Surge ArrestersE303 234813 11kV pin insulatorE305 234822 33kV line post insulatorE306 234830 Insulator string: PorcelainE306 234860 Insulator string: GlassE307 234847 Triggered Arc GapE308 235424 Cranked Pilot Insulator PinE310 235412 Pin 230mm 10kN Ref 29E310 235413 Pin 305mm 10kN Ref 31E310 235423 Pilot pin Ref 50-(50mm)E311 235430 Pilot Insulator Spindle: timber fixE312 236100 Clevis Ended Socket (300mm² HDA)E314 232059 EyeboltE317 236171 Socket TongueE318 550230 Stand-Off InsulatorE319 234320 11kV Gap-Type Surge ArresterE326 232595 Bolted Anchor Clamp 50mm² ACSR OHJ 142E326 232596 Bolted Anchor Clamp: 100/150mm² ACSR OHJ 142E361 235120 Ball Ended Eye HookE358 234322 11kV Surge ArresterE359 234323 33kV Surge Arrester

- 382652 ABSD 400A Rating Low Level Actuation- 382653 ABSD 400A Rating High Level Actuation

E414 231051 TurnbuckleE503 514950 to Number Plate

514958E504 513547 Circuit Identification PlateE508 513640 Safety signE509 513643 Property Label and Safety SignE706 232765 PVC Cable Saddle 50mmE706 232767 PVC Cable Saddle 61mmE706 232769 PVC Cable Saddle 73mmE708 234602 Cable Guard 50mm internal diameterE708 234604 Cable Guard 100mm internal diameterE709 232985 Pole Earth Wire Cover



E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTION- 235674 Fibre Glass Parking Bar- 263201 Live Line Tap - 100mm²- 070816 Live Line Tapping Cable 95mm²

235421 Ties for Tapping Cable 95mm²- Distribution Ties – 11kV Pin Insulators:

Note: Pin Ins (11kV) 78mm neck- 235415 Single Dist: Tie - Top 50mm² ACSR- 235416 Single Dist: Tie - Top 100mm² ACSR- 235417 Single Dist: Tie - Top 150mm² ACSR- 235418 Single Dist: Tie - Side 50mm² ACSR- 235419 Single Dist: Tie - Side 100mm² ACSR

235420 Single Dist: Tie - Side 150mm² ACSR- Distribution Ties – 33kV Post Insulators

Note: Post Ins (33kV) 120mm neck- 235431 Single Dist: Tie - Top 150mm² ACSR- 235432 Single Dist: Tie - Top 300mm² HDA- 235433 Single Dist: Tie - Side 150mm² ACSR- 235434 Single Dist: Tie - Side 300mm² HDA- 235435 Double Dist: Tie - Top 150mm² ACSR- 235436 Double Dist: Tie - Top 300mm² HDA- 235437 Double Dist: Tie - Side 150mm² ACSR- 235438 Double Dist: Tie - Side 300mm² HDA

Distribution Ties - Tapping cable- 235421 Twin Tie - 95mm² Aluflex

Distribution Ties - HD Cu Cond- 235426 Single Dist: Tie - Top .075mm- 235427 Single Dist: Tie - Top .10mm- 235428 Single Dist: Tie - Top .15mm- 235444 Single Dist: Tie - Top 3/2.65mm- 235445 Single Dist: Tie - Top 7/2.64mm

Bolts etc- 232301 M20 x 45 Bolts- 232302 M20 x 50 Bolts- 232303 M20 x 60 Bolts- 232304 M20 x 70 Bolts- - M20 Bolts (Pole)- - (Locknuts not on Stock)- 235816 Coach Screws 112mm x 12mm

FOR JOINTS (OHJ ITEMS) REFER TO THE DOCUMENT ‘OVERHEAD LINEJOINTING CHARTS’





Database Ref: 29 File Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 5Overhead Line Joints Jan 2002


Version Prepared by Approved by Issue Date5 Tony Haggis Tony Haggis Jan 2002

Overhead Line Joints

East Midlands Electricity Overhead Line JointsOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Overhead Line Joints Feb2001.doc Page 2 of 46 Version: 5

Revision Log For Overhead Line Joints




Section Notes about the change5 Drawings and style revised. OHJ51, 66, 67 & 69 withdrawn. OHJ52,

68, 71, 72 added. OHJ 10, 61, 114, 122, 124, 136, 137, 138, 139 and141 additions and revisions.


Section Notes about the change5 OHJ 130 –commodity code corrected 266055 266050

OHJ 41 – 10mm hole double bolt 150&300 Bimetal discontinuedand repalce by 12mm double bolt Bimetals.

Changes made in version 4 Jan 01

Section Notes about the change5 Name changed to Overhead Line Joints and moved from Section 7 to

Section 5Section Notes about the change

5 ABC end caps – range taking caps introduced - some commoditycodes deleted


Section Notes about the change1 Reference to Network Performance & Standards

changed to Technology & Standards ManagerOHJ 6, 26 & 72 Photos added

OHJ 144 E615 Steel Block Earth Clamp added



CONTENTS

1. OVERHEAD LINE JOINTING CHARTS 4

FIGURESOHJ 6 - House Service Fittings ............................................................................................................................5OHJ 10 – ‘C’ Tap - Copper..................................................................................................................................6OHJ 15 – Aluminium Lug - Single Bolt .............................................................................................................7OHJ 20 – Aluminium Lug - Double Bolt.............................................................................................................8OHJ 26 – Copper Lug - Single Bolt.....................................................................................................................9OHJ 31 – Copper Lug - Double Bolt .................................................................................................................10OHJ 35 - Bi-Metal Lug - Single Bolt - ACSR, AAAC & HDA........................................................................11OHJ 40 - Bi-Metal Lug - Single Bolt - 30º Palm - ACSR, AAAC & HDA .....................................................12OHJ 41 - Bi-Metal - Double Bolt - ACSR ........................................................................................................13OHJ 42 - BLX Aluminium Lug - Raked 30 Degrees........................................................................................14OHJ 43 - BLX Bi-Metal Lug - Raked 30 Degrees ............................................................................................15OHJ 46 – Copper Mid-Span Joint.....................................................................................................................16OHJ 52 – Copper Dead-End with Socket..........................................................................................................17OHJ 55 – Aluminium Mid-Span Joint ..............................................................................................................18OHJ 56 – Aluminium Non-Tension Joint for ACSR........................................................................................19OHJ 60 – Aluminium Dead-End – 300mm2 HDA ............................................................................................20OHJ 61 – Aluminium Dead-End – Socket and 30° Dropper Plate for ACSR................................................21OHJ 62 - Cable Pin For Live Line Tapping Cable...........................................................................................22OHJ 68 - Lugs For CNE Wavecon Cable .........................................................................................................23OHJ 71 - Compression Joint For CNE Wavecon Cable To ABC...................................................................24OHJ 72 - Bi-Metal Splice – PME Earth - 35mm ABC to 16mm Copper ......................................................25OHJ 90 – Adaptor Plate For Pole Termination................................................................................................27OHJ 100 - BICC Wedge Taps, Bails And Accessories .....................................................................................28OHJ 102 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps, Conductor Diameter Limits ......................................................29OHJ 110 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For ACSR & AAAC (Part 1)......................................................30OHJ 110 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For ACSR & AAAC (Part 2)......................................................31OHJ 112 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For HDA.......................................................................................32OHJ 114 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For HDA, Annealed Aluminium, ABC......................................33OHJ 120 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For Hard Drawn Copper To Hard Drawn Aluminium ...........34OHJ 122 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For Copper To Annealed Aluminium, Aerial Bundled

Conductor...................................................................................................................................................35OHJ 124 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For Hard Drawn Solid Copper To Annealed Aluminium, Hard

Drawn Aluminium.....................................................................................................................................36OHJ 130 - BICC Aluminium Bail......................................................................................................................37OHJ 132 - BICC Copper Bails...........................................................................................................................38OHJ 133 - ‘H’ Crimpet For ACSR and 300mm2 HDA...................................................................................39OHJ 136/7 – Tension & Non - Tension A.B.C. Insulated Joint.......................................................................40OHJ 138 - Copper Palm A.B.C.Insulated Lug .................................................................................................41OHJ 139 - Aluminium Palm A.B.C. Insulated Lug..........................................................................................42OHJ 140 – Insulation Piercing Connectors and End Caps for A.B.C. ...........................................................43OHJ 142 – Bolted Anchor Clamps for ACSR...................................................................................................45OHJ 143 – Back Plate Complete With Nuts & Washers .................................................................................46OHJ 144 – Steel Block Earth Clamp E615 .......................................................................................................46



1. OVERHEAD LINE JOINTING CHARTS

East Midland Electricity recognises that joints and connectors are critical components of thedistribution system. The consequences of failure due to load or fault current have far reachingaffects in terms of customer minutes lost and safety.

The items contained in this Manual have been carefully selected and, in critical cases,specifically tested on the conductors used by East Midland Electricity. These are the onlyapproved makes and types to be used on East Midland Electricity’s overhead linesytem. They shall only be obtained through East Midland Electricity’s stores. Direct purchasefrom manufacturers by Service Providers is forbidden.

No other makes or types of joint or connector shall be used without the express permision ofthe Technology & Standards Manager, Asset Development.



OHJ 6 - House Service Fittings

SECOND CRIMP

FIRST CRIMP

STRIP LENGTHDIE NO. B.G.

OH

J06.

SKF

CONDUCTOR SIZE (mm²) SLEEVEHARD DRAWN COPPER 14 - 16 BLACKHARD DRAWN COPPER 32 SILVERHARD DRAWN ALUMINIUM 22 - 25 BLACKHARD DRAWN ALUMINIUM 50 SILVERANNEALED COPPER 16 - 25 BLACKANNEALED COPPER 35 - 50 SILVERANNEALED ALUMINIUM 25 BLACKANNEALED ALUMINIUM 35 - 50 SILVERHYBRID CABLE PHASE AND NEUTRAL 25 - 35 BLACKCNE WAVEFORM 3 PHASE 35 (PHASE) BLACK

NEUTRAL SILVERABC 25 BLACKABC 35 SILVER

FOR CNE WIRES PIERCE INSULATION WITH PHASE CORE,

INSERT WIRES CAREFULLY

TOOL OUR840 MH50RB MH100/MD6 G10/Y35DIE XN-BG Z-BG W-BG U-BG

CRIMPS PER END 2 2 2 2

COMMODITY CODE 261875 261876 261877COLOUR CODE BLACK-BLACK BLACK-SILVER SILVER-SILVER



OHJ 10 – ‘C’ Tap - Copper

MAINCONDUCTOR 14 16 25 32 35 50 70 100 125

14 2616400 2611400 - 2611420 2611420 2611440 - -16 - 2611410 2611410 2611430 2611430 2611440 2611440 2611460 2611460

TAP 25 - 2611410 2611410 - - - - - -32 - - - 2611430 2611430 - 2611440 2611460 261147035 - - - - 2611430 - 2611440 2611460 261147050 - - - - - 2611450 2611450 - -70 - - - - - - 2611450 2611470 2611490

100 - - - - - - 2611490 -

BICC MH 100 (MD6) G10 (Y35)C. CODE DRG CAT No DIE CRIMPS DIE CRIMPS

SUF CEETAP SET SET2611400 A TC4C W-BG 2 U-BG 12611410 B TC5C2611420 C TC6C W-C 2 U-C 12611430 D TC7C2611440 E TC8C - U-E 32611450 F TC9C2611460 G TC10C2611470 H TC11C - U-F 32611490 J TC12C

Must not be used to ‘Tee’ joint from tensioned lines. Crimp will damage conductor.

OH

J10.

SKF



OHJ 15 – Aluminium Lug - Single Bolt

CONDUCTOR BICC)ACSR ALI ALLOY HARD DRAWN ALI CAT No DRG COMM DIE SET

SIZE STRAND SIZE STRAND SIZE DIA JUMPER SUF CODE MH100 G10in² mm² mm in² mm² mm in² mm² mm TERMINAL (MD6) (Y35)

.025 25 6/1/2.36 .025 25 7/2.33 L12RL 12 2615200 W698 U698

.03 30 6/1/2.59

.04 40 6/1/3.00 .04 40 7/2.95 L20RL 12 D 2615230 W659 U659

.05 50 6/1/3.35 .05 50 7/3.30

.05 50 7/3.10 L9A12 E 2615240 W243 U243

.075 6/1/4.09 L32R12 U654

.10 100 6/4.72+ .10 100 7/4.65 L34RL12 G 2615260 U6547/1.57

.10 100 7/4.39 L25A12 H 2615270 W249 U249

.15 150 18/1/3.35 L42R12 J 2615290 U790

HOLE DIA 14mmSUITABLE FORM12 BOLTS

OH

J15.

SKF



OHJ 20 – Aluminium Lug - Double Bolt

CONDUCTOR BICC)ACSR ALI ALLOY HARD DRAWN ALI CAT No DRG COMM DIE SET

SIZE STRAND SIZE STRAND SIZE DIA JUMPER SUF CODE MH100 G10in² mm² mm in² mm² mm in² mm² mm TERMINAL (MD6) (Y35)

.025 25 6/1/2.36 .025 25 7/2.33 L12RL 12D W698 U698

.03 30 6/1/2.59 L13L 12D

.04 40 6/1/3.00 .04 40 7/2.95 L20RL 12D D 2615030 W659 U659

.05 50 6/1/3.35 .05 50 7/3.30.05 50 7/3.10

.075 6/1/4.09 L32R12D U654

.10 100 6/4.72+ .10 100 7/4.65 L34RL12D G 2615060 U6547/1.57

.10 100 7/4.39 L25A12D W249 U249

.15 150 18/1/3.35 L42R12D J 2615090 U790

300 19/4.65 L61A12D30 * K 2615100 EE469#

Note* ANGLED AT 30° # Y20 BH OR E22H HEAD

HOLE DIA 14mmSUITABLE FORM12 BOLTS

7mm RAD

38mm44mm

OH

J20.

SKF



OHJ 26 – Copper Lug - Single Bolt

CONDUCTOR BICCHARD DRAWN COPPER CADMIUM COPPER )STRANDED SOLID STRANDED CAT No. DRG COMM DIE SET

SIZE STRAND SWG DIA Cu Eq: STRAND JUMPER SUF CODE MH100 G10mm² in² in mm mm CSA in2 in mm TERMINAL (MD6) (Y35)

- .022 7/.064 7/1.63 8 4.06 .017 3/.093 3/2.26 } L1C1-12 A 2616100- .025 3/.104 3/2.64 7 4.47 .022 7/.069 7/1.75 } L1C1-16 R 2616210 W203 U203

16 - - 7/1.70 6 4.88 .022 3/.105 3/2.67 } L1C1-20 S 2616220- - - - - - .025 7/.073 7/1.85 }

25 - - 7/2.16 - - - - - } L1C2-12 B 2616110- .040 3/.131 3/3.37 5 5.38 .025 3/.112 3/2.84 }

25* - - 196/0.4 4 5.89 .035 7/.086 7/2.18 } L1C2-16.035 3/.131 3/3.33 } C 2616120 W204 U204.040 7/.093 7/2.36 } L1C2-20.040 3/.141 3/3.58 }.050 7/.103 7/2.62 }

} L1C3-12 E 2616140- .050 3/.147 3/3.73 3 6.40 .050 3/.158 3/4.01 }- .058 7/.104 7/2.64 2 7.01 .060 7/.113 7/2.87 } L1C3-16 F 2616150 W373 U373

(- .06# 19/.064 19/1.62 1 7.62 } L1C3-20 G 2616160

32 - - - 1/0 8.23 }

- .60 3/.161 3/4.09 2/0 8.84 .075 7/.127 7/3.23 } L1C4-12 H 2616170- .075 3/.180 3/4.57 3/0 9.45 }- .075 7/.116 7/2.95 - - } L1C4-16 J 2616180

50 .075 7/.118 7/3.00 - - } W166 U166- .100 7/.136 7/3.45 - - } L1C4-20 K 2616190

70n - 19/0.86 19/2.18 - - })70 - 7/3.55 - - }70* - - 360/0.5 - - - - - YCA070FL12H 2615950 W699 U699

} L9C-12 M 2616310.150 7/.179 7/4.55 }

120n - - 37/2.06 - - .150 19/.109 19/2.77 } L9C-16 N 2616320 - U169}} L9C-20 O 2616330}

Note: * Live Line Tapping Cable # Annealed Copper n Transformer TailingFor copper neutrals of waveform CNE cable use:

CABLESIZE mm² NEUTRAL mm² DRG.SUF35 22 B95 60 H

185 115 M300 115 M

COMPRESSION LENGTH

LAST TWO DIGITS INDICATE BOLT SIZEE.G. L1CI -12 WILL ACCEPT A 12mm BOLT O

HJ26

.SKF



OHJ 31 – Copper Lug - Double Bolt

CONDUCTOR BICCHARD DRAWN COPPER CADMIUM COPPERSTRANDED SOLID STRANDED CAT No. DRG COMM DIE SET

SIZE STRAND SWG DIA Cu Eq: STRAND JUMPER SUF CODE MH100 G10mm² in² in mm mm CSA in2 in mm TERMINAL (MD6) (Y35)

- .022 7/.064 7/1.63 8 4.06 .017 3/.093 3/2.26 }- .025 3/.104 3/2.64 7 4.47 .022 7/.069 7/1.75 } L1C1-12D A 2615910 W203 U203

16 - - 7/1.70 6 4.88 .022 3/.105 3/2.67 }- - - - - - .025 7/.073 7/1.85 }

25 - - 7/2.16 - - - - - }- .040 3/.131 3/3.37 5 5.38 .025 3/.112 3/2.84 }

25* - - 196/0.4 4 5.89 .035 7/.086 7/2.18 }.035 3/.131 3/3.33 } L1C2-12D B 2615920 W204 U204.040 7/.093 7/2.36 }.040 3/.141 3/3.58 }.050 7/.103 7/2.62 }

- .050 3/.147 3/3.73 3 6.40 .050 3/.158 3/4.01 }- .058 7/.104 7/2.64 2 7.01 .060 7/.113 7/2.87 } L1C3-12D C 2615930 W373 U373- .06# 19/.064 19/1.62 1 7.62 }

32 - - - 1/0 8.23 }

- .60 3/.161 3/4.09 2/0 8.84 .075 7/.127 7/3.23 }- .075 3/.180 3/4.57 3/0 9.45 }- .075 7/.116 7/2.95 - - } L1C4-12D- .075 7/.118 7/3.00 - - } D 2615940 W166 U166- .100 7/.136 7/3.45 - - }

70n - 19/0.86 19/2.18 - - }70 - 7/3.55 - - }

- .150 7/.166 } L8C-12D70* - - 360/0.5 - - - - - } E 2616050 W166 U166

.150 7/.179 7/4.55 } L9C-12D120n - - 37/2.06 - - .150 19/.109 19/2.77 } F 2616060 - U169

Note:

* Live Line Tapping Cable # Annealed Copper n Transformer Tailing

38mm COMPRESSION LENGTH

44mm

DIA 14mm HOLES SUITABLE FOR M12 BOLTS

OH

J31.

SKF



OHJ 35 - Bi-Metal Lug - Single Bolt - ACSR, AAAC & HDA

CONDUCTOR BICCACSR ALI ALLOY HARD DRAWN ALI CAT No DRG DIE SET

SIZE STRAND SIZE STRAND SIZE DIA STRAIGHT SUF COMM MH100 G10in² mm² mm in² mm² mm in² mm² mm PALM CODE (MD6) (Y35)

.025 25 6/1/2.36 .025 25 7/2.33 LB12RL16 W698 U698

.04 40 6/1/3.00 .04 40 7/2.95 LB20RL16 W659 U659

.05 50 6/1/3.35 .05 50 7/3.30

.04 40 6/1/3.00 .04 40 7/2.95 LLT 50 312/0.45 LB20RL16H# F 2615470 W659 U659

.05 50 6/1/3.35 .05 50 7/3.30 CABLE

.05 50 7/3.10 LB9A16 D 2615430 W243 U243

.10 100 6/4.72+ .10 100 7/4.65 LLT 95 589/0.45 LB34RL16H# E 2615440 U6547/1.57 CABLE

.10 100 7/4.39 LB25A16 F 2615470 W249 U249

.15 150 18/1/3.35 LB42R16 G 2615460 U790

Note:# The compression barrel of this lug is counterbored to enable the sheath of the Live Line

Tapping cable to be held captive.

CATALOGUE NO.

HOLE SUITABLE FORM16 BOLTS

CONDUCTOR STRANDINGDIE INDEX N0.

OHJ

35.S

KF



OHJ 40 - Bi-Metal Lug - Single Bolt - 30º Palm - ACSR, AAAC & HDA

CONDUCTOR BICCACSR ALI ALLOY HARD DRAWN ALI CAT No DRG DIE SET

SIZE STRAND SIZE STRAND SIZE DIA 30º BACKWARD SUF COMM MH100 G10in² mm² mm in² mm² mm in² mm² mm RAKED PALM CODE (MD6) (Y35)

.025 25 6/1/2.36 .025 25 7/2.33 LB12RL16-30 W698 U698

.04 40 6/1/3.00 .04 40 7/2.95 LB20RL16-30 W659 U659

.05 50 6/1/3.35 .05 50 7/3.30

.04 40 6/1/3.00 .04 40 7/2.95 LLT 50 312/0.45 LB20RL16H-30# H 2615770 W659 U659

.05 50 6/1/3.35 .05 50 7/3.30 CABLE

.05 50 7/3.10 LB9A16-30 W243 U243

.10 100 6/4.72+ .10 100 7/4.65 LLT 95 589/0.45 LB34RL16-30H# E 2615740 U6547/1.57 CABLE

.10 100 7/4.39 LB25A16-30 F W249 U249

.15 150 18/1/3.35 LB42R16-30 U790

Note:# The compression barrel of this lug is counterbored to enable the sheath of the Live Line

Tapping cable to be held captive.

OH

J40.

SKF

CATALOGUE NO.


CONDUCTOR STRANDINGDIE INDEX NO.



OHJ 41 - Bi-Metal - Double Bolt - ACSR

CONDUCTOR BICC No Commodity Code DieSet

50 ACSR LB20RL12D 2615500 -100 ACSR LB34RL12D 2615510 -150 ACSR LB42R12D 2615520 -300 HDA LB48A12D 2615530 -

CONDUCTOR TWO BOLT FIXING30° FORWARD RAKED PALM DIE SET

ACSR HARD DRAWNALUMINIUM BICC CAT No DRG COMM G10

STRAND STRAND (BURNDY) SUF CODE (Y35)mm² mm mm² mm

150 18/1/3.35 LB42R10DS-30 A 2615600 U790(YCA150R10D-B30)

EE4694300 19/4.65 LB61A10DS-30 +Y20BH

(YCA300A10D-B30) OR E22HHEAD

OHJ41.SKF

DISCONTINUED


CONDUCTOR STRANDINGDIE INDEX N0.

OHJ 41.SKF

38mm

44mm



OHJ 42 - BLX Aluminium Lug - Raked 30 Degrees

CONDUCTORS FIXING STUD BICC COMM.mm² DIAM. mm REFERENCE CODE

50 12 L18L1-12H-30 2615300

50 16 L18L1-16H-30 2615310

120 16 L34L1-16H-30 2615320

185 16 L55L1-16H-30 2615330

OH

J42.

SKF

SINGLE HOLE FIXING FOR M16 STUD(nn = STUD DIAM)

BIC

C

LXXL

1 -n

nH30

MIN. INSERTION LENGTH

CRIMP LENGTH

XXmm² BLXDIE NO. XXX G10

OVERLAP CRIMPS 3mmDIE NO. XXX G5

W DIES BUTT CRIMPSMIN

INSE

RTIO

N START HERE



OHJ 43 - BLX Bi-Metal Lug - Raked 30 Degrees

CONDUCTORS BICC COMM.mm² REFERENCE CODE

50 LB18L1-16H-30 2615700

120 LB34L1-16H-30 2615710

185 LB55L1-16H-30 2615720

OH

J43.

SKF

SINGLE HOLE FIXING FOR M16 STUD

30°

LBXXRL 16-30

BICC

MIN. INSERTION LENGTH

CRIMP LENGTH

XXXmm BLX

DIE NO. XXX

G10 OVERLAP CRIMPS 3mmSTAR

T HER

E

MIN

INSE

RTI

ON



OHJ 46 – Copper Mid-Span Joint

CONDUCTOR BICCHARD DRAWN COPPER CADMIUM COPPER

STRANDED SOLID STRANDED CAT No. DRG COMM DIE SETSIZE STRAND SWG DIA Cu Eq: STRAND TENSION SUF CODE MH100 G10

mm² in² in mm mm CSA in2 in mm SPLICE (MD6) (Y35)

- .022 7/.064 7/1.63 8 4.06 .017 3/.093 3/2.26 }- .025 3/.104 3/2.64 7 4.47 .022 7/.069 7/1.75 } SF1C1 A 2617400 * U203- - - - 6 4.88 .022 3/.105 3/2.67 }- - - - - - .025 7/.073 7/1.85 }

- .040 3/.131 3/3.37 5 5.38 .025 3/.112 3/2.84 }- - - - 4 5.89 .035 7/.086 7/2.18 }

.035 3/.131 3/3.33 } SF1C2 B 2617410 * U204

.040 7/.093 7/2.36 }

.040 3/.141 3/3.58 }

.050 7/.103 7/2.62 }

- .050 3/.147 3/3.73 3 6.40 .050 3/.158 3/4.01 } *- .058 7/.104 7/2.64 2 7.01 .060 7/.113 7/2.87 } SF1C3 C 2617420 U373- .060 19/.064 19/1.62 1 7.62 }

32 - - 3/3.75 1/0 8.23 }

- .60 3/.161 3/4.09 2/0 8.84 .075 7/.127 7/3.23 }- .075 3/.180 3/4.57 3/0 9.45 }- .075 7/.116 7/2.95 - - } SF1C4 D 2617430 * U166- .075 7/.118 7/3.00 - - }- .100 7/.136 7/3.45 - - }

70 - - 7/3.55 - - }

- .150 7/.166 } SF8C U168}

Note:

* THE MH100 TOOL MUST NOT BE USED FOR TENSION JOINTS AT LV or HV.

OH

J46.

SKF



OHJ 52 – Copper Dead-End with Socket

CONDUCTORHARD DRAWN COPPER CADMIUM COPPER BICC DIE

STRANDED SOLID STRANDED DRG COMM SETSIZE STRAND SWG DIA Cu Eq: STRAND CAT No SUF CODE G10

mm² in² in mm mm CSA in2 in mm DEAD END (Y35)

- .022 7/.064 7/1.63 8 4.06 .017 3/.093 3/2.26 }- .025 3/.104 3/2.64 7 4.47 .022 7/.069 7/1.75 } D51NS-1C1 A 2612600 U203- - - - 6 4.88 .022 3/.105 3/2.67 }- - - - - - .025 7/.073 7/1.85 }

- .040 3/.131 3/3.37 5 5.38 .025 3/.112 3/2.84 }- - - - 4 5.89 .035 7/.086 7/2.18 }

.035 3/.131 3/3.33 } D51NS-1C2 B 2612610 U204

.040 7/.093 7/2.36 }

.040 3/.141 3/3.58 }

.050 7/.103 7/2.62 }

- .050 3/.147 3/3.73 3 6.40 .050 3/.158 3/4.01 }- .058 7/.104 7/2.64 2 7.01 .060 7/.113 7/2.87 } D51NS-1C3 C 2612620 U373- .060 19/.064 19/1.62 1 7.62 }

32 - - 3/3.75 1/0 8.23 }

- .60 3/.161 3/4.09 2/0 8.84 .075 7/.127 7/3.23 }- .075 3/.180 3/4.57 3/0 9.45 }- .075 7/.116 7/2.95 - - }- - 7/.118 7/3.00 - - } D51NS-1C4 D 2612630 U166- .100 7/.136 7/3.45 - - }

70 - - 7/3.55 - - }

•••• THE MH100 TOOL MUST NOT BE USED FOR TENSION JOINTS AT LV orHV.

STAR

T H

ERE

START HER

E

OH

J52.

SKF



OHJ 55 – Aluminium Mid-Span Joint

CONDUCTOR BICC (BURNDY) DIEACSR ALI ALLOY HARD DRAWN ALI CAT No DRG SET

SIZE STRAND SIZE STRAND SIZE DIA TENSION SUF COMM G10in² mm² mm in² mm² mm in² mm² mm SPLICE CODE (Y35)

.022 7/2.06 SF5A U163(YDS2CA9)

.025 25 6/1/2.36 SF12R U698(YDS3R1-BG)

.03 30 6/1/2.59 SF13R D 2617030 U698(YDS2R7-BG)

.04 40 6/1/3.00 .04 40 7/2.95 SF20R F 2617050 U6596/1/3.20 (YDS248R-BG)

.05 50 6/1/3.35 .05 50 7/3.30 .06 60 7/3.40

.05 50 7/3.10 SF9A G 2617060 U243(YDS249AT)

.06 12/7/2.59

.06 6/1/3.66 SF32R H 2617070 U654.075 6/1/4.09 (YDS267R-BG)

70 19/2.8 SF25A J 2617090 U249100 7/4.39 (YDS279AT)

.08 6/1/4.22 .10 100 7/4.65

.10 100 6/1/4.72 .10 19/2.84

.10 {7/4.39A+ SF34R K 2617100 U654{7/1.93S (YDS279R-BG)

.10 100 {6/4.72A+{7/1.57S

.15 150 30/7/2.59 SFT44R L 2617110 U305&(YDS319R) U316

.15 150 18/1/3.35 SFT42R M 2617120 U790(YDS306R-BG)

.175 175 30/7/2.79

300 19/4.65 SF61A P 2617140 EE469(YDS300A) #

Note:

# Y20 BH OR E22H HEAD


OH

J55.

SKF



OHJ 56 – Aluminium Non-Tension Joint for ACSR

A.C.S.R DIE SETSIZE COMMODITY G10mm² CODE (Y35)

50 2617010 U659

100 2617020 U654

150 2617000 U790

OH

J56.

SKF



OHJ 60 – Aluminium Dead-End – 300mm2 HDA

AAC COMPRESSION TERMINATION

SIZE BICC CAT: No DRG C. CODE DIE SETmm² STRAND SUF

300 19/4.65 D25-61A N 2612130 EE469 #

Note:

# Y20BH OR E22H HEAD

OH

J60.

SKF



OHJ 61 – Aluminium Dead-End – Socket and 30° Dropper Plate for ACSR

A.C.S.R DIE SETSIZE CODE COMMODITY BICC G10mm² NAME CODE CAT NO. (Y35)

30 WEASEL 2619050 D52NS-13R U698

40 FERRET 2619060 D51NS-18R U699

50 RABBIT 2619000 D51NS-20RL-K3 U659

60 MINK 2619070 D51NS-32R U654

75 RACOON 2619070 D51NS-32R U654

100 DOG 2619010 D51NS-34RL-K3 U654

150 DINGO 2619020 D51NS-42RL-K3 U790

Note:

K3 Denotes kit containing 2 bolt aluminium lug and backing plate


START HERE

A SF

STAR

T H

ERE

AL A

LL

OH

J61.

SKF



OHJ 62 - Cable Pin For Live Line Tapping Cable

LLT CABLE BICC CAT No DIE SETSIZE mm² (BURNDY) C. CODE MH100/(MD6) G10/(Y35)

95 PA32R-12H30 2632110 W-249 U-249(YEO95R10)

BARREL HALF FILLED WITH OXIDEINHIBITING COMPOUND AND SEALEDWITH PLASTIC PLUG

METHOD OF USE

CABLEPIN

ALUMINIUM BAIL

CABLEPIN

LIVE LINETAPPINGCABLE

LIVE LINETAP

8014

40

30°

12 D

IA

OH

J62.

SKF



OHJ 68 - Lugs For CNE Wavecon Cable

PHASE FITTING

LUG WITH 12mm HOLE

CABLE SIZE BICC CAT No DRG COMMODITY DIE SETmm² SUF CODE35 BAS35A-12 E 5404380 UP35A UNA4-195 BA95A3-12 F 5404480 UP95A3 UNA3185 BA185A3-12 G 5404490 UP185A3 UNA3300 BA300A3-12 H 5404500 UP300A3 UNA3

LUG WITH 16mm HOLE

CABLE SIZE BICC CAT No DRG COMMODITY DIE SETmm² SUF CODE70 BA70A3-16 A 5404410 UP70A3 UNA3-1120 BA120A3-16 B 5404470 UP120A3 UNA3185 BA185A3-16 C 5404520 UP185A3 UNA3300 BA300A3-16 D 5404560 UP300A3 UNA3

Note:

For neutral/earth lugs see OHJ26 (extract shown below for ease of reference)

For copper neutrals of waveform CNE cable use:

CABLESIZE mm² NEUTRAL mm² OHJ26DRG.SUF

35 22 B95 60 H185 115 M300 115 M

12mm OR 16mm STUD HOLE

OH

J68.

SKF



OHJ 71 - Compression Joint For CNE Wavecon Cable To ABC

COPPER NEUTRAL EARTH FITTING

CABLE SIZE ABC BICC CAT: No C. CODE DIE SETmm² mm² CABLE ABC

This fitting for 35 N/E -35 ABC is an OHJ 7235 N/E 35 PSB35A25CK 2621100 163 UBG

but is shown in this table for ease of reference

95 N/E 95/120 SC95C-29AH 5415220 658 166

185 N/E 95/120 SC185C-29AH 5415230 658 169

300 N/E 95/120 SC185C-29AH 5415230 U169 (Cu) U658

PHASE FITTING

CABLE SIZE ABC BICC CAT: No C. CODE DIE SETmm² mm² CABLE ABC

This fitting for 35 phase -35 ABC is an OHJ 13635 PHASE 35 PSB35A25CK 2621020 E173 E173

but is shown in this table for ease of reference

95 PHASE 95/120 SC95A3-29AH 5415200 658 UP95A3

185 PHASE 95/120 SC185A3-29AH 5415160 243 UP185A3

300 PHASE 95/120 SC300A3-29AH 5415210 UNA3 & U658UP300A3

COPPERNEUTRAL / EARTH FITTING

PHASE FITTING

SA

H

E

TR

T

R E

OH

J67.

SKF



OHJ 72 - Bi-Metal Splice – PME Earth - 35mm ABC to 16mm Copper

2 1 BICC

OH

J72.

SKF

SIDE ‘A’ SIDE ‘B’ COLOUR TOOLING DIE SET COMMODITYABC Cu CODE ABC CU CABLE CODE

NEUTRAL35mm² 16mm² RED MH100R WBG W163 2621100

G10 UBG U163



OHJ 80 - Split Bolt Line Tap - Copper

CONDUCTOR DIMENSIONS mmSIZE STRANDING DRG C. CODEmm² mm A B C D E F SUF16 3/2.65 25 5.5 13 19 4 12 A 263400032 3/3.75 35 8 19 24 4 18 B 263401070 7/3.55 45 11 24 30 6 22 C 2634020100 7/4.30 50 14 30 36 9 27 D 2634030

A

B

C

D

E

F

A/3

OH

J80.

SKF



OHJ 90 – Adaptor Plate For Pole Termination

38

38

46

39

5

20

50

14 Dia

14 Dia

14 Dia

14 Dia

60 deg

MATERIALELECTRICAL GRADE COPPER 4 mm thick

OHJ 90



OHJ 100 - BICC Wedge Taps, Bails And Accessories

INSULATING INSULATINGMANUF. COMM COMPOUND SHROUD

CARTRIDGE TOOL (FOR INSULATED (FORREF. CODE AND BIMETALLIC INSULATED

INSTALL REMOVE JOINTS) JOINTS)

WG03A-S 2663070 GREEN ½ STRIP(BICC SMALLSMALL WG1A-S 2663060 (HILTI503516 GREEN MP100 WGC20055PAK (BICC WGSS)

WG2A-S 2663050 PACK OF 10) TYPE PACK OF 24)CC 581891 CC 2600910 CC 2662010

WG04A-M 2663010ALUMINIUM WG1A-M 2663000 YELLOW

MEDIUM WG2A-M 2663020 (HILTI 503524 GREEN MP100 MEDIUMWEDGES WG3A-M 2663030 PACK OF 10) TYPE 2 X ½ STRIP (BICC WGMS)

WG10A-MH 2663080 CC 581893 CC 2662020WG11A-MH 2663040

LARGE WG1A-L 2663100 YELLOW GREEN MP200 2 X ½ STRIP -WG5A-L 2663090 TYPE

WG1A-K1 2660500 YELLOW GREEN MP100 - -ALUMINIUM BAILS WG2A-K1 2660510 TYPE

WG3A-K1 2660520 YELLOW GREEN MP200 - -TYPE

WG1C-K1 2660550 YELLOW GREEN MP100 - -COPPER BAILS WG2C-K1 2660570 TYPE

WG3C-K1 2660560



OHJ 102 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps, Conductor Diameter Limits

1. STANDARD WEDGES (ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm)DIAMETER OF

CONNECTOR COMMODITY INDIVIDUAL COMBINED DIAMETERCODE CONDUCTORS OF BOTH CONDUCTORS

MIN MAX MIN MAX

SMALL CONNECTORS, INSTALL & REMOVE - GREEN CARTRIDGE (MP100)WG03A-S 2663070 4.80 7.19 9.6 11.99WG1A-S 2663060 4.80 10.16 12.00 15.29WG2A-S 2663050 5.14 10.16 15.30 18.25

MEDIUM CONNECTORS, INSTALL - YELLOW, REMOVE - GREEN (MP100)WG04A-M 2663010 5.67 12.92 16.70 18.59WG1A-M 2663000 5.67 14.73 18.60 22.00WG2A-M 2663020 7.28 14.73 22.01 25.79WG3A-M 2663030 11.07 14.73 25.80 28.35

LARGE CONNECTORS, INSTALL - YELLOW, REMOVE GREEN (MP200)WG1A-L 2663100 9.9 17.1 25.00 27.00WG2A-L 9.9 19.1 27.01 29.00WG3A-L 9.9 21.0 29.01 31.00WG4A-L 10.01 21.0 31.01 33.00WG5A-L 2663090 12.01 21.0 33.01 35.00WG6A-L 14.01 21.0 35.01 37.00

2. HANDED WEDGESDIAMETER OF

INDIVIDUAL COMBINEDCONDUCTORS DIAMETER

CONNECTOR COMMODITY MAIN TAP OF BOTHCODE (LARGE (SMALL CONDUCTORS

GROOVE) GROOVE)MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX

MEDIUM CONNECTORS, INSTALL - YELLOW, REMOVE - GREEN (MP100)WG10A-MH 2663080 7.6 14.73 4.5 7.6 14.00 17.00WG11A-MH 2663040 7.6 14.73 4.5 7.6 17.01 19.85



OHJ 110 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For ACSR & AAAC (Part 1)

CONDUCTOR ACSRCODE NAME Gopher Weasel Ferret Rabbit Mink Horse Racoon

AL AREA AND 25 30 40 50 60 70 75STRANDING 7/2.36 7/2.59 7/3.00 7/3.35 7/3.66 19/2.75 7/4.10

mm² & Dia:mm mm 7.08 7.77 9.00 10.05 10.98 13.95 12.30

Gopher 25 WG1A-S WG04A-M7/2.36 7.08 2663060 2663010

Weasel 307/2.59 7.77 WG2A-S

Ferret 40 26630507/3.00 9.00

Rabbit 507/3.35 10.05 WG1A-M

Mink 60 WG04A-M 2663000 WG2A-MACSR 7/3.66 10.98 2663010 2663020

Horse 70 WG3A-M19/2.75 13.95 2663030

Racoon 757/4.10 12.30 WG2A-M

Otter 80 26630207/4.22 12.66

Dog 1007/4.72 14.15

Dingo 150 N/A WG1A-L N/A19/3.35 16.75 2663100

Almond 25 WG1A-S WG04A-M WG1A-M7/2.34 7.00 2663060 2663010 2663000

Fir 40 WG2A-S WG1A-MAAAC 7/2.95 8.85 2663050 2663000

Hazel 50 WG2A-M7/3.30 9.90 2663020

Oak 100 WG1A-M WG2A-M WG3A-M7/4.65 13.95 2663000 2663020 2663030

N/A - Not applicable



OHJ 110 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For ACSR & AAAC (Part 2)

CONDUCTOR ACSR AAACCODE NAME Otter Dog Dingo Almond Fir Hazel Oak

AL AREA AND 80 100 150 25 40 50 100STRANDING 7/4.42 7/4.72 19/3.35 7/2.34 7/2.95 7/3.30 7/4.65

mm² & Dia:mm mm 12.66 14.15 16.75 7.00 8.85 9.90 13.95

Gopher 257/2.36 7.08 WG1A-L WG1A-M

Weasel 30 WG1A-M N/A 2663060 WG2A-S 26630007/2.59 7.77 2663000 2663050

Ferret 407/3.00 9.00

Rabbit 50 WG1A-L WG2A-M7/3.35 10.05 WG2A-M 2663100 WG1A-M 2663020

Mink 60 2663020 WG04A-M 2663000ACSR 7/3.66 10.98 2663010

Horse 70 WG3A-M19/2.75 13.95 2663030

Racoon 75 WG3A-M7/4.10 12.30 WG2A-M N/A WG1A-M 2663030 WG3A-M

Otter 80 2663020 2663000 26630307/4.22 12.66

Dog 1007/4.72 14.15

Dingo 150 N/A WG5A-L N/A19/3.35 16.75 2663090

Almond 25 WG1A-S WG1A-M7/2.34 7.00 WG1A-M 2663060 WG2A-S 2663000

Fir 40 2663000 2663050AAAC 7/2.95 8.85 N/A WG1A-M WG2A-M

Hazel 50 WG2A-M 2663000 26630207/3.30 9.90 2663020

Oak 100 WG3A-M WG1A-M WG2A-M WG3A-M7/4.65 13.95 2663030 2663000 2663020 2663030

N/A - Not applicable



OHJ 112 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For HDA

CODE NAME MIDGE GNAT APHIS ANT FLY BLUE EARWIG WASP BEETLEBOTTLE

AREA & 22 25 25 50 60 70 75 100 100STRANDING 7/2.06 7/2.21 3/3.35 7/3.10 7/3.40 7/3.66 7/3.78 7/4.39 19/2.67

mm² & DIA:mm mm 6.2 6.6 7.2 9.3 10.2 11.0 11.4 13.2 13.4

MIDGE 227/2.06 6.2 WG1A-S WG2A-S WG04A-M

GNAT 25 2663060 2663050 26630107/2.21 6.6

APHIS 253/3.35 7.2

ANT 507/3.40 9.3 WG2A-S WG1A-M

FLY 60 2663050 26630007/3.40 10.2

BLUE 70BOTTLE 7/3.66 11.0 WG04A-MEARWIG 75 2663010

7/3.78 11.4 WG2A-MWASP 100 2663020

7/4.39 13.2 WG3A-MBEETLE 100 2663030

19/2.67 13.4



USE Insulation Piercing Connectors OHJ 140

OHJ 114 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For HDA, Annealed Aluminium, ABC

CONDUCTOR HARD DRAWN ALUMINIUM ANNEALEDALUMINIUM

AREA & 22 25 25 50 100 25 50STRANDING 7/2.06 7/2.21 3/3.35 7/3.10 7/4.39 7/2.14 19/1.78

mm² & DIA:mm mm 6.2 6.6 7.2 9.3 13.2 6.42 8.9025 WG1A-S WG1A-M WG1A-S

ANNEALED 7/2.14 6.42 2663060 2663000 2663060ALUMINIUM 50 WG2A-S 2663050 WG2A-M WG2A-S 2663050

19/1.78 8.90 266302035 WG1A-S WG1A-M

7/2.52 7.05 2663060 2663000 WG1A-S WG2A-SAERIAL 50 2663040 2663050BUNDLE 19/1.78 8.2 WG2A-S 2663050CONDU- 70 WG10A-MH WG04A-M WG1A-M WG2A M WG10AM-H WG1A-M

CTOR 19/2.14 9.8 2663080 2663010 2663000 2663020 2663000 266300095 WG04A-M

19/2.52 11.55 2663010

Note:To connect ABC to 'annealed aluminium', 'ABC' and 'concentric hybrid cable' use insulationpiercing connectors OHJ 140.



OHJ 120 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For Hard Drawn Copper To Hard DrawnAluminium

CONDUCTOR HARD DRAWN ALUMINIUMAREA & 22 25 25 50 100

STRANDING 7/2.06 7/2.21 3/3.35 7/3/10 7/4.39mm² & DIA:

mm mm 6.2 6.6 7.2 9.3 13.214

7/1.63 4.88 WG03A-S WG11A-MH16 2663070 2663040

HARD 7/1.70 5.1016

DRAWN 3/2.64 5.6732 WG1A-M

COPPER 7/2.46 7.38 WG1A-S 266300032 2663060

3/3.75 8.0535

7/2.64 7.9235

3/4.09 8.81 WG2A-S WG2A-M50 2663050 2663020

7/2.95 8.8550 WG1A-M

3/4.54 9.86 266300070 WG04A-M

7/3.55 10.65 2663010

Note:

The assembly should be fully encapsulated using sealing compound





OHJ 122 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For Copper To Annealed Aluminium, AerialBundled Conductor

CONDUCTOR ANNEALED COPPER HARD DRAWN COPPERAREA & 14 16 14 16 16 32

STRANDING 7/1.63 7/1.70 7/1.63 7/1.70 3/2.64 7/2.46mm² & DIA:

mm mm 4.89 5.10 4.00 5.10 5.67 7.38ANNEALED 25 WG03A-S 2663070 WG03A-S 2663070 WG1A-S

7/2.14 6.42ALUMINIUM 50 WG1A-S 2663060 2663060 WG2A-S

19/1.78 8.90 2663050

357/2.52 7.05 WG1A-S 2663060 WG1A-S 2663060

AERIAL 50 WG2A-S19/1.78 8.2 2663050

70 WG04A-MBUNDLE 19/2.14 9.8 WG10A-MH 2663080 WG10A-MH 2663080 2663010

95 WG04A-M WG1A-M19/2.52 11.55 2663010 2663000

CONDUCTOR HARD DRAWN COPPERAREA & 32 35 35 50 50 70

STRANDING 3/3.75 7/2.64 3/4.09 7/2.95 3/4.54 7/3.55mm² & DIA:

mm mm 8.05 7.92 8.81 8.85 9.86 10.6525 WG1A-S 2663060 WG2A-S WG04A-M

ANNEALED 7/2.14 6.42 2663050 2663010ALUMINIUM 50 WG2A-S 2663050 WG1A-M 2663000

19/1.78 8.9035 WG04A-M

7/2.52 7.05 WG2A-S 2663050 2663010AERIAL 50 WG04A-M

19/1.78 8.2 2663010BUNDLE 70 WG04A-M 2663010

19/2.14 9.895 WG1A-M 2663000 WG2A-M

19/2.52 11.55 2663020

Note:

For ABC to aluminium or copper open wire use transitional IPC OHJ 140

Where conductor combinations are bi-metallic, the assembly must be fully encapsulatedusing sealing compound



OHJ 124 - BICC Aluminium Wedge Taps For Hard Drawn Solid Copper To AnnealedAluminium, Hard Drawn Aluminium.

CONDUCTOR HARD DRAWN SOLIDCOPPERAREA &STRAN- SWG 8 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0

DINGmm² & DIAM:

mm mm 4.06 4.88 5.89 7.01 7.62 8.23 8.84 9.45

ANNEA- 25 WG03A-S WG1A-S WG1A-S WG2A-S WG2A-SLED 7/2.14 6.42 2663070 2663060 2663060 2663050 2663050

ALUMI-NIUM

50 WG1A-S WG1A-S WG2A-S WG2A-S WG2A-S19/1.78 8.90 2663060 2663060 2663050 2663050 2663050

22 WG03A-S WG1A-S WG1A-S WG2A-S WG2A-SH.D. 7/2.06 6.2 2663070 2663060 2663060 2663050 2663050

ALUMI-NIUM

50 WG2A-S WG1A-M WG1A-S7/3.1 9.3 2663050 2663000 2663000

Note

Where conductor combinations are bi-metallic the assembly must be fully encapsulated usingsealing compound



OHJ 130 - BICC Aluminium Bail

CONDUCTOR RECOMMENDATIONSBICC COMMODITY ACSR ALUMINIUM ALLOY

CAT No CODE SIZE STRANDING SIZE STRANDINGmm² mm mm² mm

25 7/2.36 25 7/2.3430 7/2.59

WG1A-K1 2660500 40 7/3.00 40 7/2.9550 7/3.35 50 7/3.30

60 7/3.6670 19/2.79

WG2A-K1 2660510 75 7/4.1080 7/4.22100 6/4.72+7/1.57 100 7/4.65

WG3A-K1 2660520 150 19/3.35

Note:

1. Installation Cartridge - HILTI YELLOWRemoval Cartridge - HILTI GREEN

2. Tool for WG1A-K1 &WG2A-K1 - MP100Tool for WG3A-K1 - MP200

OH

J130

.SKF



OHJ 132 - BICC Copper Bails

CONDUCTOR CONDUCTOR RECOMMENDATIONSBICC COMMODITY DIAMETER HARD DRAWN COPPER CADMIUM COPPER

CAT No CODE LIMITS (mm) SIZE STRANDING SIZE STRANDINGMIN MAX mm² in² in mm in² in mm

4.88 7.60 16 .022 7/.064 7/1.63 .017 3/.093 3/2.36.025 3/.104 3/2.64 .022 7/.069 7/1.75

WG1C-K1 2660550 7/1.70 .022 3/.105 3/2.67.025 7/.073 7/1.85.035 7/.086 7/2.18.035 3/.131 3/3.33.040 7/.093 7/2.36

7.61 9.60 32 .050 3/.147 3/3.73 .040 3/.141 3/3.58.058 7/.104 7/2.64 .050 7/.103 7/2.62

WG2C-K1 2660570 .060 19/.064 19/1.62 .050 3/.158 3/4.01.060 3/.161 3/4.09 .060 7/.113 7/2.87.075 3/.180 3/4.57.075 7/.116 7/2.95.075 7/.118 7/3.00

3/3.75

WG3C-K1 2660560 9.61 11.60 70 .100 7/.136 7/3.45 .075 7/.127 7/3.237/3.85

Note:

1. Installation Cartridge - HILTI YELLOWRemoval Cartridge - HILTI GREEN

2. Tool - MP100

OH

J132

.SKF



OHJ 133 - ‘H’ Crimpet For ACSR and 300mm2 HDA

CONDUCTOR mm² CATALOGUE COMMODITYMAIN TAP NUMBER CODE DIE SET

300 150 YFR 815 2354410 P - YFR

300 300 YFR 915 2354420 P - YFR

P - YFR Die for use with Y46 HYPRESS only

OH

J133

.SKF



OHJ 136/7 – Tension & Non - Tension A.B.C. Insulated Joint

CONDUCTORS RING COLOUR OHJ REFERENCE COMMODITY TENSION ORmm² CODE NO. (SICAME) CODE NON-TENSION

A B A B

120 120 pink pink OHJ137 2620040 EITHER

95 grey OHJ136 MJPT 95 2620030 EITHER95 70 grey white OHJ136 MJPT 95 - 70 2621080 NON-TENSION

50 yellow OHJ136 MJPT 95 - 50 2621070 NON-TENSION35 red OHJ136 MJPT 95 -35 2621060 NON-TENSION

70 50 white yellow OHJ137 MJPT 70 - 50 2621050 NON-TENSION35 red OHJ136 MJPT 70 - 35 2621040 NON-TENSION25 orange OHJ136 MJPT 70 - 25 2621030 NON-TENSION

50 50 yellow yellow OHJ137 MJPT 50 2620020 EITHER35 red OHJ136 MJPT 50 - 35 2621020 NON-TENSION25 orange OHJ136 MJPT 50 - 25 2621010 NON-TENSION

35 35 red red OHJ137 MJPT 35 2620010 EITHER25 orang

eOHJ136 MJPT 35 - 25 2621000 NON-TENSION

CONDUCTOR APPLICATION TOOLING EQUIVALENTmm² DIE SETS

FULL OR NON-TENSION G10 / Y35 E173 U173 UBG25 TO 95 (for E140 use UBG)

NON-TENSION ONLY MH 100/MD6 - 8 WBG W173(for E140 use WBG)

120 FULL OR NON-TENSION G10 / Y35 E215 U215

Note:

1. Use the die set as indicated on the fitting or equivalent as shown in the table.

RING (elastomere)SLEEVE (aluminium)

A

3 2

Greased

INSULATED COVER (thermo - plastic)Crimping sequence

11 32

B

OH

J136

.SKF



OHJ 138 - Copper Palm A.B.C.Insulated Lug

CONDUCTOR COLOUR HOLE STUD REFERENCE COMM.mm² CODE DIA. (SICAME) CODE

35 Red 13 CPTAU 35 2622000

50 Yellow 13 CPTAU 50 2622010

95 Grey 13 CPTAU 95 2622020

120 Pink 21 CPTAU 120 2622030

CONDUCTOR TOOLING EQUIVALENTmm² DIE SETS

G10 / Y35 E173 U173 UBG(for E140 use UBG)

25 TO 95

MH 100/MD6 - 8 WBG W173(for E140 use WBG)

120 G10 / Y35 E215 U215

Note :


SLEEVE (aluminium)RING (elastomer)

Crimping sequence3 2

Greased

PALM(copper)

INSULATED COVER(thermo plastic)

1

OH

J138

.SKF



OHJ 139 - Aluminium Palm A.B.C. Insulated Lug

CONDUCTOR COLOUR HOLE STUD REFERENCE COMM.mm² CODE DIA. (SICAME) CODE

35 Red 13 CPTA 35 2623000

50 Yellow 13 CPTA 50 2623010

95 Grey 13 CPTA 95 2623020

120 Pink 21 CPTA 120 2623030

CONDUCTOR TOOLING EQUIVALENTmm² DIE SETS

G10 / Y35 E173 U173 UBG(for E140 use UBG)

25 TO 95

MH 100/MD6 - 8 WBG W173(for E140 use WBG)

120 G10 / Y35 E215 U215

Note :


SLEEVE (aluminium)RING (elastomer)

Crimping sequence3 2

Greased

PALM(aluminium)

INSULATED COVERthermo plastic)

1

OH

J139

.SKF



OHJ 140 – Insulation Piercing Connectors and End Caps for A.B.C.

Manufacturer Ref No. Insulation piercing connectors - ABC CommodityCode

Sicame TTD 151 F 25-95 / 6-35mm² 290322Sicame TTD 201 F 35-95 / 25-95mm² 290323

Amp-Siemel KZ-95-2NBP 50-150 / 2 x 6-35mm² (2 Service exits) 290330Sicame TTD 301 50-120 / 50-120mm² 290331Sicame NTD 3012 EF Transition connector

35-95 ABC / 7-95 Bare (Al or Cu)290347

Manufacturer Ref No. End caps - ABC CommodityCode

Push-on - 25mm² 290350Push-on - 35/50mm² 290351

Mosdorfer-CCL Push-on - 16/95mm² 290352Mosdorfer-CCL Push-on - 120mm² 290353

Raychem Tyco 102LO22-135/239

Heat Shrink – 35/120mm² (10-20mm dia) 550200

Heat Shrink End Caps for 120mm² 290353

NB This information is repeated in Vol 1, Section 6, ABC Overhead Lines ‘Fittings &Coomodity Codes’



OHJ 141 - Live Line Clamps For Aluminium And Copper Conductors

ALUMINIUMCCL GA ALC2.2

ACCEPTABLE CONDUCTORDIAMETER RANGE COMMODITY

MAIN mm TAP mm CODEMIN MAX MIN MAX

4.0 18.5 4.0 15.0 263201

COPPERCCL GA CLC2.2

ACCEPTABLE CONDUCTORDIAMETER RANGE COMMODITY

MAIN mm TAP mm CODEMIN MAX MIN MAX

4.0 18.5 4.0 15.0 263224

CURRENT RATING 800 AMPS

MUST COMPLY WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICALREQUIREMENTS OF B.S. EN61284, B..S 3288 AND E.S.I. 43.92

178 (min.)fully open

78 (min.)

OH

J141

-r.S

KF

CCL LIVE LINE CLAMP GA ALC2.2 AND CLC2.2



OHJ 142 – Bolted Anchor Clamps for ACSR

ACSR Conductor Clamp Commodity Code

30 mm2 Weasle

40 mm2 Ferret

50 mm2 Rabbit

60 mm2 Mink

75 mm2 Racoon

3 Bolt Clamp 232 595 0

100 mm2 Dog

150 mm2 Dingo

(Not to be used for 150 mm2 Wolf)

4 Bolt Clamp 232 596 0

AB

C

'U' Bolt Torque 60 Nm (45 lb/ft)Tightening Sequence B - C - A

AB

CD

'U' Bolt Torque 60 Nm (45 lb/ft)Tightening Sequence A - B - C - D



OHJ 143 – Back Plate Complete With Nuts & Washers

Commodity Code 261 793 0

OHJ 144 – Steel Block Earth Clamp E615

Commodity Code 512 261


Database Ref: 30 File Ref: Stays Fittings &Commodity Codes Feb 2001



Stays


East Midlands Electricity Stay Fittings & Commodity CodesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Stay Fittings & Commodity CodesFeb 2001.doc Page 2 of 4 Version: 2

Revision Log For Stay Fittings & Commodity Codes




Section Notes about the change5 Commodity codes for post and rail fence added




E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTIONE111 231555 Wood Stay BlockE401 235717 Stay Rod - Type 1E401 235718 Stay Rod - Type 2E402 231500 Concrete Stay Block*E403 234842 Stay Insulator Type 1E403 234843 Stay Insulator Type 2E403 235541 Stay Insulator LinkE404 231053 Single 12" Disc Screw AnchorE405 231052 Twin 12" Disc Screw AnchorE413 231054 3.0 m Standard length Anchor Rod

E413A 231055 2.0 m Anchor RodE414 231051 Turnbuckle

7/3.25mm Helical FittingsE406 235572 Pole Top Make OffE406 235511 Stay Grip (Dead Ed)E406 235581 Stay Splice

7/4.00mm Helical FittingsE406 235571 Pole Top Make OffE406 235512 Stay Grip (Dead End)E406 235582 Stay Splice

E407 232590 Stay Outrigger BracketE408 236667 Stay StrapE410 235780 Tie Rod For Strut PoleE412 231050 Screw In Ground Anchor*E412 588000 Socket Wrench*

- 239307 Stay Strand (7/3.25) - 239317 Stay Strand (7/4.00) - 235150 Staywire Markers

506453 Fence Post506447 Rail for Post and Rail Fence

* LV services only





Database Ref: 33 File Ref: Design of ABC LinesFeb 2001



Design of ABC

LV Overhead Lines

East Midlands Electricity Design Of ABC LV Overhead LinesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Design Of ABC Lines Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 12 Version 3:

Revision Log For Design Of ABC LV Overhead Lines




Section Notes about the change6 Inclusion of ref. to drawing EME LV208A in section 13.2.

Reference to COP 15 in Section 14.9Changes made in version 3

Section Notes about the change6 Text revised / clarified. Temporary Earthing changed to Operational

Earthing and content changed. Reference to ABC Network Switchincluded



CONTENTS

1. GENERAL 5

2. CARE OF XLPE INSULATION 5

3. CURRENT RATINGS 5

4. PROTECTIVE MULTIPLE EARTHING 5

5. OPERATIONAL EARTHING 6

6. MAINS 6

7. STAYING ARRANGEMENTS 6

8. CONDUCTOR TYPES AND WORKING STRESS 6

9. TENSION CLAMPS 6

9.1 Tension Clamps up to and including 95mm² ABC 6

9.2 Tension Clamps for 120mm² ABC 7

10. SUSPENSION CLAMPS AND WEAK LINKS 7

10.1 Suspension Clamps - 35mm² 2 Core 7

10.2 Suspension Clamps - 35mm² 4 core to 95mm² 7

10.3 Suspension Clamps - 120mm² 7

10.4 Weak Links 7

11. TENSION JOINTS 8

11.1 Main Line Joints 8

12. NON-TENSION JOINTS 8

12.1 ABC to ABC 8

12.2 ABC to Open Wire 8

12.3 ABC to Underground Cable 8

12.4 ABC to Pole Mounted fuses / Network Switches 9

12.5 Temporary Disconnection of ABC 9

12.6 Reconnection of ABC 9

13. SERVICES ATTACHED TO BUILDINGS 10



13.1 Wall Clamp/Bracket 10

13.2 Wall Cleat 10

13.3 Service Connections 10

13.4 ABC Service Distribution Box 10

13.5 Maximum Span Lengths for ABC Attached To Buildings 10

13.6 Conductor Erection Sags for ABC Attached To Buildings 10

13.7 Undereaves Services (Mural or Facade Wiring) 11

13.8 Hybrid Service Cable 12

13.9 Service Cut-Out Terminations ABC and Hybrid 12

14. JOINT CONSTRUCTION 12

15. ABC INSTALLED WITH OPEN WIRE OR OTHER ABC SYSTEMS 12



1. GENERAL

All LV overhead mains and services are to be designed, constructed and maintained usingAerial Bundled Conductor (ABC) in accordance with ESI Standards 43-12, 13 and 14. Thesizes available are:

2 & 4 core 35mm2 – service spans only

4 core 95mm2 . – mains and large services

Note: 25mm², 50mm², 70mm² and 120mm² are no longer standard equipment. Details ofthese superseded sizes are included for reference in grey text.

2. CARE OF XLPE INSULATION

Care shall be taken, when handling and running out the ABC to prevent damage to the XLPEinsulation at positions where the ABC may come into contact with abrasive surfaces.

3. CURRENT RATINGS

Refer to the document ‘ABC Design and Erection Tables LV Mains and Services’

4. PROTECTIVE MULTIPLE EARTHING

The system is designed for use with protective multiple earthing. See Code of Practice - E6 -Protective Multiple Earthing

All earth electrode installations shall be made using black PVC insulated 16mm² strandedcopper conductor. The connection to the ABC main shall be made by a short tail of 35mm²ABC neutral conductor using an insulation piercing connector. This is to allow for provingthe neutral dead before connecting the electrode.

Where the connection is made on a through main, the earth cable shall be tied to the mainwith a plastic cable tie 100mm minimum from the end of the insulation piercing connector(IPC).

The earth conductor shall be shrouded with PVC tubing or similar from ground level to aheight of 2.4m.



5. OPERATIONAL EARTHING

Operational earths have to be applied to LV systems in accordance with the DistributionSafety Rules during dead line working.

On ABC systems Approved operational earthing facilities shall be provided either during newconstruction or immediately prior to dead working at:

1. Pole transformers on the ABC from the feed side of the LV fuse or the first pole out.

2. Either side of system open points

3. At terminal poles

4. At sufficient additional positions such that the earths can be visually traced to thepoint of work.

6. MAINS

This Specification is in accordance with the requirements of the Electricity SupplyRegulations 1988, The Overhead Lines (Exemption) Regulations 1990 and ESI Standards 43-12, 13 and 14.

7. STAYING ARRANGEMENTS

Refer to the document ‘ABC Design and Erection Tables LV Mains and Services’ and‘Design of Stays for Overhead Lines’

8. CONDUCTOR TYPES AND WORKING STRESS


9. TENSION CLAMPS

9.1 Tension Clamps up to and including 95mm² ABC

Tension clamps with insulated inserts are to be used at all terminals, and angle poles over 60°deviation. They can also be used on angles smaller than 60° if necessary, but suspensionclamps are preferred. Light duty tension clamps must be used for services only.



9.2 Tension Clamps for 120mm² ABC

Tension clamps with insulated inserts are to be used at all terminals, and angle poles over 20°deviation. They can also be used on angles smaller than 20° if necessary, but suspensionclamps are preferred (Special heavy duty type for 120mm² ABC).

10. SUSPENSION CLAMPS AND WEAK LINKS

The ABC is suspended at intermediate poles by means of a suspension clamp. Suspensionclamps shall be attached to the pole by means of hook bolts with keeper plate.

10.1 Suspension Clamps - 35mm² 2 Core

A light duty suspension clamp with insulating inset should be used at straight line positionsand at angle poles up to 30° of line deviation.

10.2 Suspension Clamps - 35mm² 4 core to 95mm²

A heavy duty clamp with integral roller shall be used at straight line positions and at anglepoles not exceeding 60° of line deviation.

10.3 Suspension Clamps - 120mm²

A special heavy duty clamp will be used for all poles up to a 20° maximum line deviation.

10.4 Weak Links

Weak links are to be used on 35mm2 & 95mm² ABC. They are to be fitted at all suspensionpoles, unless otherwise stated, between the pole fixing bolt and suspension clamp in order toquickly release the attached fittings when a large, sudden load (e.g. falling tree) is imposed onthe ABC.

Weak links, designed to fail at a load of 7.5kN, are not to be fitted to the following:

1) Suspension angles.2) Terminal or section poles.3) At poles with underground cable connected.4) In LV spans which contain any crossing such as:

• power/telecommunication overhead lines• road, rail, river and canaland/or• in situations where fallen ABC would constitute a dangerous occurrence.



11. TENSION JOINTS

11.1 Main Line Joints

Full tension insulated mid-span compression joints may be used to connect one end of a drumof ABC to another to avoid unwanted off-cuts. Only one joint per phase, per section, ispermitted. (See the document ‘Jointing One Drum of ABC to Another’.)

12. NON-TENSION JOINTS

12.1 ABC to ABC

All branch joints for ABC to ABC shall be made using - Insulation Piercing Connectors(IPCs).

Normally these are single take-off but multiple take offs (two or more) are available.

Connections using IPC, in particular on the neutral conductor, must be limited to a maximumof three per pole. Service connections of more than 3 per pole should be made using the ABCDistribution Box.

Insulation piercing connectors shall be applied over the insulation of the conductor andtightened using the appropriate spanner or torque wrench.

Note:

IPCs are not to be used for making or breaking load. The application of IPCs in on-loadand post-fault conditions is forbidden.

12.2 ABC to Open Wire

ABC to Open Wire (Copper & Aluminium) – use transition insulation piercing connectors toconnector the ABC jumper to the bare conductor.

12.3 ABC to Underground Cable

ABC to underground cable - use ABC to CNE compression connectors OHJ71 to extend thecables cores with ABC conductor. The ABC tails shall then be connected to the ABC lineusing IPCs.

Underground cables shall not be jointed directly onto tensioned ABC lines.



12.4 ABC to Pole Mounted fuses / Network Switches

Use OHJ138 - Copper Palm ABC Insulated Terminal Lug to connect an ABC jumper into400 amp LV pole mounted fuses.

The 245 amp ABC Network Switch is equipped with integral insulation piecing connectorsthat accept ABC directly.

12.5 Temporary Disconnection of ABC

Temporary disconnection of a branch or cable by removal and subsequent replacement of thesame IPC onto the same part of the ABC conductor is not permissible. A new IPC must beapplied to an undamaged section of conductor.

Where an IPC has been removed the penetrations of the core insulation must be degreasedand sealed with a self amalgamating tape, to prevent the ingress of moisture into theconductor strands.

The recommended method of temporary disconnection is to cut the ABC jumper and insulatethe cut ends with push-on cable caps. Re-connect by one of the methods shown below.

12.6 Reconnection of ABC

IPCs are not to be used for making or breaking load. The application of IPCs in on-load andpost-fault conditions is forbidden.

Where a branch or cable must be re-connected there are three alternatives:

1. Remove the load from the branch or cable and connect to a live ABC main underno-load.

2. Make the ABC main dead and re-connect the branch or cable whilst dead.

3. Install a set of 400 amp ‘J’ type pole mounted fuses or 245 amp ‘N’ type ABCNetwork Switch.

NOTE

Pole mounted fuses and ABC Network Switches shall not normally be installed on new ABCsystems or network extensions where the new system can be energised under no-load. Theyare to be used only at:

Pole mounted transformers - main protection (400 amp ‘J’ type only)

LV open points intended for back feeding (400 amp ‘J’ type or 245 amp ‘N’ type)

Re-connections points after disconnecting cables or ABC branches after for fault, damage,diversion etc.



13. SERVICES ATTACHED TO BUILDINGS

Two-core and four-core services shall be terminated between the service pole and buildingusing tension clamps. For pole fixing use the coach screw hook and Rawlbolt hook anchor.The wall clamp/bracket can be used for spans up to 10 metres.

13.1 Wall Clamp/Bracket

This is used to cleat the ABC to the wall and to take small overhead spans (maximum 10m)and deviation angles (20° maximum) up to 95mm² four core.

13.2 Wall Cleat

A PVC cleat designed and tested to take all sizes of 2 core and 4 core ABC bundles. Threesizes of stand-off are available, 10, 50 and 100mm.

13.3 Service Connections

Insulation piercing connectors shall be used for single phase services up to, and including,three per pole. Two single phase services may be taken from one insulating piercingconnector where the design allows this.

13.4 ABC Service Distribution Box

The box is used to distribute four to six ABC services from a service pole. Either fixing strapsor coach bolts are to be used to fix the box to the pole. A four-core 95mm² ABC supply isrequired and together with all service cables, is to be led into the box through the softmaterial in its base. The box is weatherproof and it is important to make sure the front cover,which has a safety sign affixed to it, is securely fastened. Connections may be made (withcare) with the box live.

13.5 Maximum Span Lengths for ABC Attached To Buildings


13.6 Conductor Erection Sags for ABC Attached To Buildings




13.7 Undereaves Services (Mural or Facade Wiring)

The ABC shall be attached to the building by means of insulated stand-off wall cleats spacedat intervals not exceeding 1m. Cleats shall provide a spacing of not less than 10mm betweenthe surface of the building and the insulation of the bundle. When spanning from one buildingto another, either wall mounted cable clamp brackets (maximum deviation 20°) or suspensionclamps (maximum deviation 40°) can be used for spans up to 10m.

For spans greater than 10m or deviations greater than 40° tension fittings shall be used.

If attaching ABC to a building using a tension clamp, the clamp shall be attached using eithera corner bracket, face wall bracket, Rawlbolt hook anchor (building) and coach screw hook(pole) as appropriate. The maximum tension on buildings is limited to 1.3kN.

The route of the ABC two-core or four-core main should be best sited to suit each situationbut ideally, should be tucked away into the eaves. Single core services can be connected tothis main in the ways indicated in this section. For example, it would be preferable on outsidemeter boxes to take the ABC direct into the cut-out using PVC conduit. Services to indoorpositions could either be undertaken using either ABC or hybrid cable, taking care to protectthe cable through the wall and inside the property as specified. Additional mechanicalprotection is illustrated on drawing Numbers EME LV219 and LV220. Routes of ABCfacade wiring are to be designed and laid out accordingly to site conditions and customerpreferences. Typical layouts for multiple and single connections are indicated on drawings inthis document, the document ‘Overhead Line Services’ and the Service Survey Manual.

NOTE

1. All service cables less than 2.4m from external ground level (1.8m internal)will require conduit protection as follows:

a. ABC service: Suitable flexible PVC conduit to the cut-out.

b. ABC service to meter cubicle: Suitable solid PVC conduit to meter box.

c. ABC or hybrid service: Suitable solid PVC conduit externally andflexible PVC conduit internally.

2. For hybrid to ABC, or ABC to ABC connections, use insulation piercingconnectors, or a combination of IPCs and insulated compression splice.



13.8 Hybrid Service Cable

House service mural (undereaves) wiring may be undertaken with PVC or XLPE insulatedsolid aluminium phase, copper concentric neutral ‘Hybrid’ cable if preferred.

The use of Hybrid Service Cable is limited to underground mains or surface wiring and isNOT to be used as an aerial cable.

To prevent the ingress of moisture into the cable and ultra violet light damage to the phaseinsulation, a heat shrink or cold shrink cable termination must be applied to the break-out ofthe cable at the pole. (See the relevant document in ‘LV Cable Jointing Code of Practice No.15’).

13.8.1 Surface Wiring

Hybrid cable may be used as an alternative to ABC for service droppers from undereavesABC wiring into cut-outs and should be mounted using standard cleats of appropriate size at500mm spacing. Where existing facade wiring shows deterioration of insulation specified inThe Electricity Supply Regulations 1988, it must be replaced as soon as possible using eitherABC or Hybrid Cable.

13.9 Service Cut-Out Terminations ABC and Hybrid

Service cut-outs shall have serrated terminals for the phase core. Where this cable is beingused for service renewals, cut-outs not of this type are to be changed. Where ABC andHybrid Cable enter into properties they must be protected with PVC conduit for a length of2.4m (outside) and 1.8m (inside) above ground level and also through the wall.

14. JOINT CONSTRUCTION

Details for Joint Construction (11kV and LV ABC on the same support) are given in thedocument ‘Design of Single Circuit Overhead Lines On Wood Poles’.

15. ABC INSTALLED WITH OPEN WIRE OR OTHER ABC SYSTEMS

Refer to the document ‘ABC Double Circuit’.


Database Ref: 32 File Ref: Design & Erection TablesFeb 2001



ABC Design and Erection Tables

LV Mains and Services

East Midlands Electricity ABC Design and Erection Tables LV Mains and ServicesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Design & Erection Tables Feb2001.doc Page 2 of 22 Version: 2

Revision Log For ABC Design & Erection Tables LV Mains &Services




Section Notes about the change6 All sizes except 2&4 / 35 & 4/95 moved to ‘Supereced’ section

Tables simplifed and clarified



CONTENTS

1. CURRENT RATINGS 5

1.1 2-Core & 4-Core ABC Data and Ratings 5

2. CONDUCTOR TYPES AND WORKING STRESS 6

2.1 Conductor Types and Working Stress 6

3. CLEARANCES 7

3.1 Minimum Clearance of ABC to Ground Level 7

3.2 Clearance of ABC to Buildings and Structures 8

3.3 Trees 8

4. ABC MAIN on WOOD POLES 9

4.1 Erection chart for 4 Core 95mm² ABC on Wood Poles 9

5. ABC ATTACHED TO BUILDINGS 10

5.1 Maximum Span Lengths for ABC Attached to Buildings 10

5.2 Erection Chart for ABC Attached to Buildings 10

6. SUPPORTS 11

6.1 Pole Sizes (ABC up to 4 core 95mm2 ) 11

6.2 Pole Hole Excavation Depths 11

6.3 ABC 4 Core Loadings And Fixings - Terminal Poles 12

6.4 ABC 4 Core Fixings - Through and Angle Poles 12

7. STAYS 13

7.1 Stays for Angle and Terminal Poles. 13

8. LV FUSE TAILS AT POLE TRANSFORMERS 14

8.1 Sizes of Pole Transformers LV Fuse Tails 14

9. SUPERSEDED ABC TABLES 15

9.1 Design and Erection Tables for 2 & 4 Core 25mm² ABC 15






9.5 Design and Erection Tables for 4 Core 120mm² ABC 19

9.6 Maximum Size of Poles - Superseded Table 20



1. CURRENT RATINGS

1.1 2-Core & 4-Core ABC Data and Ratings

Nominal area of Cond: - mm² 25 35 50 70 95 120d.c resistance at 20°C ohm/km 1.200 0.868 0.641 0.443 0.320 0.253Conductor diameter, mm 5.6 6.6 7.7 9.3 11.0 12.95Insulation thickness, mm 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.7 1.7Core diameter, mm 8.2 9.2 10.7 12.3 14.4 17.22-core ABC Current-carrying capacityAt pole top, Amperes 119 144 173 216 264 N/AUnder eaves, Amperes 109 133 163 207 257 N/A4-core ABC Current-carrying capacityAt pole top, Amperes 99 120 144 180 228 300Under eaves, Amperes 92 114 140 180 191 270

The revised ratings contained in ERA Report 90/0386 dated July 1990 assume a maximumconductor temperature of 75°C, ambient temperature of 25°C, a wind speed of 0.5m/s andsolar radiation having an intensity of 1 kW/m². The thermal resistivity of the insulation hasbeen taken as 3.5K.m/W.

Note: 25mm², 50mm², 70mm² and 120mm² are no longer standard equipment. Details ofsuperseded sizes are included for reference.



2. CONDUCTOR TYPES AND WORKING STRESS

In the preparation of sag/tension tables a basic span length of 50 metres has been adopted andthe following maximum working stresses have been selected. For service lines refer toSections 15 and 16 of this document.

2.1 Conductor Types and Working Stress

Conductor Max. Wkg. Stress FOS2 x 25mm² 25 N/mm² 3.372 x 35mm² 25 N/mm² 4.202 x 50mm² 34 N/mm² 4.172 x 70mm² 29 N/mm² 4.872 x 95mm² 25 N/mm² 5.404 x 25mm² 30 N/mm² 3.644 x 35mm² 30 N/mm² 4.104 x 50mm² 40 N/mm² 4.174 x 70mm² 35 N/mm² 4.874 x 95mm² 30 N/mm² 5.404 x 120mm² 31 N/mm² 5.40

The likely maximum temperature of the conductor is taken to be 75°C.

Note:25mm², 50mm², 70mm² and 120mm² are no longer standard equipment. Details ofsuperseded sizes are included for reference.



3. CLEARANCES

3.1 Minimum Clearance of ABC to Ground Level

Where the ABC is erected as an aerial system supported on poles the minimum clearance toground level shall be as follows:

GROUND TYPE MINIMUMCLEARANCE

Roadways 5.8mAlong the line of fences, boundary walls,hedgerows and similar situations 4.0mAll other situations 5.2m

Where the ABC is installed as an undereaves system attached to the surface of buildings theminimum clearances to ground level between buildings shall be as follows:

GROUND TYPE MINIMUMCLEARANCE

Between domestic properties not accessible tovehicles

3.5m.

It should be noted that the clearances given above are minimum design clearances. Whenestablishing actual clearances account should be taken of, the use of the land, vegetationgrowth, the possibility of vehicular access under or close to the line and future maintenancerequirements of adjacent structures.



3.2 Clearance of ABC to Buildings and Structures

The minimum vertical clearance to any surfaceof a building or structure, on which a personmay stand and which is accessible to the publicwithout access equipment,

shall be 3.0m

The minimum horizontal clearance to anysurface described above, shall be

1.0m(assumed to be in still

air)

The minimum horizontal and vertical clearanceto a building or structure not normallyaccessible to the public to which the cablesystem is not attached

shall be not lessthan

500mmunder deflected cable

conditions

The horizontal and vertical clearance betweena cable system and any free standing apparatusto which the cable is not attached (e.g. streetlighting columns, traffic signs or BritishTelecom supports etc.)

shall be not lessthan

300mmin the deflected

condition

3.3 Trees

The use of the cable system through trees is permissible and can provide considerable benefitswhen compared with open wire systems. The construction should take into account potentialdangers of abrasion and unauthorised access.

As a guide all branches with a diameter equal, or larger than, the diameter of the ABC bundleif in contact should be removed.

If required, a tubular tree guard may be fitted to protect the ABC bundle where the completeremoval of the branch is not possible.

Weak Links shall be fitted to all intermediate poles, especially where ABC passes throughtrees, except in the following situations:

1) Suspension angles.2) Terminal or section poles.3) At poles with underground cable connected.4) In LV spans which contain any crossing such as:

• power/telecommunication overhead lines• road, rail, river and canaland/or• in situations where fallen ABC would constitute a dangerous occurrence.



4. ABC MAIN on WOOD POLES

Only 4 core 95mm² ABC shall be used as mains

Basic Span 50m – Maximum Span 90m – Maximum Wind Span 70m

Not for use between pole and building or between buildings

4.1 Erection chart for 4 Core 95mm² ABC on Wood Poles

TEMP SAG (m) FOR SPAN LENGTH (m)°C 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 900 0.45 0.57 0.70 0.85 1.01 1.18 1.37 1.57 1.79 2.02 2.275 0.49 0.62 0.76 0.92 1.09 1.28 1.49 1.71 1.94 2.20 2.4610 0.52 0.66 0.82 0.99 1.18 1.38 1.60 1.84 2.09 2.36 2.6515 0.56 0.71 0.87 1.06 1.26 1.48 1.71 1.96 2.23 2.52 2.8320 0.59 0.75 0.93 1.12 1.33 1.57 1.82 2.08 2.37 2.68 3.0025 0.63 0.79 0.98 1.18 1.41 1.65 1.92 2.20 2.50 2.83 3.1730 0.66 0.83 1.03 1.24 1.48 1.74 2.01 2.31 2.63 2.97 3.33

Temperature/Tension Data 4 Core 95mm² ABC

TEMP °C 0 5 10 15 20 25 30TWO CORE BUNDLE TENSION (kN) 2.85 2.62 2.43 2.28 2.15 2.03 1.94FOUR CORE BUNDLE TENSION (kN) 5.70 5.25 4.87 4.56 4.30 4.07 3.88

Technical Data 4 Core 95mm² ABC

Ultimate tensile strength of Aluminium 170 N/mm² of nominal CSAModulus of Elasticity (Linear) 'E' 5600 hbarCoefficient of linear expansion 23 x 10-6 per deg CWind Pressure 380 N/m.sqBundle Diameter 39.00mmTension under Design Loadings 11.34kNRatio of UTS to Design Load 5.40Mass 1.30 kg/mIce Loaded Mass 2.19 kg/mWind Load on Iced ABC 1.88 kg/m



5. ABC ATTACHED TO BUILDINGS

Use these tables for:

2 & 4 core 35mm² ABC used as overhead domestic premises

2 & 4 core 35mm² ABC used as commercial/industrial services up to a 70 kVA

4 core 95mm² ABC used as overhead commercial/industrial services up to 130 kVA

4 core 95mm² ABC used as undereaves mains along rows of houses.

5.1 Maximum Span Lengths for ABC Attached to Buildings

MAXIMUMTYPE OF SPAN SPAN

LENGTHBetween Pole and Building using Tension Clamps 30mBetween Buildings using Tension Clamps 30mBetween Buildings using Wall Mounting Brackets 10m

5.2 Erection Chart for ABC Attached to Buildings

The minimum sags for ABC attached to buildings shall be in accordance with the following:

Span Length 2 & 4 Core 35 mm2 ABC(for max tension of 1.3 kN)

4 Core 95 mm2 ABC(for max tension of 1.3 kN)

Metres Sag m Sag m10.0 0.17 0.2712.5 0.26 0.4315.0 0.37 0.6117.5 0.51 0.8320.0 0.67 1.0922.5 0.84 1.3825.0 1.04 1.7027.5 1.26 2.06

30.0 (Max) 1.50 2.45



6. SUPPORTS

6.1 Pole Sizes (ABC up to 4 core 95mm2 )

The minimum class of poles to be used shall be in accordance with the following:

Class of pole for lengthLine Deviation 8m 9m 10m 11m 12m 13m 14m 15mIntermediate M M M M M M M MUp to 10° M M M M M M M MUp to 20° M M M M M M M MUp to 30° M M M M M M M MUp to 40° M M M M M M S SUp to 50° M M M M S S S SUp to 60° / Terminal M M M S S S S SUp to 70° M S S S S S S SUp to 80° S S S S S S S SUp to 90° S S S S S S S S

These pole classes are based on:Maximum wind loading spans for intermediate poles of 70m.Minimum stay angle of 30° to the vertical.4.75mm of radial ice and wind loading of 380 N/m2

Planting depth by Hand/ Machine Excavation

6.2 Pole Hole Excavation Depths

POLE HOLE EXCAVATION DEPTHS IN metresPOLE LENGTH m AUGER EXC: HAND/MACHINE EXC:

UP TO 11.0m 2.4 1.611.5m TO 12.0m 2.4 1.813.0m TO 15.0m 2.4 2.116.0m TO 18.0m 2.4 2.4

18.0m PLUS N/A 3.0



6.3 ABC 4 Core Loadings And Fixings - Terminal Poles

ABC Attachment Loads In kNSize For Fixingmm² Terminal Poles Type25 3.6935 4.16 16mm Hook Bolt50 7.4170 9.1895 11.51 20mm Eye Bolt120 14.70

6.4 ABC 4 Core Fixings - Through and Angle Poles

ABC Sizemm2

Attachment Type For Line Deviation (Degrees)

0° to 30° 30° to 60°25 16mm Hook Bolt 16mm Hook Bolt35 16mm Hook Bolt 16mm Hook Bolt50 16mm Hook Bolt 20mm Eye Bolt only70 16mm Hook Bolt 20mm Eye Bolt only95 16mm Hook Bolt or 20mm Eye Bolt 20mm Eye Bolt only120 20mm Eye Bolt only 20mm Eye Bolt only

NOTES:

25mm², 50mm², 70mm² and 120mm² are no longer standard equipment. Details ofsuperseded sizes are included for reference.

The loadings scheduled are resultant values derived from vertical and horizontal forces,using a wind span of 70 metres.

For two core bundles use the equivalent four core size.

For two core 25mm² or 35mm² service spans use 14mm coach screw hook or Rawlbolthook anchor as appropriate.



7. STAYS

Stay assemblies shall be in accordance with ESI Standard 43-91.

The number and type of stays required are shown below

7.1 Stays for Angle and Terminal Poles.

Line Deviation Stays Required45° Stay angle 30° Stay angle

0° to 30° 1 - 7/3.25mm 1 - 7/3.25mm30° to 60°, Terminal or Tee off 1 - 7/3.25mm 2 - 7/3.25mmUp to 95 mm2

60° to 90° 1 - 7/4.00mm 2 - 7/4.00mm20° to 60°, Terminal or Tee off 2 - 7/3.25mm 3 - 7/3.25mm120 mm2 ABC

0° to 20° 1 - 7/4.00mm 2 - 7/4.00mm

All Stays Grade 1150,

Recommended Stay Angle 45°

Min: Stay Angle 30°

Stay insulators are not required in stays associated with fully insulated ABC systems, butinsulators are required where the support includes:-

- open wire mains, bare or insulated

- open wire services

- earthed equipment at the pole top or a bare earth electrode conductor

- ABC - open wire transition points



8. LV FUSE TAILS AT POLE TRANSFORMERS

8.1 Sizes of Pole Transformers LV Fuse Tails

The following cables shall be used between the transformer LV bushings and the polemounted fuses.

Transformer Rating LV Tails Size (minimum)5 kVA 1Ø 2 X 95mm² ABC15 kVA 1Ø 2 X 95mm² ABC25 kVA 1Ø 2 X 95mm² ABC50 kVA 1Ø 4 X 95mm² ABC (cores 2&3 left disconnected)25 kVA 3Ø 4 X 95mm² ABC50 kVA 3Ø 4 X 95mm² ABC100 kVA 3Ø 4.X 95mm² ABC200 kVA 3Ø 4 X 120mm² Cu PVC/PVC315 kVA 3Ø 7 X 120mm² Cu PVC/PVC

Non standard plant shown in grey – included for existing installations



SUPERCEDED

SUPERCEDED

SUPERCEDED

9. SUPERSEDED ABC TABLES

9.1 Design and Erection Tables for 2 & 4 Core 25mm² ABC

Note: Not in current use. Details included for completeness.

TABLE 4.1. Basic And Maximum Spans 70 Metres - Sag Span Data 2 & 4 Core25mm² ABC


TABLE 4.2. Temperature/Tension Data 2 & 4 Core 25mm² ABC


TABLE 4.3. Constants 2 & 4 Core 25mm² ABC

Ultimate tensile strength of Aluminium 170 N/mm² of nominal CSAModulus of Elasticity (Linear) 'E' 5900 hbarCoefficient of linear expansion 23 x 10-6 per deg CWind Pressure 380 N/m.sq

TABLE 4.4 Variables 2 & 4 Core 25mm² ABC

2 CORE BUNDLE 4 CORE BUNDLEABC Cable size mm² 25 25Bundle Diameter (mm) 9.40 23.50Tension under Design Loadings (kN) 2.40 3.64Ratio of UTS to Design Load 3.37 4.48Mass (kg/m) 0.20 0.40Ice Loaded Mass (kg/m) 0.50 0.89Wind Load on Iced ABC (kg/m) 0.93 1.28




SUPERCEDED

SUPERCEDED

SUPERCEDED


Basic Span 70m – Maximum Span 70m – Maximum Wind Span 70m


TABLE 5.1. MAIN LINES - Sag Span Data 2 & 4 Core 35mm² ABC




TABLE 5.3. Constants 2 & 4 Core 35mm² ABC

Ultimate tensile strength of Aluminium 170 N/mm² of nominal CSAModulus of Elasticity (Linear) 'E' 5900 hbarCoefficient of linear expansion 23 x 10-6 per deg CWind Pressure 380 N/m.sq

TABLE 5.4. Variables 2 & 4 Core 35mm² ABC

2 Core Bundle 4 Core BundleABC Cable size mm² 35 35Bundle Diameter (mm) 21.40 25.90Tension under Design Loadings (kN) 2.67 4.10Ratio of UTS to Design Load 4.20 5.46Mass (kg/m) 0.26 0.52Ice Loaded Mass (kg/m) 0.59 1.06Wind Load on Iced ABC (kg/m) 0.99 1.37




SUPERCEDED

SUPERCEDED


TABLE 6.1. Main Lines - Basic Spans 50 Metres - Sag Span Data 2 & 4 Core50mm² ABC




TABLE 6.3. Technical Data 4 Core 50mm² ABC

Ultimate tensile strength of Aluminium 170 N/mm² of nominal CSAModulus of Elasticity (Linear) 'E' 5600 hbarCoefficient of linear expansion 23 x 10-6 per deg CWind Pressure 380 N/m. sqBundle Diameter 29.50mmTension under Design Loadings 7.29kNRatio of UTS to Design Load 4.17Mass 0.70 kg/mIce Loaded Mass 1.33 kg/mWind Load on Iced ABC 1.51 kg/m

(Technical Data for 2 core 50mm² not available)




SUPERCEDED

SUPERCEDED


Note: Not in current use. Details included for completeness.

TABLE 7.1. Main Lines - Basic Spans 50 Metres - Sag Span Data 2 & 4 Core70mm² ABC





Ultimate tensile strength of Aluminium 170 N/mm² of nominal CSAModulus of Elasticity (Linear) 'E' 5600 hbarCoefficient of linear expansion 23 x 10-6 per deg CWind Pressure 380 N/m.sqBundle Diameter 33.40mmTension under Design Loadings 9.04kNRatio of UTS to Design Load 4.87Mass 0.96 kg/mIce Loaded Mass 1.70 kg/mWind Load on Iced ABC 1.66 kg/m

(Technical Data for two core 70mm² not available)




SUPERCEDED

SUPERCEDED

9.5 Design and Erection Tables for 4 Core 120mm² ABC

TABLE 9.1. Main Lines - Basic Spans 50 Metres - Sag Span Data 4 Core120mm² ABC


TABLE 9.2. Temperature/Tension Data 4 Core 120mm² ABC

TEMP °C 0 5 10 15 20 25 30FOUR CORE BUNDLE TENSION (kN) 5.70 5.25 4.87 4.56 4.30 4.07 3.88


Ult: tensile strength of Aluminium 170 N/mm² of nominal CSAModulus of Elasticity (Linear) 'E' 6000 hbarCoefficient of linear expansion 23 x 10-6 per deg CWind Pressure 380 N/m.sqBundle Diameter 42.00mmTension under Design Loadings 14.70kNRatio of UTS to Design Load 5.40Mass 1.55 kg/mIce Loaded Mass 2.44 kg/mWind Load on Iced ABC 2.13 kg/m




SUPERCEDED

SUPERCEDED

9.6 Maximum Size of Poles - Superseded Table

The maximum size of poles (in metres) to be used shall be in accordance with the following:

TABLE 10.1. Supports Maximum Size of Poles

UP TO AND INC: 95mm² ABC 120mm² ABCLINE MEDIUM MEDIUM STOUT

DEVIATION: TO BS1990 TO BS1990 TO BS1990In Line 15 14 15Up to 10° 15 13 15Up to 20° 15 13 15Up to 30° 15 12 15Up to 40° 13 10 15Up to 50° 11.5 9 15Up to 60°/Term: 10.5 8.5 13Up to 70° 9.5 N.A. 11Up to 80° 8.5 N.A. 8.5Up to 90° * N.A. **Above 15m or in excess of 80° line deviation, use:-* Stout Poles, ** Extra Stout PolesThese values are based on a minimum stay angle of 30° to the vertical and cover allconductor sizes.

TABLE 11.2. Intermediate Unstayed Windspan/Pole Selection Table for 4 Core120mm² ABC (FOS 2.5)

Pole Length Wind Span Lengths (m)(m) 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90

up to 9.0 Medium Class Poles Stout Class9.5 to12.0 Poles



SUPERCEDED

TABLE 12.2. SUPERCEDED ABC 4 Core Loadings and Fixings - Through andAngle Poles

CABLE Attachment Loads in kNSIZE For Line Deviation (Degrees) -

Use 16mm Hook Bolt and Keeper Platemm² 60° 45° 30° 20° 15° 0°25 4.25 3.46 2.61 - 1.76 1.0235 4.77 3.87 2.92 - 1.96 1.1450 8.35 6.74 5.04 - 3.36 1.9470 10.24 8.23 6.14 - 4.06 2.3695 12.73 10.21 7.59 - 4.99 2.93120 - - - 7.5 - -





Database Ref: 31 File Ref: ABC Double Circuit Feb2001



ABC Double Circuit

East Midlands Electricity ABC Double CircuitOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: ABC Double Circuit Feb.doc Page 2 of 8 Version: 2

Revision Log For ABC Double Circuit




Section Notes about the change6 Joint ABC – 11kV construction added



CONTENTS

1. ABC Installed With Other Systems 4

1.1 Replacement of Open Wire Systems with ABC 4

1.2 ABC - Dual Construction 6

1.3 ABC Joint Construction (11kv And LV ABC) 7



1. ABC Installed With Other Systems

There are instances when ABC needs to be strung on the same poles as existing open wireHV or LV conductors or on the same poles as another ABC bundle for permanent dualconstruction.

All open wire or ABC LV systems are designed with only one overhead main carried onsupports which are able to withstand inclement weather conditions. e.g. combination of wetsnow accretion and wind.

The following notes and illustrations provide some guidance on the designing, planning andexecution of these additional requirements.

1.1 Replacement of Open Wire Systems with ABC

Providing the following notes are adhered to, it is acceptable to install the ABC on theexisting supports before removing the open wire main (as illustrated in Figure 1.).

1. The two systems must only be up together for a short period of time.2. Weather conditions must be reasonable, with little or no wind and no snow storms

forecast. Winter working would be particularly vulnerable if the air temperatures wereless than 5°C.

3. Prior to work commencing, - check: all poles for decay (including 0.3m below groundlevel) the condition of stays.

4. String the ABC on the opposite pole face at, or lower, than the level of the Neutralconductor of the open wire system without infringing minimum ABC groundclearances.

5. Secure the ABC at all the terminal and suspension points and then make it live.6. Transfer the services, one at a time, from the open wire to the ABC main.7. When all the services are transferred to the ABC, disconnect the open wire conductors

and remove from the supports. Trim pole heights to suit and fit a pole cap.

NOTE

Use all-insulated equipment, ropes, cable stockings etc.



FIG.1. REPLACEMENT OF OPEN WIRE WITH ABC

WINCH

DURING STRINGING

DRUM

OPEN WIRE

ABC

FINAL ARRANGEMENTWITH POLE CAP

OPEN WIRE

ABC BEING STRUNG

OVERHEAD SERVICES

REPOWABC



1.2 ABC - Dual Construction

Where load demands require conductor sizes greater than one 4 core 95mm² bundle of ABC,special arrangements have to be made, e.g. an underground main and/or parallel LV mainsusing separate routes.

Very occasionally it is necessary to erect two bundles of ABC on the same structure to solveWayleave problems.

Running two ABC circuits substantially increases the loading on poles and stays. ConsultNetwork Performance & Standards for guidance before committing to double circuitconstruction so that a proper design study can be carried out to provide an economical designfor the particular location.

NOTE

The two supplies are not to be electrically paralleled except for bonding of neutrals andcommon PMEs.

ABC BEING STRUNG

DRUM

ABC STRUNG

2 X ABC

WINCH

ABC-DCON



1.3 ABC Joint Construction (11kv And LV ABC)

Very occasionally it is necessary to erect ABC under an 11kV line to solve Wayleaveproblems.

Running the ABC circuit substantially increases the loading on poles and stays. ConsultNetwork Performance & Standards for guidance before committing to double circuitconstruction so that a proper design study can be carried out to provide an economical designfor the particular location.

NOTES

• No bonding is required between 11kV/LV steelwork and ground.

• Stay insulators are required in accordance with instructions given in the OHL ManualVolume 1, Section 10 “Design of Stays”.

• Maintenance of the 11kV line should be restricted to dead line working.

• Work on the LV ABC system may be undertaken with the 11kV line live provided thatthe steelwork has been electrically checked before commencing.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION (11kV & LV ABC)

APPROVED BYCHECKED BY

DRAWN BYTRACED BY

A

DHAUG 98

'RED BAND' NOWSAFETY CLEARANCEMARKER

EAST MIDLANDS ELECTRICITY

N.T.S.

A031Scale

JULY 94JULY 91JULY 91

MAY 91 Class-AEDCADBADB

LV ABC

508E

SAFETYCLEARANCEMARKER0.5m

1.1 m

INTERMEDIATE POLE SHOWN FOR CLARITY

BD.H.

NOV 99

REDRAWN





Database Ref: 35 File Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 6 -ABC Fittings & Commodity CodesJan 2002



ABC Overhead Lines

Fittings and Commodity Codes

East Midlands Electricity ABC Overhead Lines Fittings & Commodity CodesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Fittings & Commodity Codes Jan2002.doc Page 2 of 7 Version: 3

Revision Log For ABC Overhead Lines Fittings & CommodityCodes





Changes made in version 3 Jan 02Section Notes about the change

6 ABC end caps – range taking caps introduced - some commoditycodes deletedCCL code number included for roller suspension clamps and tensionclamps – range taking of tension clamps changed




ITEM DESCRIPTION C.C. NUMBER

A Hook bolt and other HooksHook bolt with keeper plate 290841Coach screw hook M14 234715Rawlbolt hook anchor 234691

B Eye bolt, Eye nutEye bolt 232059Eye nut 235300

C Suspension Clamps

Roller Suspension clamp HEAVY DUTY - 4 x 25mm² to120mm² (CCL No. 5170.04)

290231

Suspension clamp, HEAVY DUTY- 4 x 120 290233

Suspension Clamps With Insulated InsertsSuspension clamp, LIGHT DUTY (0-30° Deviation) 2902352 x 25/35mm² Rubber insert for LIGHT DUTY clamp 290252

D Tension clamps - ABC 2 x 25/35mm² 290273- 2 x 50mm² 290274- 2 Core, 2 Groove Anchor Clamp 290275- 2 x 70 Anchor Clamp 290276- 2 x 95 Anchor Clamp 290276 4 x 25/35/50mm² (CCL No. 211100) 290270 4 x 50/95mm² (CCL No. 211328) 290271

- 4 x 120mm² 290272




E Insulation piercing connectors - ABCFrom OHL Manual Vol 1 Section 5 ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ OHJ 140

25-95 / 6-35mm² 29032235-95 / 25-95mm² 29032350-150 / 2 x 6-35mm² (2 Service exits) 29033050-120 / 50-120mm² 290331Transition connector 35-95 ABC / 7-95 Bare (Al or Cu) 290347

F Push on end caps - ABCFrom OHL Manual Vol 1 Section 5 ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ OHJ 140

Push-on - 16/95mm² 290352Push-on - 120mm² 290353

G Heat Shrink End CapsFrom OHL Manual Vol 1 Section 5 ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ OHJ 140

Heat Shrink – 35/120mm² (10-20mm dia) 550200

H Plastic cable tiesPlastic cable ties 290890

I Plastic Cable Saddles- 1 x 25mm² cable (13.5mm dia) 232703- 1 x 35mm² cable (14.25mm dia) 232706- 2 x 25/35mm² cable (13.5mm dia) 232737

J Compression Fittings for PME EarthsFrom OHL Manual Vol 1 Section 5 ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ OHJ 72

OHJ 72 Bi-Metal Splice – PME Earth - 35mm ABC to 16mmCopper

262 110



ITEM DESCRIPTION C.C. NUMBERK Compression Joint For CNE Wavecon Cable To ABC

From OHL Manual Vol 1 Section 5 ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ OHJ 71

35 Hybrid to 35 ABC Phase 262 10235 Hybrid to 35 ABC Neutral 262 11095 Wavecon to 95/120 ABC Phase 541 52095 Wavecon to 95/120 ABC Neutral 541 522185 Wavecon to 95/120 ABC Phase 541 516185 Wavecon to 95/120 ABC Neutral 541 523300 Wavecon to 95/120 ABC Phase 541 521300 Wavecon to 95/120 ABC Neutral 541 523

Tension & Non - Tension A.B.C. Insulated JointFrom OHL Manual Vol 1 Section 5 ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ OHJ 136/7(NB – main sizes only shown – see OHJ136/7 for full range)120 ABC to 120 ABC Tension Joint (pink/pink) 262 00495 ABC to 95 ABC Tension Joint (grey/grey) 262 00395 ABC to 70 ABC Non-tension Joint (grey/white) 262 00895 ABC to 50 ABC Non-tension Joint (grey/yellow) 262 00795 ABC to 35 ABC Non-tension Joint (grey/red) 262 00635 ABC to 35 ABC Tension Joint (red/red) 262 00135 ABC to 25 ABC Non-tension Joint (red/orange) 262 100

A.B.C.Insulated Lugs – Copper PalmFrom OHL Manual Vol 1 Section 5 ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ OHJ 138

120 ABC Lug (pink) 262 20395 ABC Lug (grey) 262 20270 ABC Lug (white) N/A50 ABC Lug (yellow) 262 20135 ABC Lug (red) 262 200

A.B.C.Insulated Lugs – Aluminium PalmFrom OHL Manual Vol 1 Section 5 ‘Overhead Line Jointing Charts’ OHJ 139

120 ABC Lug (pink) 262 30395 ABC Lug (grey) 262 30270 ABC Lug (white) N/A50 ABC Lug (yellow) 262 30135 ABC Lug (red) 262 300



ITEM DESCRIPTION C.C. NUMBERL Wall clamp/bracket

Wall clamp/bracket 290 230

M Plastic Cable Cleats for ABC- 10mm Stand-Off 290290- 50mm Stand-Off 290289- 100mm Stand Off 290291- Cable tie cradle 232705- Black Nylon Cable Tie 290890

O Weak LinkWeak Link 7.5kN Rating 290360

GeneralPole Caps - 6.5" Dia 222505Pole Caps - 7.5" Dia 222510Pole Caps - 8.5" Dia 222515

Conduit Saddles 32mm 232742Conduit Saddles 38mm 232744Conduit Saddles 42mm 232746

- 32mm Flexible Conduit 290950- 40mm Flexible Conduit 290951- 42mm Split Flexible Conduit 290955- 32mm Black Rigid PVC Conduit 534073- 32mm Black Rigid PVC Conduit Bends 534084

Wedge Tap Shrouds (small) 266201Wedge Tap Shrouds (medium) 266202

ABC offset bracket (E333) 290200ABC corner wall bracket 290201ABC corner bracket 290202ABC face wall bracket 290203

ABC Services Distribution Box 290860ABC Network Switch 250 amp 147953




Heat Shrink Tubing 25mm 550304Heat Shrink Tubing 38mm 550306

Vinyl Mastic Tape 551357

Aerial Bundled Conductors.

2 x 35mm² 0895354 x 35mm² 0894354 x 95mm² 089495

4 x 50mm² 0894504 x 120mm² 0894962 x 50mm² 0895502 x 95mm² 089595

LV Underground Services - Hybrid Cable

25mm² 00040135mm² 000402

NOTENote: 25mm², 50mm², 70mm² and 120mm² are no longer standard equipment. Detailsincluded for reference.


Database Ref: File Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 6ABC Drawings JAN 2002



ABC Overhead Lines

Drawings

East Midlands Electricity ABC Overhead LinesDistribution Business Drawings

File Ref:OHL Vol 1 Section 6 ABC Drawings JAN 2002 Page 2 of 15 Version: 2

REVISION LOG

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date1 M. Richardson D. Howard I.E. Burton T. Haggis 12/02/99Notes: Fully revised for content and style.

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date2Notes: Figures revised

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By DateDEC 2000 T HaggisNotes:

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By DateJAN 2002 T Haggis Jan 2002Notes: Pictures of Network switch and service box included



CONTENTS

1. LV OVERHEAD LINES GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 4

1.1 Key to Illustrations 4

1.2 Extracts of General Arrangement Drawings 5

FIGURES

LV 201 CROSS SECTION OF ABC 5LV 202A UNSTAYED INTERMEDIATE POLE 5LV 203A THROUGH POLE UP TO 40° 6LV 204A . ABC SECTION POLE UP TO 20° 6LV 205A SECTION POLE 20° TO 90° 7LV 206 ABC TO BARE WIRE 7LV 207A ABC TERMINAL POLE 8LV 208B ABC TERMINAL POLE WITH CABLE 8LV 208A CONNECTION OF CNE CABLE TO ABC 9LV 209A ABC TEE OFF ON STRAIGHT THROUGH LINE 9LV 210 A. 95/95/95 MM2 ABC TEE OFF SECTION POLE 10LV 211A ABC UNDERGROUND SERVICE 10LV 212 ABC UNDEREAVES MAIN UP 95MM² 11LV 213 ABC UNDEREAVES CORNER ATTACHMENT - ALL SIZES 11LV 214 ABC UNDEREAVES FLAT WALL ATTACHMENT - ALL SIZES 11LV 215 ABC WINDOW, DOOR CLEARANCES 12LV 216 ABC PME EARTH ELECTRODE CONNECTION. 12LV 217 SINGLE PHASE ABC SERVICE, TYPICAL LAYOUT. 13LV 218 TYPICAL LAYOUT OF ABC SERVICE(S) 13LV 219 UNDEREAVES CABLE ENTRY INTO OUTDOOR METER BOX. 14LV 220 ‘N’ TYPE 250 AMP ABC NETWORK SWITCH 14LV 221 ABC SERVICE BOX 15



1. LV OVERHEAD LINES GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS

1.1 Key to Illustrations

ITEM DESCRIPTION

A Hook bolt with keeper plate.

B Eye bolt and eye nut.

C Suspension clamps.

D Tension clamps.

E Insulation piercing connectors.

F Push on end caps.

G Heat shrink end caps.

H Plastic cable ties.

I Plastic cable saddles.

J Compression BiMetal splice for PME Earths.

K Compression cable terms for CNE conductors.

L Wall clamp/bracket and rubber inserts.

M Stand off wall cleats.

O Weak links.



1.2 Extracts of General Arrangement Drawings

LV 201 CROSS SECTION OF ABC

LV 202A UNSTAYED INTERMEDIATE POLEThe suspension clamp shown is representative only. The clamp with integral roller is showninset.

O

A

C

NOTE : NOT TO BE USED FOR 120 mm² A.B.C.

175

VF60/3X25-95

1: Suspension Clamps - 35mm² 2 CoreA light duty suspension clamp withinsulating inset should be used atstraight line positions and at anglepoles up to 30° of line deviation.2: Suspension Clamps - 35mm² 4 Core to95mm²A heavy duty clamp with integral rollershall be used at straight line positionsand at angle poles not exceeding 60°of line deviation.3: Suspension Clamps - 120mm²A special heavy duty clamp will be usedfor all poles up to a 20° maximumline deviation.

0.5mm min1mm

0.5mm

approx.

0.25mm

approx.



LV 203A THROUGH POLE UP TO 40°The suspension clamp shown is representative only. The clamp with integral roller is showninset, see the document ‘Design of ABC LV Overhead Lines’ for application.

LV 204A . ABC SECTION POLE UP TO 20°

A

STAY

C

VF60/3X25-95

175

1: Suspension Clamps - 35mm² 2 CoreA light duty suspension clamp withinsulating inset should be used atstraight line positions and at anglepoles up to 30° of line deviation.2: Suspension Clamps - 35mm² 4 Core to95mm²A heavy duty clamp with integral rollershall be used at straight line positionsand at angle poles not exceeding 60°of line deviation.

20° MAX.

STAY

D

B

175



LV 205A SECTION POLE 20° TO 90°

LV 206 ABC TO BARE WIRE

SURPLUS PVC CABLE SHEATHSECURED OVER STAY PREFORM.

D

STAY

I or M

TRANSITION I.P.C.s

B

TRANSITION I.P.C.s

STAY

90° MAX.

D

120

175

105 ANTI-SPLIT BOLT HOLES

TOP STEELWORKHOLE

BB



LV 207A ABC TERMINAL POLE

LV 208B ABC TERMINAL POLE WITH CABLE

I

G

STAY

PVC INSULATED 16mm²COPPER EARTH CABLE

J

D

M

175

B

D

M

150 STAGGER

K

STAY

175

B

16mm² STRANDED COPPERPVC COVERED

35 ABC

E

J



LV 208A CONNECTION OF CNE CABLE TO ABC

LV 209A ABC TEE OFF ON STRAIGHT THROUGH LINE

CH

E

95 ABC TAIL

HEAT SHRINK MAKEOFFIN ACCORDANCE WITHLV JOINTING C.O.P.

M

K150 mm STAGGER

E

95 ABC TAIL

STAY

CH

E

D

A

120

160

ANTI-SPLIT BOLT HOLES

B



LV 210 A. 95/95/95 mm2 ABC TEE OFF SECTION POLE

LV 211A ABC UNDERGROUND SERVICE

B

D

H

STAY

E

175

105

ANTI-SPLIT BOLT HOLE

ANTI-SPLIT BOLT HOLE

LV 210 A. 95/95/95 mm2 ABC TEE OFF SECTION POLE

B B

I

2.4m

CH

E

35 ABC TAIL

CABLE TO SERVICE POSITION

CABLE CAPPING

HEAT SHRINK MAKEOFFIN ACCORDANCE WITH LV JOINTING C.O.P

175

150mm STAGGER

M

K



LV 212 ABC UNDEREAVES MAIN UP 95mm²

LV 213 ABC UNDEREAVES CORNERATTACHMENT - ALL SIZES

LV 214 ABC UNDEREAVES FLAT WALLATTACHMENT - ALL SIZES

M

L

ABC OFFSET BRACKETAND SMALL SHACKLE

C

RAWBOLT HOOKANCHOR

C

20°max

10m max1mmax

40°max

1mmax

1mmax

1mmax

10m max

D M10

min

1000max

10 m

in

D M

1000 max



LV 215 ABC WINDOW, DOOR CLEARANCES

LV 216 ABC PME EARTH ELECTRODE CONNECTION.

ADDITIONAL PROTECTION REQUIRED WHEN CONDUCTOR IS RUN WITHIN THESE AREAS

BALCONY400

400 400

1000

500500

1000

2400

E

H

35 ABC

16mm² STRANDED COPPERPVC COVERED

35 ABC

E

CH17

5

100

J

J



LV 217 SINGLE PHASE ABC SERVICE, TYPICAL LAYOUT.

LV 218 TYPICAL LAYOUT OF ABC SERVICE(S)

PROTECTION REQUIRED AROUND RAINWATERDOWNPIPE

ABCMAIN

2400

ABC 2 CORE SERVICEARRANGEMENT

PROTECTION REQUIRED 500mm EACH SIDE OFRAINWATER DOWNPIPE

S

WALLBRACKETS

PME EARTH

S

SERVICEDISTRIBUTIONBOX

2C SERVICES

ALTERNATIVE POSITION OF ABC

TENSIONCLAMP

S

S

UP TO 4SERVICES FROMEACH HOOK

TO ABCSERVICEDISTRIBUTIONBOX

FROM ABC SERVICEDISTRIBUTION BOX

2400



LV 219 UNDEREAVES CABLE ENTRY INTO OUTDOOR METER BOX.

LV 220 ‘N’ TYPE 250 AMP ABC NETWORK SWITCH

Fitted with 250 amp NH00 Solid LinksCommodity code 147953

ALTERNATIVEARRANGEMENT

OUTDOOR

METER

32mm O.D. BLACKPVC CONDUITSHORT LENGTH CUTTO SUIT

SEAL WITH PLASTICWATERPROOF COMPOUND

90 PVC LEADIN TUBES

BOX

CABLE ENTRY

SEAL WITH PLASTIC WATERPROOF COMPOUND

COLLAR REMOVEDFROM ONE END TO ALLOW SLOT IN

CONDUIT FIXED WITHPVC SADDLES ATINTERVALS DEPENDANTON TYPE OF WALL

32mm O.D. BLACKPVC CONDUIT4m LONG

5m MINIMUM HEIGHTFROM GROUND LEVEL

USE OF FLEXIBLE SPLIT CONDUIT FOR PROTECTION OF SERVICE CABLE WITHIN A BUILDING

C/O M

PME NEUTRAL EARTHWHERE END SERVICEOF UNDER EAVES

OUTDOOR

METER METER

BOX

OUTDOOR

BOX

OUTDOOR

METER

BOX



LV 221 ABC SERVICE BOXCommodity code 290 860


Database Ref: File Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 6 HVSingle Circuit Fittings &Commodity Codes JAN 2002


Version Prepared by Approved by Issue DateJan 2002 Tony Haggis Tony Haggis Jan 2002

HV Single Circuit


East Midlands Electricity HV Single Circuit Overhead LinesDistribution Business Fittings and Current Commodity Codes

Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 6 HV SingleCircuit Fittings & Commodity Codes JAN 2002

Page 2 of 6 Version: 3

REVISION LOG

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date1 M. Richardson D. Howard I.E. Burton - 12/02/99

Notes: Full revision of content and style.

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date2 Jan 2001

Notes: Items E313B and C replaced by item E361. E112, E250, E242 withdrawn. General Revision

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date3 T Haggis Jan 2002

Notes: E361 – commodity code corrected234 871 – 36 kV ball-ball composite insulator addedTriplex cable cleats added





E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTIONE105 - Wood PoleE111 231554 Kicking block - Type 1E111 231555 Kicking block - Type 2E111 231580 Brace block - Type 1E111 231586 Brace block - Type 2E113 - Wood pole - Universal pole – use two for ‘H’ Pole.E114 - Wood poleE213 233148 Crossarm memberE214 233149 Crossarm memberE216 233155 Crossarm memberE219 233180 Crossarm memberE228 233240 Crossarm memberE230 233510 Crossarm strutE231 233050 Fuse Mounting Platform Single PoleE233 233053 Fuse Mounting X Arm & strut SpurE234 235448 Pole Transformer Platform/Fuse mounting xarmE235 233300 Pilot Insulator/Tx/Cable SupportE237 233530 Crossarm braceE238 233540 Section strapE239 233550 Terminal strapE243 233560 Insulator BracketE244 235720 Underground brace barsE247 232583 Insulator BracketE248 235730 Underground tie strapsE249 235785 Tie rod - Type 3E254 235167 Universal Steelwork: ABIE258 232593 Triggered Gap Support BracketE260 238800 Square curved washerE261 238885 Square flat washerE262 232370 'J' BoltE263 234500 Anti-Climbing GuardE271 233063 Single Phase Surge Arrester BracketE272 233062 Surge Arrester Support ‘H’PoleE273 233061 Surge Arrester Support BracketE274 233060 Mounting Crossarm support and support strut for surge arresters -

1Phase Transformer




E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTIONE275 233056 to Brentford - type Surge Arrester Brackets

233059E276 233065 Support Bracket for Transformer Mounted Surge ArrestersE303 234813 11kV pin insulatorE305 234822 33kV line post insulatorE306 234830 Insulator disc: Porcelain

234 871 36kV composite ball ball insulatorE306 234860 Insulator disc: GlassE307 234847 Triggered Arc GapE308 235424 Cranked Pilot Insulator PinE310 235412 Pin 230mm 10kN Ref 29E310 235413 Pin 305mm 10kN Ref 31E310 235423 Pilot pin Ref 50-(50mm)E311 235430 Pilot Insulator Spindle: timber fixE312 236100 Clevis Ended Socket (300mm² HDA)E314 232059 EyeboltE317 236171 Socket TongueE318 550230 Stand-Off InsulatorE319 234320 11kV Gap-Type Surge ArresterE326 232595 Bolted Anchor Clamp 50mm² ACSR OHJ 142E326 232596 Bolted Anchor Clamp: 100/150mm² ACSR OHJ 142E361 235120 Ball Ended Eye HookE358 234322 11kV Surge ArresterE359 234323 33kV Surge Arrester

- 382652 ABSD 400A Rating Low Level Actuation- 382653 ABSD 400A Rating High Level Actuation

E414 231051 TurnbuckleE503 514950 to Number Plate

514958E504 513547 Circuit Identification PlateE508 513640 Safety signE509 513643 Property Label and Safety SignE706 232765 PVC Cable Saddle 50mmE706 232767 PVC Cable Saddle 61mmE706 232769 PVC Cable Saddle 73mmE708 234602 Cable Guard 50mm internal diameterE708 234604 Cable Guard 100mm internal diameterE709 232985 Pole Earth Wire Cover




E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTIONE714 5332100 Cable cleat 70 & 150 mm2 11kV triplex cableE714 5332110 Cable cleat 185 & 300 mm2 11kV triplex cableE714 5332120 Cable cleat 150 & 400 mm2 33kV triplex cableE714 5332130 Cable cleat 400 mm2 33kV single cable

- 235674 Fibre Glass Parking Bar- 263201 Live Line Tap - 100mm²- 070816 Live Line Tapping Cable 95mm²

235421 Ties for Tapping Cable 95mm²- Distribution Ties – 11kV Pin Insulators:

Note: Pin Ins (11kV) 78mm neck- 235415 Single Dist: Tie - Top 50mm² ACSR- 235416 Single Dist: Tie - Top 100mm² ACSR- 235417 Single Dist: Tie - Top 150mm² ACSR- 235418 Single Dist: Tie - Side 50mm² ACSR- 235419 Single Dist: Tie - Side 100mm² ACSR

235420 Single Dist: Tie - Side 150mm² ACSR- Distribution Ties – 33kV Post Insulators

Note: Post Ins (33kV) 120mm neck- 235431 Single Dist: Tie - Top 150mm² ACSR- 235432 Single Dist: Tie - Top 300mm² HDA- 235433 Single Dist: Tie - Side 150mm² ACSR- 235434 Single Dist: Tie - Side 300mm² HDA- 235435 Double Dist: Tie - Top 150mm² ACSR- 235436 Double Dist: Tie - Top 300mm² HDA- 235437 Double Dist: Tie - Side 150mm² ACSR- 235438 Double Dist: Tie - Side 300mm² HDA

Distribution Ties - Tapping cable- 235421 Twin Tie - 95mm² Aluflex

Distribution Ties - HD Cu Cond- 235426 Single Dist: Tie - Top .075mm- 235427 Single Dist: Tie - Top .10mm- 235428 Single Dist: Tie - Top .15mm- 235444 Single Dist: Tie - Top 3/2.65mm- 235445 Single Dist: Tie - Top 7/2.64mm

Bolts etc- 232301 M20 x 45 Bolts- 232302 M20 x 50 Bolts- 232303 M20 x 60 Bolts




E DRG C.CODE DESCRIPTION- 232304 M20 x 70 Bolts- - M20 Bolts (Pole)- - (Locknuts not on Stock)- 235816 Coach Screws 112mm x 12mm

FOR JOINTS (OHJ ITEMS) REFER TO THE DOCUMENT ‘OVERHEAD LINEJOINTING CHARTS’


Database Ref: 36 File Ref: Design of HV SingleCircuit Feb 2001



Design of HV Single Circuit

Overhead Lines on Wood Poles

East Midlands Electricity Design Of HV Single Circuit Overhead Lines On Wood PolesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Design Of HV Single CircuitFeb 2001.doc Page 2 of 10 Version:2

Revision Log For Design Of HV Single Circuit Overhead LinesOn Wood Poles







CONTENTS

1. HIGH VOLTAGE SINGLE CIRCUIT OVERHEAD LINES ON WOOD POLES..............................4

1.1 SCOPE......................................................................................................................................................4

2. DETAIL DESIGN CRITERIA...................................................................................................................4

2.1 POLES........................................................................................................................................................42.2 CROSSARM ASSEMBLIES............................................................................................................................52.3 AUXILIARY STEELWORK............................................................................................................................52.4 INSULATORS ..............................................................................................................................................52.5 CONDUCTORS ............................................................................................................................................52.6 CONDUCTOR DESIGN TENSIONS ................................................................................................................62.7 FITTINGS....................................................................................................................................................62.8 STAYS........................................................................................................................................................6

3. LINE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE.............................................................................7

3.1 SUPPORTS..................................................................................................................................................73.2 SPAN LENGTHS ..........................................................................................................................................73.3 FAILURE CONTAINMENT AND SECTION LENGTH LIMITATIONS...................................................................73.4 CONDUCTORS ............................................................................................................................................83.5 USE OF COVERED CONDUCTORS................................................................................................................83.6 LINE DEVIATION AND STAYS .....................................................................................................................83.7 FOUNDATIONS ...........................................................................................................................................93.8 SAFETY SIGN PRECAUTIONS ......................................................................................................................93.9 PRECAUTIONS AGAINST ACCESS .............................................................................................................103.10 MINIMUM HEIGHT OF LINE CONDUCTORS AND CLEARANCE...............................................................103.11 RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER BODIES ................................................................................................103.12 ERECTION OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................103.13 JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS ...................................................................................................................103.14 JOINT USE 11KV AND ABC ................................................................................................................10



1. HIGH VOLTAGE SINGLE CIRCUIT OVERHEAD LINES ON WOOD POLES

EATS Standard 43-40 uses a semi-probabilistic approach to overhead line design for HVsingle circuit lines.

The approach taken matches the maximum likely weather related load at the pole installationsite with the strength capability of the most highly stressed component.

In addition the approach aims to provide greater security for components which are difficultor time consuming to replace under storm conditions and to limit the extent of any cascadefailure.

1.1 SCOPE

This specification is based on EATS Standard 43-40 and covers the design of single circuit, 3phase high voltage overhead lines supported on wood poles. High voltage in this contextcovers voltages in the range of 1,000 to 33,000 volts. The specification contains informationon the design and construction of overhead lines using ACSR and HDA conductors.

Where a single-phase line is required the standard of construction shall be appropriate forultimate 3-phase operation, the centre phase conductor being omitted.

Lines initially designed and built for 11kV operation can be up-rated to 33kV by re-insulatingusing the appropriate fittings. This normally applies only to Dingo or Butterfly Conductors

Overhead lines to this specification are designed to withstand all likely weather related loadswithin the UK in accordance with the definitions and criteria provided.

The tables in the document ‘Constructional Specifications For HV Overhead Lines’ interpretEATS Standard 43-40 with respect to East Midlands Electricity plc conductors and predictedweather conditions for the region.

2. DETAIL DESIGN CRITERIA

2.1 Poles

The stresses created in intermediate and section supports are bending stresses due to windloading on conductors plus poles, the principle loading points being taken as 250mm abovethe pole tops. The stresses created in stayed supports are crippling stresses due to stay tensionand vertical conductor loads acting at the pole top. The distribution of stresses in the limbs of‘H’ supports on which all stays are adjusted to equal tension is considered to be as follows:

Stayed equally on each limb - 50 per cent of stress in each limb.



In extreme weather conditions beyond those considered likely, stayed supports may berequired to afford appreciable failure containment capability. To this end a conservativestaying policy has been adopted in the formulation of this specification. In practice, the designloading when applied to the case of large angles of line deviation and terminals is generallymore onerous than abnormal cases associated with broken conductors when applied to thesame structures with correctly installed and maintained stays.

A correctly stayed 'H' structure is deemed to provide an acceptable level of failurecontainment when used up to the ultimate loading case.

In the case of small angles of line deviation single stays set at the minimum angle required toresist the normal design loading case do not offer significant failure containment capability.

2.2 Crossarm Assemblies

Crossarms are designed to operate within their elastic limit for all likely load conditions. Thecrossarms are designed to support conductors with a down-pull of 1 in 10, measured betweenadjacent points of conductor support, together with the weights of the maximum clashingspan permitted for that conductor/crossarm combination, calculated using the MaximumConductor Weight (MCW) for the relevant ice co-ordinate.

2.3 Auxiliary Steelwork

Auxiliary Steelwork for pole mounted transformers, circuit breakers, air break isolators, etc.,has been designed for the largest single item of plant.

2.4 Insulators

Insulators are designed by manufacturer's to provide the specified ultimate load capabilities.In this specification the maximum load applied transversely to a pin insulator is theMaximum Conductor Pressure (MCP) per unit of wind-span. Wind-spans are specified tocontain the maximum likely applied load within the manufacturer's specified ultimatecapability.

2.5 Conductors

Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR) - Bare- 50mm² Code Name Rabbit.(6/3.35mm Al. + 1/3.35mm St)- 100mm² Code Name Dog.(6/4.72mm Al. + 7/1.57mm St)- 150mm² Code Name Dingo.(18/3.35mm Al. + 1/3.35mm St)Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR) - PVC Covered- 50mm² Code Name Rabbit. (6/3.35mm Al. + 1/3.35mm St)- 100mm² Code Name Dog.(6/4.72mm Al. + 7/1.57mm St)Hard Drawn Aluminium (HDA)- 300mm² Code Name Butterfly. (19/4.65mm)



2.6 Conductor Design TensionsConductor Design Tensions take into account the following conditions:

The design tension of aluminium based conductors at 5°C in still air shall not exceed 20% ofthe breaking load given in British Standard 215. This is to reduce the risk of aeolian vibrationto an acceptable level.

The sag and tension tables provided in this specification are derived from specified FreezingPoint Tensions (FPT). A list of the values is given below.

TABLE 1. CONDUCTOR FREEZING POINT TENSION (FPT) FOR ABASIC SPAN OF 100m

CONDUCTOR CODE NAME FPT(Newtons)

50mm² ACSR - BARE RABBIT 4021100mm² ACSR - BARE DOG 7188150mm² ACSR - BARE DINGO 789150mm² ACSR - PVC COVERED RABBIT 3725100mm² ACSR - PVC COVERED DOG 7062300mm² HDA BUTTERFLY 8756

Ordinates for plotting uplift curves are based on conductor design tensions.

Ordinates for plotting ground clearance curves assume the use of new conductor and includean allowance for long-term creep over a period of 25 years. This allowance is equivalent toreductions of the design tension values at a temperature of 15°C as indicated below:

ACSR and HDA conductor - 20% reduction

2.7 Fittings

The fittings to be used are listed on the relevant General Arrangement Drawings.

2.8 Stays

7/3.25mm Grade 1150 and 7/4.00mm Grade 1150.

Further information on stays can be found in the documents:

‘Constructional Specifications for HV Overhead Lines.’

‘Design of Stays for Overhead Lines.’



3. LINE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE

3.1 Supports

Supports shall be single or ‘H’ type poles as shown in the General Arrangement Drawings.Details of the pole classification to be used are shown in the document ‘ConstructionalSpecifications for HV Overhead Lines’ and relate to duty and climatic zone.

Anti-split bolts are to be fitted to all pole tops where specified in the arrangement drawings.

3.2 Span lengths

For HV single circuit construction a Basic Span of 100m has been chosen.

Maximum Wind Loading Span for 100m is 110m.

To prevent conductor clashing, maximum single spans can vary up to 1.2 x Basic Span.However, the long span shall be limited to no more than 1 span in every 5.

In special circumstances, longer spans than those specified may be installed up to a maximumof 150m using the structure shown in General Arrangement drawing A005

The tables in the document ‘Constructional Specifications for HV Overhead Lines’ give thedesign sags and tensions for conductors at 100m basic spans. Erection sags and tensions arecontained in the document ‘Erection of HV Conductors’.

3.3 Failure Containment and Section Length Limitations

To prevent cascade failure under severe ice and wind loadings it is necessary to limit sectionlengths to no more than 10 spans in all areas.

Each line shall be constructed with Failure Containment Supports considered adequate toarrest cascade failure separated by not more than 10 spans.

The following is a list of the arrangements considered as Failure Containment Supports:

• Section supports A003, A004 & A005

• Tee-off support A006 & A007

• Terminal Supports A008 & A009



3.4 Conductors

Conductor design sags and tensions together with ordinates for plotting uplift and groundclearance curves are given the document ‘Constructional Specifications for HV OverheadLines’

3.5 Use of Covered Conductors

There are a number of covered conductor systems available e.g. BLX, SAX, EXCEL,AXCESS etc.

Because of unresolved reliability issues associated with these systems East MidlandsElectricity has not yet selected a particular covered conductor system as a company standard.

Where it is necessary to insulate HV overhead lines:

• For single spans use PVC insulated ACSR.

Technical data is provided in this standard permitting the erection of full section(s) ofline conductored with PVC covered conductors. (50mm² and 100mm² ACSR only).When a single span of PVC covered conductor is erected in a section of line, the spanshall not exceed 60% of the normal span for the particular bare conductor.

• For more than two spans or a conductor size over 100 mm2 contact Network Performance& Standards

New covered conductor systems and solutions to reliability issues are constantly beingdeveloped by manufacturers. Network Performance & Standards shall specify thedetailed design standard for each covered conductor installation until such time as asuitable company standard is identified.

3.6 Line Deviation and Stays

The maximum angles of line deviation for the supports and conductors are given in the tablescontained in the document ‘Constructional Specifications for HV Overhead Lines’.

All stays will normally be set at 45° to the pole leg - i.e. the spread shall be the pole heightless the sinking depth measured on level ground. ( For stay angles greater than 45°,reinforcement not needed; less than 45°,{ 30° minimum } increase staying by extra stay ).The recommended stay assemblies are shown the documents ‘Constructional Specificationsfor HV Overhead Lines’ and ‘Design of Stays for Overhead Lines’.

‘H’ poles used as angle poles shall be fitted with stays as contained in the document‘Constructional Specifications for HV Overhead Lines’. Non-symmetrical stayingarrangements are not approved for use on ‘H’ poles erected to this specification. ‘H’ poleserected as terminals or out of balance stayed sections between sections of lines built todissimilar basic spans may be equipped with single, double or triple stays per leg.



Double stays are always to be installed with a minimum of two metres between the point ofentry into the ground of each stay rod.

Triple stays shall comprise two splayed stays, as above, set at the approved angle to the pole;the third stay being placed to bisect the two and entering the ground at least one metre behindthem viewed from the pole.

Refer to the document ‘Design of Stays for Overhead Lines’ when site conditions prevent theuse of preferred staying arrangements.

All stays shall be bonded to the appropriate crossarm.

For further information on the installation of stays, refer to the document ‘Design of Stays forOverhead Lines’.

3.7 Foundations

Details of foundation are given in the document ‘Constructional Specifications for HVOverhead Lines’ These assume Good/ Average Class ground. It is the Project Manager’sresponsibility to strengthen pole foundations where ground conditions are suspected to beworse than Good/Average Class. Advice should be sought from Network Performance &Standards.

Depth

The preferred method of pole hole excavation is by augering to a depth of 2.4m.

Where augering is not possible then poles shall excavated by hand or machine to the depthsshown in the document “Constructional Specifications for Single Circuit HV OverheadLines”

Baulks & Braces on ‘H’ Poles

Where ‘H’ Poles are planted by augering to 2.4m brace bars and bulks will not be required.

Where ‘H’ Poles are planted by an excavator or manually brace bars and bulks shall berequired.

3.8 Safety Sign Precautions

Each support on a line to this Standard shall be provided with a safety sign to EquipmentDrawing E508, or E509 if plant is fitted. The sign shall be mounted 3m above ground leveland clearly visible to an observer at ground level from the normal direction of approach.



3.9 Precautions Against Access

The types of support requiring precautions against access and the methods to be employed aredetailed in EATS Standard 43-90, ‘Anti-Climbing Devices for HV lines up to and including400kV’.

Additional precautions shall be required next to play areas and other places where childrencongregate.

3.10 Minimum Height of Line Conductors and Clearance

The minimum height of line conductors and clearances shall comply with the requirements of‘The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988’ and ‘The Overhead Lines (Exemption)Regulations 1990’. (See Section 3 of this Volume.)

3.11 Relationships With Other Bodies

Where lines to this Standard are erected over or alongside the plant of British Rail or BritishTelecom, the provisions agreed shall be complied with. Additionally, the requirements of theBritish Waterways Board or other similar undertakings should be noted.

3.12 Erection of Auxiliary Equipment

Allowance has been made to the basic support consideration for the additional mechanicalloadings which would be imposed by auxiliary equipment and additional conductors.

3.13 Jumper ArrangementsAll 33 kV & 11 kV jumper should comply with OHL Manual Volume 1, Section 7 “JumpersDrawings & Materials”.

3.14 Joint Use 11kV and ABCThe arrangement and spacing of 11kV and LV ABC conductors are as shown OHL ManualVolume 1, Section 6 “ABC Double Circuit”.


Database Ref: 38 File Ref: Construction Spec forSingle Circuit HV Feb 2001



Constructional Specifications

for Single Circuit HV Overhead Lines

East Midlands Electricity Constructional Specification For Single Circuit HV Overhead LinesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Construction Spec For SingleCircuit HV Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 32 Version: 3

Revision Log For Constructional Specification For SingleCircuit HV Overhead Lines




Section Notes about the change7 Table 2.1 reference to 315kVA transformer in notes removed.


Section Notes about the change7 Erection Tables added



CONTENTS1. Pole Strut Capability (To Bs 1990)............................................................................................................ 4

2. Constructional Specification For Supports With Auxiliary Equipment ................................................ 6

3. Constructional Specification For 50mm² Acsr - Code Name ‘Rabbit’ ................................................... 7

4. Constructional Specification For 50mm² Acsr - Code Name ‘Rabbit’ (Pvc Covered) ........................ 11

5. Constructional Specification For 100mm² Acsr - Code Name ‘Dog’ .................................................... 15

6. Constructional Specification For 100mm² Acsr - Code Name ‘Dog’ (Pvc Covered)........................... 19

7. Constructional Specification For 150mm² Acsr - Code Name ‘Dingo’................................................. 23

8. Constructional Specification For 300mm² Hda - Code Name ‘Butterfly’ ............................................ 27

9. Constructional Specification For Pole Foundations .............................................................................. 31



1. Pole Strut Capability (TO BS 1990)

The Strut Loads from the relevant tables include the appropriate reliability factor andare to be compared directly with the Pole Strut Capability loadings in this table

TABLE 1.1. Strut Load (kN) For Poles Planted In Augered Holes (thepreferred method)

The planting depth is 2.4m

Pole Augered HolesLength Single Poles ‘H’ Poles

(M) Medium Stout Extra Stout Medium Stout8.5 96 236 - 139 3009.0 86 214 - 123 2729.5 76 191 - 110 24110.0 69 172 301 100 21710.5 63 156 333 91 19711.0 58 142 303 83 17911.5 54 131 277 77 16412.0 50 121 268 71 15213.0 51 115 220 63 13514.0 47 105 197 58 12315.0 47 96 179 54 11216.0 47 94 172 50 10417.0 51 86 156 51 9518.0 47 81 146 47 90



TABLE 1.2. Strut Load (kN) For Poles Planted In Manual / Excavator DugPole Holes.

The appropriate planting depth shown in Section 9

Pole Manual/Mechanical DugLength Single Poles ‘H’ Poles

(M) Medium Stout Extra Stout Medium Stout8.5 79 194 - 112 2439.0 72 180 - 101 2259.5 65 163 - 92 20310.0 60 148 256 84 18610.5 55 136 285 78 16911.0 51 126 262 72 15611.5 49 120 250 69 14912.0 46 112 244 65 13913.0 49 111 210 60 13014.0 46 101 190 56 11815.0 46 93 173 52 10916.0 47 94 172 50 10417.0 50 86 156 51 9518.0 47 81 146 47 9020.0 45 45 - 46 83



2. Constructional Specification For Supports With Auxiliary Equipment

TABLE 2.1. Constructional Specification For Supports With AuxiliaryEquipment

Where a support carries auxiliary equipment the construction of the support shallbe in accordance with the General Arrangement Drawings , and the pole grade asfollows.

Transformer Poles (Including Fuses And Control Gear)Terminal Poles Intermediate Poles

POLE UP T0 50 TO 200 TO UP TO 50 TO 200 TOHEIGHT (m) 25 kVA 100 kVA 315 kVA 25 kVA 100 kVA 315 kVA

9.0 to 10.5 STOUT STOUT E STOUT STOUT STOUT E STOUT11.0 to 12.0 STOUT E STOUT E STOUT STOUT STOUT E STOUT13.0 to 14.0 E STOUT E STOUT E STOUT STOUT STOUT E STOUT

NOTE

Pole Mounted Auto Reclosers and Air Break Switch Disconnetors to be erected onstout poles.



3. Constructional Specification For 50mm² ACSR - Code Name ‘Rabbit’

TABLE 3.1. Design Criteria - 50mm² ACSR

ACSR 50mm² RABBIT VALUEConductor UTS (N) 18350Diameter (mm) 10.05Weight (kg/m) 0.2167Cross sectional area (mm²) 61.699Modulus of Elasticity (N/mm²) 79000Coefficient of Linear Exp. (°C) 0.0000191Ice diameter (mm) 20Conductor wind pressure (N/sq.m) 380Freezing Point Tension (N) 4021Anti Vibration Constraint 20% of UTS @ 5°CConductor Factor of Safety (FoS) 2Maximum Working Tension UTS/FoSClashing Span (Maximum Span) 1.2 x Basic SpanGround Clearance Curve, ordinate tensionreduction, % @ 15°C 20%Erection Sags/Tensions,* overtension % @ 15°C 10%Pretension (N) Use Tension at 5°C in Erection Sag

TableReliability Factor for MCP, MCW, MCT 1.5

* Erection Sags/Tensions are shown in the document ‘Erection of HV Conductors’



TABLE 3.2. Specification For A Basic Span Of 100m - 50mm² ACSR

Straight Line Poles SpecificationIntermediate Poles To Drawing A010 Medium Grade Poles.Section Pole To Drawing A003 Medium Grade Poles.

NOTE

The withstand strut loads shown below have been derived with a Reliability Factorof 1.5

TABLE 3.3. Strut Loads - 50mm² ACSR

Pole grades are to be determined from the withstand strut load shown below and thepole strut capability table in section 1. Stays are to be installed using 7/3.25mm staywirewith a 45 ° angle of spread.

Angle/Terminal Poles SpecificationIntermediate Angle To Drawing A002 Max. Angle Of Line Deviation Is 10°Section Angle Pole To Drawing A003 Max. Angle Of Line Deviation Is 60°Tee Off To Drawing A006 Withstand Strut Load Imposed On Pole

By Tee Off Is 58 kN, 2 Stays RequiredTerminal Pole To Drawing A008 Withstand Strut Load Is 58 kN, 2 Stays

Required

TABLE 3.4. Withstand Strut Loads Imposed On Pole For Various AnglesOf Line Deviation. - 50mm² ACSR

Line Deviation 5° 10° 15° 20° 25° 30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°Strut Load kN 31 35 39 43 47 51 55 59 62 66 70 73

Stays Required SetAt 45°

7/3.25mm 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3or 7/4.00mm - - - 1 - - - - - 2 2 2

Refer to the document ‘Design of Stays for Overhead Lines’ for Strut Loads and Numberof stays for stays set at 30°.



TABLE 3.5. Sag And Tension Tables - 50mm² ACSR

The vibration or other fixed tension 3670 (N) at 5°C produces a calculated FPT 4021(N) at a temperature 0°C, and the ratio of conductor UTS to this tension is 4.56.

ACSR 50mm² RABBIT 100m Basic SpanOrdinates For Uplift/Ground Clearance Curves

Span(m) Sag (m) in still air Span (m) Sag (m) in still air(2X) - 6°C 50°C 75°C (2X) -6°C 50°C 75°C40 0.10 0.28 0.34 400 9.50 27.73 34.2180 0.38 1.11 1.37 440 11.50 33.55 41.40120 0.86 2.50 3.08 480 13.68 39.92 49.27160 1.52 4.44 5.47 520 16.06 46.86 57.82200 2.38 6.93 8.55 560 18.63 54.34 67.06240 3.42 9.98 12.32 600 21.38 62.38 76.98280 4.66 13.59 16.76 640 24.33 70.98 87.59320 6.08 17.74 21.90 680 27.46 80.13 98.88360 7.70 22.46 27.71 720 30.79 89.83 110.85

Ordinates for plotting uplift curves are based on conductor tensions. Ordinates for plottingground clearance curves assume the use of new conductors and include, if required, anallowance for long term creep over a period of 25 years The allowance used here isequivalent to a reduction of 20% of the design tension values at temperature 15°C.



TABLE 3.6. Design Sag And Tension - 100m Basic Span - 50mm² ACSR

Temp Tension Sag (M) For Span Length (M)°C kN 60 70 80 90 100 110 120-6 4.47 0.21 0.29 0.38 0.48 0.59 0.72 0.86 0 4.02 0.24 0.32 0.42 0.53 0.66 0.80 0.95 5 3.67 0.26 0.35 0.46 0.59 0.72 0.88 1.0410 3.34 0.29 0.39 0.51 0.64 0.79 0.96 1.1415 3.05 0.31 0.43 0.56 0.71 0.87 1.06 1.2620 2.78 0.34 0.47 0.61 0.77 0.96 1.16 1.3825 2.54 0.38 0.51 0.67 0.85 1.04 1.26 1.5030 2.34 0.41 0.56 0.73 0.92 1.14 1.37 1.6435 2.16 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.23 1.49 1.7740 2.01 0.48 0.65 0.85 1.07 1.32 1.60 1.9145 1.87 0.51 0.69 0.91 1.15 1.42 1.72 2.0450 1.76 0.54 0.74 0.97 1.22 1.51 1.83 2.1765 1.49 0.64 0.87 1.14 1.44 1.78 2.15 2.5675 1.37 0.70 0.95 1.24 1.57 1.94 2.35 2.80

TABLE 3.7 Erection Sag/Tension Chart 100m Basic Span 50mm² ACSR

Temp Tension Sag (M) For Span Length (M)°C kN 60 70 80 90 100 110 1200 4.40 0.22 0.30 0.39 0.49 0.60 0.73 0.872 4.25 0.22 0.31 0.40 0.51 0.62 0.76 0.904 4.10 0.23 0.32 0.41 0.52 0.65 0.78 0.936 3.96 0.24 0.33 0.43 0.54 0.67 0.81 0.978 3.81 0.25 0.34 0.45 0.56 0.70 0.84 1.0010 3.68 0.26 0.35 0.46 0.59 0.72 0.87 1.0412 3.54 0.27 0.37 0.48 0.61 0.75 0.91 1.0814 3.41 0.28 0.38 0.50 0.63 0.78 0.94 1.1216 3.29 0.29 0.40 0.52 0.65 0.81 0.98 1.1618 3.17 0.30 0.41 0.54 0.68 0.84 1.01 1.2120 3.05 0.31 0.43 0.56 0.70 0.87 1.05 1.2522 2.94 0.33 0.44 0.58 0.73 0.90 1.09 1.3024 2.83 0.34 0.46 0.60 0.76 0.94 1.13 1.3526 2.73 0.35 0.48 0.62 0.79 0.97 1.18 1.40



4. Constructional Specification For 50mm² ACSR - Code Name ‘Rabbit’ (PVCCovered)

TABLE 4.1. Design Criteria - 50mm² ACSR (PVC Covered)

ACSR 50mm² Rabbit (PVC Covered) VALUEConductor UTS (N) 18350Diameter (mm) 14.10Weight (kg/m) 0.33Cross sectional area (mm²) 61.699Modulus of Elasticity (N/mm²) 79000Coefficient of Linear Exp. (°C) 0.0000191Ice diameter (mm) 20Conductor wind pressure (N/sq.m) 380Freezing Point Tension (N) 3725Anti Vibration Constraint 20% of UTS @ 5°CConductor Factor of Safety (FoS) 2Maximum Working Tension UTS/FoSClashing Span (Maximum Span) 1.2 x Basic SpanGround Clearance Curve, ordinate tensionreduction, % @ 15°C 20%Erection Sags/Tensions,* overtension % @ 15°C 10%Pretension (N) Use Tension at 5°C in Erection

Sag Table

Reliability Factor for MCP, MCW, MCT 1.5




TABLE 4.2. Specification For A Basic Span Of 100m - 50mm² ACSR (PVCCovered)

Straight Line Poles SpecificationIntermediate Poles To Drawing A010 Medium Grade Poles.Section Pole To Drawing A003 Medium Grade Poles.

NOTE

The withstand strut loads shown below have been derived with a reliability factor of1.5

TABLE 4.3. Strut Loads - 50mm² ACSR (PVC Covered)

Pole grades are to be determined from the withstand strut load shown below and thepole strut capability table opposite. Stays are to be installed using 7/3.25mm staywirewith a 45° angle of spread.

Angle/terminal poles SpecificationIntermediate angle to drawing a002 Max. Angle of line deviation is 10°Section angle pole to drawing a003 Max. Angle of line deviation is 60°Tee off to drawing a006 Withstand strut load imposed on pole by

tee off is 58kN, 2 stays requiredTerminal pole to drawing a008 Withstand strut load is 58kn, 2 stays

required

TABLE 4.4. Withstand Strut Loads Imposed On Pole For Various AnglesOf Line Deviation. - 50mm² ACSR (PVC Covered)

Line Deviation 5° 10° 15° 20° 25° 30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°Strut Load kN 31 35 39 43 47 51 55 59 62 66 70 73


7/3.25mm 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3or 7/4.00mm - - - 1 - - - - - 2 2 2




TABLE 4.5. Sag And Tension Tables - 50mm² ACSR (PVC Covered)

The vibration or other fixed tension 3670(N) at 5°C produces a calculated FPT3932(N) at a temperature 0°C. The FPT used is 3725(N) and the ratio of conductorUTS to this tension is 4.92

ACSR 50mm² RABBIT 100m Basic SpanOrdinates For Uplift/Ground Clearance Curves

Span (m) Sag (m) in still air Span (m) Sag (m) in still air(2X) - 6°C 50°C 75°C (2X) -6°C 50°C 75°C40 0.16 0.35 0.40 400 15.99 34.97 40.4180 0.64 1.40 1.62 440 19.34 42.31 48.89120 1.44 3.15 3.64 480 23.02 50.35 58.19160 2.56 5.59 6.47 520 27.02 59.09 68.29200 4.00 8.74 10.10 560 31.33 68.54 79.20240 5.76 12.59 14.55 600 35.97 78.68 90.92280 7.83 17.13 19.80 640 40.92 89.52 103.44320 10.23 22.38 25.86 680 46.20 101.05 116.78360 12.95 28.32 32.73 720 51.80 113.29 130.92




TABLE 4.6. Design Sag And Tension - 100m Basic Span - 50mm² ACSR(PVC Covered)

Temp Tension Sag (M) For Span Length (M)°C kN 60 70 80 90 100 110 120-6 4.05 0.36 0.49 0.64 0.81 1.00 1.21 1.440 3.72 0.39 0.53 0.70 0.88 1.09 1.31 1.565 3.48 0.42 0.57 0.74 0.94 1.16 1.41 1.6710 3.26 0.45 0.61 0.79 1.00 1.24 1.50 1.7915 3.06 0.48 0.65 0.85 1.07 1.32 1.60 1.9020 2.88 0.50 0.69 0.90 1.14 1.40 1.70 2.0225 2.72 0.53 0.73 0.95 1.20 1.48 1.80 2.1430 2.58 0.56 0.77 1.00 1.27 1.57 1.89 2.2535 2.46 0.59 0.81 1.05 1.33 1.65 1.99 2.3740 2.34 0.62 0.85 1.11 1.40 1.73 2.09 2.4945 2.24 0.65 0.89 1.16 1.46 1.81 2.19 2.6050 2.15 0.68 0.92 1.21 1.53 1.88 2.28 2.7165 1.92 0.76 1.03 1.35 1.71 2.11 2.55 3.0475 1.80 0.81 1.10 1.44 1.82 2.25 2.73 3.24

TABLE 4.7 Erection Sag And Tension - 100m Basic Span - 50mm² ACSR(PVC Covered)




5. Constructional Specification For 100mm² ACSR - Code Name ‘Dog’


ACSR 100mm² DOG VALUEConductor UTS (N) 32700Diameter (mm) 14.15Weight (kg/m) 0.402Cross sectional area (mm²) 118.536Modulus of Elasticity (N/mm²) 75000Coefficient of Linear Exp. (°C) 0.0000198Ice diameter (mm) 20Conductor wind pressure (N/sq.m) 380Freezing Point Tension (N) 7188Anti Vibration Constraint 20% of UTS @ 5°CConductor Factor of Safety (FoS) 2Maximum Working Tension UTS/FoSClashing Span (Maximum Span) 1.2 x Basic Span

Ground Clearance Curve, ordinate tensionreduction, % @ 15°C 20%Erection Sags/Tensions,* overtension % @ 15°C 10%Pretension (N) Use Tension at 5°C in Erection

Sag TableReliability Factor for MCP, MCW, MCT 1.5




TABLE 5.2. Specification For A Basic Span Of 100 Metres - 100mm² ACSR

Straight Line Poles SpecificationIntermediate Poles To Drawings A001 Stout Grade PolesSection Pole To Drawing A003 Stout Grade PolesSection 'H' Pole To Drawings A004 And A005 Medium Grade 'H' Poles

NOTE



Pole grades are to be determined from the withstand strut load shown below and the polestrut capability table in section 1. Stays are to be installed using 7/3.25mm staywire witha 45° angle of spread.

Angle/Terminal poles SpecificationIntermediate angle to drawing a002 Maximum Angle of Line Deviation is 5°Section angle pole to drawing a003 Maximum Angle of Line Deviation is 30°Section 'H' angle pole drawings a004 and a005 Angle of Line Deviation 30° to 60° maxTee off to drawing a007 Withstand Strut Load imposed on poles

by Tee Off is 42kN, 2 stays per legrequired

'H' terminal pole to drawing a009 Withstand Strut Load is 42kN, 2 stays perleg required

TABLE 5.4. Withstand Strut Loads Imposed On Pole For Various AnglesOf Line Deviation - 100mm² ACSR

Single Pole 'H' PoleLine Deviation 5° 10° 15° 20° 25° 30° 35° 40° 45° 50° 55° 60°Strut Load kN 40 46 52 58 64 70 39 41 44 47 49 52


7/3.25mm 1 2 2 2 2 3 2/L 2/L 2/L 2/L 2/L 2/Lor 7/4.00mm - - 1 1 - 2 - - - - - -






ACSR 100mm² DOG 100m Basic SpanOrdinates For Uplift/Ground Clearance Curves


Ordinates for plotting uplift curves are based on conductor tensions. Ordinates for plottingground clearance curves assume the use of new conductors and include, if required, anallowance for long term creep over a period of 25 years The allowance used here is equivalentto a reduction of 20% of the design tension values at temperature 15°C.





TABLE 5.8. Erection Sag And Tension - 100m Basic Span - 100mm² ACSR




6. Constructional Specification For 100mm² ACSR - Code Name ‘Dog’ (PVCCovered)

TABLE 6.1. Design Criteria - 100mm² ACSR (PVC Covered)

ACSR 100mm² DOG (PVC Covered) VALUEConductor UTS (N) 32700Diameter (mm) 18.20Weight (kg/m) 0.55Cross sectional area (mm²) 118.536Modulus of Elasticity (N/mm²) 75000Coefficient of Linear Exp. (°C) 0.0000198Ice diameter (mm) 20Conductor wind pressure (N/sq.m) 380Freezing Point Tension (N) 7062Anti Vibration Constraint 20% of UTS @ 5°CConductor Factor of Safety (FoS) 2Maximum Working Tension UTS/FoSClashing Span (Maximum Span) 1.2 x Basic SpanGround Clearance Curve, ordinate tensionreduction, % @ 15°C 20%Erection Sags/Tensions,* overtension % @ 15°C 10%Pretension (N) Use Tension at 5°C in Erection





TABLE 6.2. Specification For A Basic Span Of 100 Metres - 100mm² ACSR(PVC Covered)

Straight Line Poles SpecificationIntermediate Poles To Drawings A001 Stout Grade PolesSection Pole To Drawing A003 Stout Grade PolesSection 'H' Pole To Drawings A004 And A005 Medium Grade 'H' Poles

NOTE


TABLE 6.3. Strut Loads - 100mm² ACSR (PVC Covered)

Pole grades are to be determined from the withstand strut load shown below and thepole strut capability table in section 1. Stays are to be installed using 7/3.25mm staywirewith a 45° angle of spread.

Angle/Terminal Poles SpecificationIntermediate Angle To Drawing A002 Maximum Angle of Line Deviation is 5°Section Angle Pole To Drawing A003 Maximum Angle of Line Deviation is 30°Section 'H' Angle Pole Drawings A004 And A005 Angle of Line Deviation 30° to 60° maxTee Off To Drawing A007 Withstand Strut Load imposed on poles


'H' Terminal Pole To Drawing A009 Withstand Strut Load is 42kN, 2 stays perleg required

TABLE 6.4. Withstand Strut Loads Imposed On Pole For Various AnglesOf Line Deviation - 100mm² ACSR (PVC Covered)



7/3.25mm 1 2 2 2 2 3 2/L 2/L 2/L 2/L 2/L 2/Lor 7/4.00mm - - 1 1 - 2 - - - - - -




TABLE 6.5. Sag And Tension Tables - 100mm² ACSR (PVC Covered)


ACSR 100mm² (PVC Covered) DOG 100m Basic SpanOrdinates For Uplift/Ground Clearance Curves





TABLE 6.6. Design Sag And Tension - 100m Basic Span - 100mm² ACSR(PVC Covered)


TABLE 6.7. Erection Sag And Tension - 100m Basic Span - 100mm² ACSR(PVC Covered)




7. Constructional Specification For 150mm² ACSR - Code Name ‘Dingo’


ACSR 150mm² DINGO VALUEConductor UTS (N) 35700Diameter (mm) 16.75Weight (kg/m) 0.5164Cross sectional area (mm²) 167.4685Modulus of Elasticity (N/mm²) 66000Coefficient of Linear Exp. (°C) 0.0000212Ice diameter (mm) 20Conductor wind pressure (N/sq.m) 380Freezing Point Tension (N) 7891Anti Vibration Constraint 20% of UTS @ 5°CConductor Factor of Safety (FoS) 2Maximum Working Tension UTS/FoSClashing Span (Maximum Span) 1.2 x Basic SpanGround Clearance Curve, ordinate tensionreduction, % @ 15°C 20%Erection Sags/Tensions,* overtension % @ 15°C 10%Pretension (N) Use Tension at 5°C in Erection





TABLE 7.2. Specification For A Basic Span Of 100m - 150mm² ACSR

Straight Line Poles SpecificationIntermediate Poles To Drawings A001 (11 kV) Stout Grade PolesIntermediate Poles To Drawings A002 (33 kV) Stout Grade PolesSection Pole To Drawing A003 Stout Grade PolesSection 'H' Pole To Drawings A004 And A005 Medium Grade 'H' Poles

NOTE




Angle/Terminal Poles SpecificationINTERMEDIATE ANGLE TO DRAWING A002 Maximum Angle of Line Deviation is 5°Section Angle Pole To Drawing A003 Maximum Angle of Line Deviation is 30°Section 'H' Angle Pole Drawings A004 And A005 Angle of Line Deviation 30° to 60° maxTee Off To Drawing A007 Withstand Strut Load imposed on poles


'H' Terminal Pole To Drawing A009 Withstand Strut Load is 47kN, 2 stays perleg required

TABLE 7.4. Withstand Strut Loads Imposed On Pole For Various AnglesOf Line Deviation - 150mm² ACSR


Stays Required Set At45°

7/3.25mm 1 2 2 2 3 3 2/L 2/L 2/L 2/L 2/L 2/LOr 7/4.00mm - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - - -






ACSR 150mm² DINGO 100m BASIC SPANORDINATES FOR UPLIFT/GROUND CLEARANCE CURVES






TEMP TENSION SAG (m) FOR SPAN LENGTH (m)°C kN 60 70 80 90 100 110 120-6 8.89 0.26 0.35 0.46 0.58 0.71 0.86 1.020 7.89 0.29 0.39 0.51 0.65 0.80 0.97 1.165 7.14 0.32 0.43 0.57 0.72 0.89 1.07 1.2810 6.47 0.35 0.48 0.63 0.79 0.98 1.18 1.4115 5.89 0.39 0.53 0.69 0.87 1.08 1.30 1.5520 5.38 0.42 0.58 0.75 0.95 1.18 1.42 1.6925 4.95 0.46 0.63 0.82 1.04 1.28 1.55 1.8430 4.58 0.50 0.68 0.88 1.12 1.38 1.67 1.9935 4.27 0.53 0.73 0.95 1.20 1.48 1.79 2.1440 4.00 0.57 0.78 1.01 1.28 1.58 1.92 2.2845 3.77 0.61 0.82 1.08 1.36 1.68 2.03 2.4250 3.56 0.64 0.87 1.14 1.44 1.78 2.15 2.5665 3.09 0.74 1.00 1.31 1.66 2.05 2.48 2.9575 2.86 0.80 1.09 1.42 1.79 2.21 2.68 3.19

TABLE 7.7. Erection Sag And Tension - 100m Basic Span - 150mm² ACSR

TEMP TENSION SAG (m) FOR SPAN LENGTH (m)°C kN 60 70 80 90 100 110 1200 8.73 0.26 0.36 0.46 0.59 0.73 0.88 1.042 8.39 0.27 0.37 0.48 0.61 0.75 0.91 1.094 8.06 0.28 0.38 0.50 0.64 0.79 0.95 1.136 7.74 0.29 0.40 0.52 0.66 0.82 0.99 1.188 7.43 0.31 0.42 0.54 0.69 0.85 1.03 1.2310 7.14 0.32 0.43 0.57 0.72 0.89 1.07 1.2812 6.87 0.33 0.45 0.59 0.75 0.92 1.12 1.3314 6.60 0.35 0.47 0.61 0.78 0.96 1.16 1.3816 6.35 0.36 0.49 0.64 0.81 1.00 1.21 1.4418 6.11 0.37 0.51 0.66 0.84 1.04 1.25 1.4920 5.89 0.39 0.53 0.69 0.87 1.07 1.30 1.5522 5.68 0.40 0.55 0.71 0.90 1.11 1.35 1.6124 5.48 0.42 0.57 0.74 0.94 1.16 1.40 1.6626 5.29 0.43 0.59 0.77 0.97 1.20 1.45 1.72



8. Constructional Specification For 300mm² HDA - Code Name ‘Butterfly’

TABLE 8.1. Design Criteria - 300mm² HDA

HDA 300mm² Butterfly VALUEConductor UTS (N) 48740Diameter (mm) 23.25Weight (kg/m) 0.888Cross sectional area (mm²) 322.7Modulus of Elasticity (N/mm²) 55900Coefficient of Linear Exp. (°C) 0.000023Ice diameter (mm) 20Conductor wind pressure (N/sq.m) 380Freezing Point Tension (N) 8756Anti Vibration Constraint 20% of UTS @ 5°CConductor Factor of Safety (FoS) 3.93 (Calculated on the UTS of the

conductor fittings so as not to givea Maximum Working Tension ofmore than 17792N (4000lbf))

Maximum Working Tension 17792NClashing Span (Maximum Span) 1.2 x Basic SpanGround Clearance Curve, ordinate tensionreduction, % @ 15°C 20%Erection Sags/Tensions,* overtension % @ 15°C 10%Pretension (N) Use Tension at 5°C in Erection





TABLE 8.2. Specification For A Basic Span Of 100 Metres - 300mm² HDA

Straight Line Poles SpecificationIntermediate Poles To Drawings A002 Stout Grade PolesSection Pole To Drawing A003 Stout Grade PolesSection ‘H’ Pole To Drawings A004 And A005 Medium Grade 'H' Poles

NOTE


TABLE 8.3. Strut Loads - 300mm² HDA


Angle/Terminal Poles SpecificationIntermediate Angle To Drawing A002 Maximum Angle of Line Deviation is 5°Section Angle Pole To Drawing A003 Maximum Angle of Line Deviation is 30°Section 'H' Angle Pole Drawings A004 And A005 Angle of Line Deviation 30° to 60° maxTee Off To Drawing A007 Withstand Strut Load imposed on poles

by Tee Off is 58kN, 3 stays per legrequired. (or 2 x 7/4.00 stays per leg)

'H' Terminal Pole To Drawing A009 Withstand Strut Load is 58kN, 3 stays perleg required.(or 2 x 7/4.00 stays per leg)

TABLE 8.4. Withstand Strut Loads Imposed On Pole For Various AnglesOf Line Deviation - 300mm² HDA


Stays Required Set At45°

7/3.25mm 1 2 2 3 3 3 2/L 2/L 2/L 3/L 3/L 3/Lor 7/4.00mm - - - 2 2 - - - - 2/L 2/L 2/L




TABLE 8.5. Sag And Tension Tables - 300mm² HDA

The vibration or other fixed tension 9748 (N) at 5°C produces a calculated FPT10754 (N) at a temperature 0°C, and the ratio of conductor UTS to this tension is5.56.

HDA 300mm² BUTTERFLY 100m Basic SpanOrdinates For Uplift/Ground Clearance Curves


Ordinates for plotting uplift curves are based on conductor tensions. Ordinates for plottingground clearance curves assume the use of new conductors and include, if required, anallowance for long term creep over a period of 25 years The allowance used here is equivalentto a reduction of 20% of the design tension values at temperature 15°C.



TABLE 8.6. Design Sag And Tension - 100m Basic Span - 300mm² HDA


TABLE 8.7. Erection Sag And Tension - 100m Basic Span - 300mm² HDA




9. Constructional Specification For Pole Foundations

TABLE 9.1. Foundations For Normal Spanning In Ground Of'Good/Average' Class

Pole Augered Hole Hand/Machine HolesLength Depth Pole Grade Depth Pole GradeMetres Metres Medium Stout Metres Medium Stout

8.5 P P U T9.0 P P U T9.5 2.4 P P 1.6 U T(95)10.0 P P U T(90)10.5 P P U T(90)11.0 P P U T11.5 2.4 P P 1.8 U T12.0 P U U T13.0 P U U T14.0 2.4 P U 2.1 U T15.0 P U U T16.0 P N/A P T17.0 2.4 P N/A 2.4 P T18.0 P N/A P T20.0 STOUT - Hand/ Machine dig to 3m - no baulks required

P -indicates unaided poleU -indicates upper 1.3m baulk fitted.T -indicates twin 1.3m baulks fitted

T(n) -indicates twin 1.3m baulk fitted and span downrated to (n)%of normal (Where n is the number following T)

N/A - Not applicable. Hole to be hand/machine excavated and twin1.3m baulks fitted

NOTE

The preferred method of pole hole excavation is by augering.





Database Ref: 39 File Ref: Criteria for Maintenanceof Single Circuit HV Lines Feb2001



Criteria for Maintenance

of Single Circuit HV Lines

East Midlands Electricity Criteria For Maintenance Of Single Circuit HV LinesOverhead Lines Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Criteria For Maintenance Of SingleCircuit HV Lines Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 4 Version: 2

Revision Log For Criteria For Maintenance Of Single CircuitHV Lines







1. MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING SINGLE CIRCUIT HV LINES

When assessing the level of line maintenance, or refurbishing, careful consideration shall begiven to the age and condition of supports, conductors, fittings, line topography and heightAbove Ordnance Datum. Overhead Lines over 25 years old are particularly vulnerable togeneral deterioration, such as rotten poles, worn fittings and corroded conductors. Beforedeciding the amount of work required checks should be taken on a selected number of linecomponents. It is difficult to assess the actual sampling of component(s), but generally itwould be reasonable to check 1 in 10 supports complete with fittings and samples of originalconductor approximately two kilometre intervals on long lines, or just a single sample onshort lines.

Where it is practical in the case of a renovation scheme to bring a line up to modern standardconstruction, the same approach should be taken as specified in the document ‘Design of HVSingle Circuit Overhead Lines on Wood Poles’. However, cases will arise where theinvestment in a current route is such that new construction cannot be economically achieved.In these cases a partial re-build maybe the most economical option.

1.1 Pole Changes

For the occasional pole change(s) on lines use the standard crossarms specified in thedocument ‘Design of HV Single Circuit Overhead Lines on Wood Poles’. Considerationshould also be given to decreasing the span lengths and implementing the failure containmentpolicy as specified in the document ‘Design of HV Single Circuit Overhead Lines on WoodPoles’ to enhance security of the line under extreme weather conditions. When changingpoles it would be prudent to replace fittings and insulators with modern equivalents.

1.2 Conductors

The decision whether to re-conductor will be influenced by the number of repair joints foundon the line and also by its condition, i.e. is it corroded or severely damaged. Tests forassessing the condition of old conductor are described in Volume 4 of the Overhead LineManual. All lines shall be re-conductored in accordance with the document ‘Design of HVSingle Circuit Overhead Lines on Wood Poles’, including replacing 40mm² ACSR with50mm² ACSR.





Database Ref: 40 File Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 7 HVSingle Circuit Drawings &Materials JAN 2002



HV Single Circuit

Drawings and Materials

East Midlands Electricity HV Single CircuitDistribution Business Drawings and Materials

Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 7 HV Single CircuitDrawings & Materials JAN 2002


REVISION LOG

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date1 M. Richardson D. Howard I.E. Burton - 12/02/99Notes: Full revision of content and style.

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date2Notes: Items E313B and C replaced by item E361. Tables A003, A005 & A009 amended.

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date 3 DEC2000

T Haggis Dec 2000

Notes: Drawings tidied up for clarity

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date4 - Jan2002

T Haggis Jan 2002

Notes: Drawings A004 & A005 - max deviation correctd from 30 to 60 deg




CONTENTS

1. A001 Single Pole, Single Crossarm, Intermediate 100mm² 150mm² ACSR 4

1.1 Materials List A001. 4

1.2 Drawing A001. 5

2. A002 Single Pole, Double Crossarm, Intermediate / Running Angle 6

2.1 Materials List A002. 6

2.2 Drawing A002. 7

3. A003. Single Pole, Double Crossarm, Section 8

3.1 Materials List A003 8

3.2 Drawing A003 9

4. A004. 'H' Pole, Double Crossarm, Section – 10


4.2 Drawing A004. 11

5. A005. 'H' Pole, Double Crossarm, Section (Occasional Long Span) 12



6. A006. Single Pole, Double Crossarm, Tee Off 50mm² ACSR 14



7. A007. Tee-Off Pole 11kV/33kV 16



8. A008. Single Pole, Terminal, 50MM² ACSR Only 18



9. A009. 'H' Pole, Terminal 20



10. A010. Single Pole, Single Crossarm, Intermediate 50mm² ACSR 22


Drawing A010. 50mm2 ACSR 23




1. A001 Single Pole, Single Crossarm, Intermediate 100mm² 150mm² ACSR

1.1 Materials List A001.

3φφφφ 11kV 33kVDRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 100mm²

150mm² 150mm²E113 Pole 1 1

- M20 x 45mm bolt/nut 2 2- M20 x 50mm bolt/nut 2 2

E229 Intermediate crossarm 1 1E230 Crossarm strut 2 2E243 Insulator bracket 1 1E508 Pole safety sign 1 1E303 11kv pin insulator 3 -E305 33kv line post insulator - 3E310 Insulator pin 10kn 230mm 2 -E310 Insulator pin 10kn 305mm 1 -E260 Curved square washer m20 4 4E261 Flat square washer m20 2 2

- Flat round washer m20 6 6- Helical insulator tie top (size related) 3 -- Helical post insulator tie top (size related) - 3- Double helical post insulator tie top - 3- Circuit identification plate - A.R- Number nails A.R A.R

Pole boltsMEDIUM

POLESSTOUT /

EXTRA STOUTPOLES

M20 x 260mm pole bolt/nutM20 x 300mm pole bolt/nut

4-

-4

PER BLOCK FITTEDKicking block NORMAL

USE--

E111E111E260E261

M20 x 450mm pole bolt/nutM20 x 530mm pole bolt/nutWood stay/ kicking block type 1 850mmWood stay/ kicking block type 2 1300mmCurved square washerFlat square washer

1-1-11

-ALTERNATIVE

-ALTERNATIVE

--

A.R - AS REQUIRED




1.2 Drawing A001.

DETAILS REMOVEDNOTES MOD

WAS ESI DRG 434003WITH MODS

NOTES1 FIT M20 POLE BOLTS EACH WITH 2 WASHERSAT POLE TOP. (ANTI SPLIT BOLTS)2 ALL GALVANISED BOLTS TO BE M20 EACH WITH NUT

INSULATORS TO SUITVOLTAGE SYSTEM

E229

E243

DISTRIBUTION TIE

MINOR MODS

2 NO. M20*50 BOLTS EACH COMPLETEWITH 1 ROUND WASHER

C13-10-92

A

B

MHM

TP

14-7-92

MHM

9-7-91

ADB

AS GROUDCONDITIONS DICTATE

GROUND LEVEL

E111

FOR 33 KV-ADDITIONALCIRCUIT IDENTIFICATIONPLATE E504 REQUIRED

2 N0. M20*45 BOLTS EACHCOMPLETE WITH 1 ROUNDWASHER

NOTE

E503

E508

E230

SINGLE POLE, SINGLE CROSS ARMINTERMEDIATE, 100MM. 150MM ACSR


APPROVED BY

CHECKED BY

CAD INPUT

DRAWN BY

HBH

RKP

ADB A001JAN 1994

APR 1991

APR 1991

Scale N.T.S. Class-

E113

SEE NOTE 1




2. A002 Single Pole, Double Crossarm, Intermediate / Running Angle

2.1 Materials List A002.INTERMEDIATE RUNNING ANGLE

1φφφφ 3φφφφ 11kV 33kV 1φφφφ 3φφφφ 11kV 33kVDRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

50mm²

50mm²100mm²150mm²

150mm²300mm² 50mm²

50mm²100mm²150mm²

150mm²300mm²

E113 Pole 1 1 1 1 1 1M20 x 45mm bolt/nut 4 4 4 3 3 3M20 x 50mm bolt/nut - 2 2 - 2 2M20 x 60mm bolt/nut 4 4 4 5 5 5M20 galv. Mild steel full nut - - - 1 1 1

E229 Intermediate crossarm 2 2 2 2 2 2E230 Crossarm strut 4 4 4 4 4 4E238 Strap for section pole 2 2 2 2 2 2E243 Insulator bracket - 1 1 - 1 1E508 Pole safety sign 1 1 1 1 1 1E303 11kv pin insulator 2 3 - 2 3 -E305 33kv line post insulator - - 3 - - 3E310 Insulator pin 10kn 230mm ref29 2 2 - 2 2 -E310 Insulator pin 10kn 305mm ref31 - 1 - - 1 -E260 Curved square washer m20 4 4 4 4 4 4

Flat round washer m20 14 16 16 16 18 18Helical insulator tie top (size related) 2 3 - - - -Helical insulator tie side (size related) - - - 2 3 -Helical post ins: tie top (size related) - - 3 or - - -Helical post ins: dble tie top (size related) - - 3 - - -Helical post ins: tie side (size related) - - - - - 3 orHelical post ins: dble tie side (size related) - - - - - 3Circuit identification plate - - A.R - - A.RNumber nails A.R A.R A.R A.R A.R A.R

POLE BOLTS MEDIUM POLES STOUT / E STOUT POLESM20 x 260mm pole bolt/nut 4M20 x 300mm pole bolt/nut - 4

PER BLOCK FITTEDKICKING BLOCK NORMAL USE

M20 x 450mm pole bolt/nut M20 x 450mm pole bolt/nut 1M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut ALTERNATIVE

E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 1 Wood stay/ kicking block type1

1

E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 2 Wood stay/ kicking block type2

ALTERNATIVE

E260 Curved square washer Curved square washer 1E261 Flat square washer Flat square washer 1

A.R - AS REQUIRED




2.2 Drawing A002.

26

02

mm

E238

E111

GROUND LEVEL

AS GROUNDCONDITIONS DICTATE

E238

4 NO. M20*60 BOLTS EACHCOMPLETE WITH 2 NO. ROUNDMETAL WASHERS

NOTES1 ALL GALVANISED BOLTS TO BE M20 EACH WITH NUT

2 FIT M20 POLE BOLTS EACH WITH 2 WASHERS AT POLE TOP. (ANTI SPLIT BOLTS)

3 WHEN A SINGLE PHASE LINE IS REQUIRED THE STANDARD OF CONSTRUCTION TO BE APPROPRIATE TO THREE PHASE OPERATION, THE CENTRE CONDUCTOR BEING OMITTED

4 MAY BE USED UP TO A MAXIMUM ANGLE OF DEVIATION OF 10° FOR 50 SQ MM ACSR, 5° FOR OTHER CONDUCTORS

E503

E508

E229

STAY BOND

1200 mm

E2302 N0. M20*45 BOLTS EACHCOMPLETE WITH 1 ROUNDWASHER

NOTEFOR 33 KV-ADDITIONALCIRCUIT IDENTIFICATIONPLATE E504 REQUIRED

E243


1200 mm

E113

STAY ASSEMBLY

DISTRIBUTION TIE

SEE NOTE 2

INSULATORS TO SUITVOLTAGE SYSTEM

CHECKED BY

APPROVED BY

DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

SINGLE POLE, DOUBLE CROSSARMINTERMEDIATE / RUNNING ANGLE


HBH

ADBRKP

APR 1991

APR 1991

JAN 1994

A002Scale Class-N.T.S.




3. A003. Single Pole, Double Crossarm, Section

3.1 Materials List A003IN LINE SECTION SECTION ANGLE

1φφφφ 3φφφφ11kV

33kV 1φφφφ 3φφφφ====11kV

33kV

DRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION50

mm²

50/100150mm²

150mm²

300mm²

50mm²50/100

150mm²

150mm²

300mm²

E113 Pole 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1M20 x 45mm bolt/nut 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3M20 x 60mm bolt/nut - - - - 1 1 1 1M20 x 70mm bolt/nut 4 8 8 8 4 8 8 8M20 galv. Mild steel full nut 4 8 8 8 5 9 9 9

E213 Section crossarm 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2E230 Crossarm strut 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4E238 Strap for section pole 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2E239 Strap for terminal crossarm - 2 2 2 - 2 2 2E249 Tie rod threaded both ends 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2E508 Pole safety sign 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1E303 11kv pin insulator - 1 - - 1 2 - -E305 33kv line post insulator - - 1 1 - - 2 2E306 Disc insulator, porcelain 4 6 18 18 4 6 18 18E310 Pilot insulator pin (straight) - 1 - - 1 2 - -E312 Clevis ended socket adaptor - - - 6 - - - 6E361 Ball ended hook 4 6 6 - 4 6 6 -E317 Socket tongue 4 6 6 - 4 6 6 -

OHJ142 Bolted anchor clamp (size related) 4 6 6 - 4 6 6 -OHJ20 Lug, comp: double bolt fixing 300mm²

HDA- - - 6 - - - 6

OHL143 Backplate with washers and nuts - - - 6 - - - 6OHJ60 Comp: tension termination 300mm² HDA - - - 6 - - - 6

OHJ110 Aluminium wedge tap (size related) 2 3 3 - 2 3 3 -E260 Curved square washer M20 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Flat round washer M20 22 28 27 27 26 32 30 30Helical ins: tie top (size related) - 1 - - - - - -Helical ins: tie side (size related) - - - - 1 2 - -Helical post ins: tie top (size related) - - 1 1 - - - -Helical post ins: tie side (size related) - - - - - - 2 2Circuit identification plate - - A.R A.R - - A.R A.RNumber nails A.R A.R A.R A.R A.R A.R A.R A.R

Pole bolts MEDIUM POLES STOUT /EXTRA STOUTPOLES

M20 x 260mm pole bolt/nutM20 x 300mm pole bolt/nut

4-

-4

PER BLOCK FITTEDKicking block NORMAL USE

E111E111E260E261

M20 x 450mm pole bolt/nutM20 x 530mm pole bolt/nutWood stay/ kicking block type 1 850mmWood stay/ kicking block type 2 1300mmCurved square washerFlat square washer

1-1-11

-ALTERNATIVE

-ALTERNATIVE

--

A.R - AS REQUIRED




3.2 Drawing A003

CHECKED BYAPPROVED BY

DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

13-10-92

ADB

9-7-91

MHM

B

A

POLE SIZETABLE DELETED


2 N0. M20*45 BOLTS EACHCOMPLETE WITH 1 ROUNDWASHER

3000MM MINIMUM

E111

AS GROUD CONDITIONS DICTATE

380

500

NOTE

FOR 33 KV-ADDITIONAL CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION PLATE REQUIRED E504

GROUND LEVEL

NOTES1 ALL GALVANISED BOLTS TO BE M20 EACH WITH NUT

2 FIT M20 POLE BOLTS EACH WITH 2 WASHERSAT POLE TOP. (ANTI SPLIT BOLTS )


4 50 MM ACSR BARE ANGLE OF DEVIATION 60° 50 MM ACSR P.V.C. ANGLE OF DEVIATION 60° ALL OTHER ANGLE OF DEVIATION 30°

E503

)

E508

STAY ASSEMBLY

STAY BOND

THIS INSULATOR & PIN USEDON ANGLED POLE ONLY

INSULATOR TO SUIT SYSTEM VOLTAGE

1400

2

2

UNDERSLUNG ON STRAIGHTLINE SECTION POLE

450 FOR 11KV

500 FOR 33KV

E230E213

1400

E238 E239

4 NO. M20*70 BOLTSEACH COMPLETE WITH1 NO. M20 ROUND METALWASHER &1NO. FULL NUT FOR LOCKING

E249 E238

SINGLE POLE, DOUBLE CROSSARMSECTION


HBH

ADBRKP

APR 1991

APR 1991

JAN 1994

A003Scale Class-N.T.S.

E113

DISTRIBUTION TIE

SEE NOTE 2

FOR TERMINATIONSEE DRG NO. A032

E361

E361

NUMBER OF INSULATORSTO SUIT VOLTAGE




4. A004. 'H' Pole, Double Crossarm, Section –

4.1 Materials List A004IN LINE SECTION SECTION ANGLE

3φφφφ 11kV 33kV 3φφφφ 11kV 33kVDRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 50mm²

100mm²150mm²

150mm² 300mm²50mm²100mm²150mm²

150mm² 300mm²

E113 Poles 2 2 2 2 2 2M20 x 60mm bolt/nut - - - 2 2 2M20 x 70mm bolt/nut 6 6 6 6 6 6M20 galv. Mild steel full nut 6 6 6 6 6 6

E111 Brace block type 1 2600 mm 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1*E213 Section crossarm 2 2 2 2 2 2E238 Strap for section pole 3 3 3 3 3 3E244 Underground brace bars 2 * 2 * 2 * 2 * 2 * 2 *E249 Tie rod threaded both ends 1 1 1 1 1 1E508 Pole safety sign 1 1 1 1 1 1E303 11kv pin insulator 2 - - 2 - -E305 33kv line post insulator - 2 2 - 2 2E306 Disc insulator, porcelain 6 18 18 6 18 18E310 Pilot insulator pin (straight) 2 - - 2 - -E312 Clevis ended socket adaptor - - 6 - - 6E361 Ball ended eye hook 6 6 6 6 6 6E317 Socket tongue 6 6 - 6 6 -

OHJ142 Bolted anchor clamp (size related) 6 6 - 6 6 -OHJ20 Lug, compression double bolt fixing - - 6 - - 6

OHJ143 Backplate with washers and nuts - - 6 - - 6OHJ60 Compression tension termination 300mm² hda - - 6 - - 6

OHJ110 Aluminium wedge tap (size related) 3 3 - 3 3 -E260 Curved square washer m20 12 12 12 12 12 12E261 Flat square washer m20 2 2 2 2 2 2

Flat round washer m20 24 22 22 28 26 26Helical ins: tie top (size related) 2 - - - - -Helical ins: tie side (size related) - - - 2 - -Helical post ins: tie top (size related) - 2 2 - - -Helical post ins: tie side (size related) - - - - 2 2Circuit identification plate - A.R A.R - A.R A.RNumber nails A.R A.R A.R A.R A.R A.R

Pole boltsMEDIUM

POLESSTOUT / EXTRA STOUT

POLESM20 x 260mm pole bolt/nut 6 -M20 x 300mm pole bolt/nut 2 6M20 x 375mm pole bolt/nut - 2M20 x 450mm pole bolt/nut 2 -M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut - 2

PER BLOCK FITTEDKicking block NORMAL USEM20 x 450mm pole bolt/nut 1 -M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut - ALTERNATIVE

E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 1 850mm 1 -E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 2 1300mm - ALTERNATIVEE260 Curved square washer 1 -E261 Flat square washer 1 -

* Underground Brace Bars & Brace Blocks not required when poles are augered to 2.4 mdepthA.R - AS REQUIRED




4.2 Drawing A004.


CHECKED BY

APPROVED BY

ADB

DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

APR 1991

APR 1991

JAN 1994

Scale Class-N.T.S.

13-10-92

ADB

9-7-91

MHM

B

A

POLE SIZETABLE DELETED

1400

STAY BOND

HBH

RKP

E238

500

UNDERSLUNG ON ANGLESOF DEVIATION OVER 30°

INSULATOR TO SUIT SYSTEM VOLTAGE

STAY

STAY

E213

450 F

OR

11K

V500 F

OR

33K

V

UNDERSLUNG ONSTRAIGHT LINESECTIONS

E503

E508

3000 M

INIM

UM

E111E111

E244

GROUND LEVEL

E244

E111 SEE NOTE 3

1934 CENTRES

SEE NOTE 2

E238

E249 E249

6 NO. M20*70 BOLTS EACH C/W2 NO. ROUND WASHERS & 1 NO.FULL NUT FOR LOCKING

A004

'H' POLE DOUBLE CROSSARM SECTION


1400

NOTES1 ALL GALVANISED BOLTS TO BE M20 EACH WITH NUT TO BS4190

2 FIT M20 POLE BOLTS EACH WITH 2 WASHERS AT POLE TOP. (ANTI SPLIT BOLTS

3 TYPE 1 BLOCKS LAID TOGETHER TO FORM A FOOTING WHERE UNSUITABLE GROUND CONDITIONS EXIST


5 MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE 60°

6 CROSS BRACE E 244 & BLOCKS E 111 NOT REQUIRED WHEN POLES ARE AUGERED

380

E113

SEE NOTE 6

DISTRIBUTION TIE

SEE NOTE 2


E361

E361


CJan 2002

T H

Max angle of deviation corrected from 30 to 60 deg




5. A005. 'H' Pole, Double Crossarm, Section (Occasional Long Span)

5.1 Materials List A005

IN LINESECTION

SECTION ANGLE

3φφφφ11kV

33kV 3φφφφ11kV

33kV

DRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 50100150mm²

150mm²

300mm²

50100

150mm²

150mm²

300mm²

E113 Poles 2 2 2 2 2 2M20 x 60mm bolt/nut - - - 2 2 2M20 x 70mm bolt/nut 6 6 6 6 6 6M20 galv. Mild steel full nut 6 6 6 6 6 6

E111 Brace block type 2 3000 mm 1 1 1 1 1 1E214 Long span h pole section crossarm 2 2 2 2 2 2E238 Strap for section pole 3 3 3 3 3 3E248 Underground brace bars 2500mm centre 2 2 2 2 2 2E249 Tie rod threaded both ends 4 4 4 4 4 4E508 Pole safety sign 1 1 1 1 1 1E303 11kv pin insulator 2 - - 2 - -E305 33kv line post insulator - 2 2 - 2 2E306 Disc insulator, porcelain 6 18 18 6 18 18E310 Pilot insulator pin (straight) ref50 2 - - 2 - -E312 Clevis ended socket adaptor - - 6 - - 6E361 Ball ended hook 6 6 - 6 6 -E317 Socket tongue 6 6 - 6 6 -

OHL142 Bolted anchor clamp (size related) 6 6 - 6 6 -OHJ20 Lug, compression double bolt fixing 300mm² hda - - 6 - - 6

OHJ 143 Backplate with washers and nuts - - 6 - - 6OHJ 60 Compression tension termination 300mm² HDA - - 6 - - 6OHJ110 Aluminium wedge tap (size related) 3 3 - 3 3 -

Curved square washer m20 12 12 12 12 12 12Flat square washer m20 2 2 2 2 2 2Flat round washer m20 36 34 34 39 37 37

E260 Helical insulator tie top (size related) 2 - - - - -E261 Helical insulator tie side (size related) - - - 2 - -

Helical post insulator tie top (size related) - 2 2 - - -Helical post insulator tie side (size related) - - - - 2 2Circuit identification plate - A.r A.r - A.r A.rNumber nails A.r A.r A.r A.r A.r A.r

Pole boltsMedium

PolesStout / extra stout

PolesM20 x 260mm pole bolt/nut 6 -M20 x 300mm pole bolt/nut 2 6M20 x 375mm pole bolt/nut - 2M20 x 450mm pole bolt/nut 2 -M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut - 2

Per block FittedKicking block Normal use

M20 x 450mm pole bolt/nut 1 -M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut - Alternative

E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 1 850mm 1 -E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 2 1300mm - AlternativeE260 Curved square washer 1 -E261 Flat square washer 1 -

A.R - AS REQUIRED* Underground Brace Bars & Brace Blocks not required when poles are augered to 2.4 mdepth




5.2 Drawing A005.



ADB

DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

APR 1991

APR 1991

JAN 1994

Scale Class-N.T.S.

ADB

9-7-91

A

HBH

RKP

2000

2500 CENTRES

E113

A005WAS ESI DRG 434007WITH MODS

'H' POLEDOUBLE CROSSARM SECTION (OCCASIONAL LING SPAN)

TYPE 1 BLOCKS LAID TOGETHER TOFORM A FOOTING WHERE UNSUITABLEGROUND EXISTS

SEE NOTE 2

E111

E214

190 m

m

380

410

GROUND LEVEL

E111

E248

6 N0. M20*70 BOLTS EACH COMPLETE WITH 2 N0. ROUND WASHERS & 1 NO FULL NUT FOR LOCKING

13-10-92

MHM

BPOLE SIZETABLE DELETED

E503

E508

3000 M

INIM

UM

E111

E238

E238

E249 E249

E238

E249E249

STAY

600

E248

2000

STAY BOND

UNDERSLUNG ONSTRAIGHT LINE SECTIONS

E214

INSULATORS TO SUIT SYSTEM VOLTAGE

450 F

OR

11K

V500 F

OR

33K

V

STAY

UNDERSLUNG ON ANGLES OFDEVIATION OVER 30°

SEE NOTE 6

NOTES1 ALL GALVANISED BOLTS TO BE M20 EACH WITH NUT TO BS4190

2 FIT M20 POLE BOLTS EACH WITH 2 WASHERS AT POLE TOP. (ANTI SPLIT BOLTS

3 TYPE 1 BLOCKS LAID TOGETHER TO FORM A FOOTING WHERE UNSUITABLE GROUND CONDITIONS EXIST


5 MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE 60°


DISTRIBUTION TIE

SEE NOTE 2

E361

E361


CJan 2002

T H

Max angle of deviation corrected from 30 to 60 deg




6. A006. Single Pole, Double Crossarm, Tee Off 50mm² ACSR


TEE OFFDRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 1φφφφ 11kV 3φφφφ 11kV

M20 x 45mm bolt/nut 3 3M20 x 60mm bolt/nut 1 1M20 x 70mm bolt/nut 4 6M20 galv. Mild steel full nut 4 6

E219 Crossarm member 2.6m 2 2E230 Crossarm strut 4 4E239 Strap for terminal crossarm 2 3E249 Tie rod threaded both ends 2 2E361 Ball ended eye hook 2 3E317 Socket tongue 2 3

OHJ142 Bolted anchor clamp (3 bolt fitting) 2 3E306 Disc insulator, porcelain 2 3

Flat round washer m20 18 20Number nails A.R A.R

POLE BOLTSSTOUT / E STOUT

POLESM20 X 300mm POLE BOLT/NUT 2

TEE OFFPILOT INSULATORS 1φ 11kV 3φ 11kV

50mm² 50mm²E303 11kV PIN INSULATOR A.R A.RE311 PILOT INSULATOR PIN (SCREW IN) A.R A.R

HELICAL INSULATOR TIE TOP (50mm²) A.R A.R

A.R - AS REQUIRED




6.2 Drawing A006.

A006ADB

"X"

WAS ESI DRG 434008WITH MODS REDRAWN

3 FOR DEAD LINE ERECTION THE TEE-OFF CROSSARM SHOULD BE POSITIONED SO THAT WHEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE MAIN OVERHEAD LINE A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF 1.1M MAY BE OBTAINED BETWEEN THE CROSSARM, CRAFTSMEN PLUS TOOLS AND THE NEAREST LIVE POINT.

5 BONDING BETWEEN CROSSARM IS NOT PERMITED

4 CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED TO ENSURE ADEQUATE GROUND CLEARANCE IN FIRST SPAN OF TEED LINE CLEARANCE IN FIRST SPAN OF TEED LINE

3000M

M M

INIM

UM

IS SHOWN WHERE X=2.4M MINIMUM THIS ALLOWS 1.1MSAFETY CLEARANCE TO LOWEST LIVE POINT (BAIL), PLUSHALF TEE-OFF CROSSARM LENGTH.

1 THE CASE OF LIVE LINE ERECTION OF TEE-OFF CROSSARM

2 FOR LIVE LINE ERECTION A POLE TOP MAKE OFF SHOULDNOT BE USED. TWO STAY STRAPS ARE REQUIRED, ONESTRAP IS FITTED AT CROSSARM BOLT AND ONE AT TIE STRAP BOLT.

NOTES

NOTE 5 MOD

A

B

MHM

20- 11-92

23-7-91

TP

ADB

MHM

GROUND LEVEL

E249

E503

E508

E309

E113

E239

MAXIMUM LENGTH OFUNSUPPORTED JUMPER 2.5M


SINGLE POLE, SINGLE CROSS ARMTEE OFF (50MM ACSR)

Scale


CAD INPUT

DRAWN BY

RKPADB

JAN 1994JUL 1991

JUL 1991

2

N.T.S. Class-

E230

E219

E361




7. A007. Tee-Off Pole 11kV/33kV


TEE OFFDRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 3φφφφ 11kV 33kV

50mm²100mm²150mm²

150mm² 300mm²

E113 Pole 1 1 1M20 x 70mm bolt/nut 6 6 6M20 galv. Mild steel full nut 6 6 6

E111 Brace block - type 1 2600 mm 1* 1* 1*E219 Crossarm member 2.6m 2 2 2E239 Strap for terminal crossarm 3 3 3E249 Tie rod threaded both ends 3 3 3E312 Clevis ended socket adaptor - - 3E361 Ball ended eye hook 3 3 3E317 Socket tongue 3 3 -

OHJ142 Bolted anchor clamp (size related) 3 3 -OHJ60 Compression tension termination - - 3

OHL143 Backplate with washers and nuts 3E306 Disc insulator porcelain 3 9 9E260 Curved square washer M20 6 6 6E261 Flat square washer M20 2 2 2

Flat round washer 20 20 20Circuit identification plate - A.R A.R

POLE BOLTSSTOUT / EXTRA STOUT

POLESM20 x 300mm pole bolt/nut 4M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut 2

TEE OFFPILOT INSULATORS 3φφφφ 11kV 33kV

50mm²100mm²150mm²

150mm² 300mm²

E303 11kv pin insulator A.R A.R A.RE311 Pilot insulator pin (screw in) A.R A.R A.R

S/work, bolts and nuts for pilot ins: A.R A.R A.RHelical insulator tie top (50mm²) A.R A.R A.RA.R - AS REQUIRED

* Brace Blocks not required when poles are augered to 2.4 m depth




7.2 Drawing A007.

ADBA007

POLE SIZE TABLE DELETED

CROSSARM WAS 216E239 & E249 REPLACEE224

E113

NOTES

1 THE TEE OFF CROSSARM SHOULD BE POSITIONED SO THAT WHEN DISCONNECTED, 1.1M MINIMUM MAY BE OBTAINED BETWEEN THE CROSSARM, CRAFTSMAN PLUS TOOLS AND THE NEAREST LIVE POINT

2 MAXIMUM UNSUPPORTED JUMPER LENGTH IS 2.5M

3 NO BONDING PERMITED BETWEEN CROSSARMS.

A

B

MHM

MHM

18- 11-92

13-10-92

JP

GROUND LEVEL

E113

E508

E503

3000 M

INIM

UM

CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATIONPLATE E504 REQUIRED

FOR 33KV ADDITIONALNOTE


4 FOR LIVE LINE TAPPINGS USE COVERED COVERED FLEX WEDGED ON TO A SHORT JUMPER AT TERMINATION AND ON TO BAIL CLAMP ASSEMBLY ON LINE.

5 ALL GALVANISED BOLTS TO BE M20 EACH WITH NUT

TEE - OFF POLE 11KV/33KV

JAN 1994

JUL 1991

JUL 1991

JUL 1991


CAD INPUT

DRAWN BY

RKP

ADB

ADB

Scale N.T.S. Class-

E113

E249

E306

WEDGE OR BAIL CLAMP ARRANGEMENTFOR L.L. TAPPING

E219

E243

E239

E230

E229

INSULATOR TOSUIT VOLTAGE

SEE NOTE 4


E361NUMBER OF INSULATORSTO SUIT VOLTAGE




8. A008. Single Pole, Terminal, 50MM² ACSR Only


TERMINALDRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 1φφφφ 11kV 3φφφφ 11kVE113 Pole 1 1

M20 x 45mm bolt/nut 2 2M20 x 60mm bolt/nut 2 2M20 x 70mm bolt/nut 4 6M20 galv. Mild steel full nut 6 8

E219 Crossarm member 2.6m 2 2E230 Crossarm strut 4 4E239 Strap for terminal crossarm 2 3E249 Tie rod threaded both ends 2 2E508 Pole safety sign 1 1E361 Ball ended eye hook 2 3E317 Socket tongue 2 3

OHJ 142 Bolted anchor clamp (3 bolt fitting) 2 3E306 Disc insulator, porcelain 2 3

Curved square washer M20 4 4E260 Flat round washer M20 23 25

Number nails A.R A.R

Pole boltsSTOUT / EXTRA STOUT

POLESM20 x 300mm pole bolt/nut 4

PER BLOCK FITTEDKicking block NORMAL

USEM20 x 450mm pole bolt/nut 1 -M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut - ALTERNATIVE

E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 1 850mm 1 -E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 2 1300mm - ALTERNATIVEE260 Curved square washer 1 -E261 Flat square washer 1 1

A.r - as required




8.2 Drawing A008.

HBH A008

STAY


POLE TABLE DELETED DRG TITLE MOD

6 NO. M20*70 BOLTS EACH COMPLETEWITH 1 NO. ROUND WASHER PLUS1 NO. FULL NUT FOR LOCKING

E111 380

E239

A

B

MHM

ADB

13-10-92

10-7-91

E249

E508

E503

3000 M

INIM

UM

1 NO. ROUND WASHER.EACH COMPLETE WITH

GROUND LEVEL

500

WITH 2 NO. FULL NUTS AND 3 NO.WASHERS IN STRUT POSITION FORSTAY BOND.


SINGLE POLE, TERMINAL. 50MM ACSR ONLY

Scale


CAD INPUT

DRAWN BY

RKPADB

JAN 1994

APR 1991

APR 1991

NOTES


2 FIT M20 POLE BOLTS EACH WITH 2 WASHERS (ANTI SPLIT BOLTS)

3 WHEN A SINGLE PHASE LINE IS REQUIRED THE STANDARD OF CONSTRUCTION TO BE APPROPRIATE TO THREE PHASE OPERATION, OMITING THE CENTRE CONDUCTOR

4 BLOCKS E 111 NOT REQUIRED WHEN POLES ARE AUGERED

N.T.S. Class-

E113

E230

12001200

2 NO. M20*45 BOLTSFRONT CROSSARM

E219

2 NO. M20*60 BOLTS EACH COMPLETEREAR CROSSARM

SEE NOTE 2

FOR TERMINATION SEE DRG NO. A032

175

500STAY BOND

E361

SEE NOTE 4




9. A009. 'H' Pole, Terminal


TERMINALDRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 3φφφφ 11kV 33kV

100mm²150mm² 150mm² 300mm²

E114 Poles 2 2 2M20 x 70mm bolt/nut 6 6 6M20 galv. Mild steel full nut 6 6 6

E111 Brace block type 1 2600 mm 1* 1* 1*E219 Crossarm member 2.6m 2 2 2E239 Strap for terminal crossarm 3 3 3E244 Underground brace bars 1934mm cntrs 2* 2* 2*E249 Tie rod threaded both ends 3 3 3E508 Pole safety sign 1 1 1E306 Disc insulator porcelain 3 9 9E312 Clevis ended socket adaptor - - 3E361 Ball ended eye hook 3 3 3E317 Socket tongue 3 3 -

OHJ142 Bolted anchor clamp (size related) 3 3 -OHJ60 Comp: tension termination 300mm² HDA - - 6

OHJ 143 Backplate with washers and nuts 6E260 Curved square washer m20 12 12 12E261 Flat square washer m20 2 2 2

Flat round washers 22 22 22Circuit identification plate - A.R A.RNumber nails A.R A.R A.R

Pole boltsSTOUT / EXTRA STOUT

POLESM20 x 300mm pole bolt/nut 6M20 x 375mm pole bolt/nut 2M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut 2

A.R - AS REQUIRED

* Underground Brace Bars & Brace Blocks not required when poles are augered to 2.4 mdepth




9.2 Drawing A009.

E244

6 NO. M20*70 BOLTS EACH COMPLETEWITH 1 NO. ROUND WASHER PLUS1 NO. FULL NUT FOR LOCKING

SEE NOTE 3

REDRAWN PLANVIEW ADDED ETC

E239

A18-11-92

MHM

1934 CENTRES

E249

E244

E111


A009

H POLE TERMINAL


DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT JAN 1994

HEAD OFFICE

Scale

RKP

MHM NOV 1992

TP

Class-N.T.S.

NOTES

1 ALL GALVANISED BOLTS TO BE M20 EACH WITH NUT TO BS4190

2 FIT M20 POLE BOLTS EACH WITH 2 WASHERS AT POLE TOP. (ANTI SPLIT BOLTS )

3 TYPE 1 BLOCKS LAID TOGETHER TO FORM A FIRM FOOTING WHERE UNSUITABLE GROUND CONDITIONS EXIST


STAY

GROUND LEVEL

3000 M

INIM

UM

E111

E503

E508

E219

E114


SEE NOTE 2

FOR TERMINATIONSSEE DRG NO. A032

SEE NOTE 4

E361

E361




10. A010. Single Pole, Single Crossarm, Intermediate 50mm² ACSR


INTERMEDIATEDRG MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 1φφφφ 11kV 3φφφφ 11kV

50mm² 50mm²E113 Pole 1 1

M20 x 45mm bolt/nut 2 2M20 x 50mm bolt/nut - 2

E228 Intermediate crossarm - 50mm² max 1 1E230 Crossarm strut 2 2E243 Insulator bracket - 1E508 Pole safety sign 1 1E303 11kv pin insulator 2 3E310 Insulator pin 10kn 230mm ref29 2 2E310 Insulator pin 10kn 305mm ref31 - 1E260 Curved square washer M20 4 4E261 Flat square washer M20 2 2

Flat round washer M20 4 6Helical insulator tie top (50 mm²) 2 3Number nails A.R A.R

POLE BOLTSMEDIUM

POLESSTOUT /

EXTRA STOUTPOLES

M20 x 260mm pole bolt/nut 4 -M20 x 300mm pole bolt/nut - 4

PER BLOCK FITTEDKicking block NORMAL USE

M20 x 450mm pole bolt/nut 1 -M20 x 530mm pole bolt/nut - ALTERNATIVE

E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 1 1 -E111 Wood stay/ kicking block type 2 - ALTERNATIVEE260 Curved square washer 1 -E261 Flat square washer 1 -

A.R - AS REQUIRED




10.2 Drawing A010. 50mm2 ACSR

3000M

M M

INIM

UM


NOTE 3 ADDED.TITLE MOD.

A

B

MHM

ADB

10-7-91

14-10-92

TP

E111

AS GROUDCONDITIONS DICTATE

GROUND LEVEL


SINGLE POLE, SINGLE CROSS ARM INTERMEDIATE, 50MM ACSR MAX.

Scale

HBHAPPROVED BY

CHECKED BY

CAD INPUT

DRAWN BY

RKPADB

JAN 1994

APR 1991

APR 1991 A010N.T.S. Class-

500

380

E503

NOTES


2 WHERE A SINGLE PHASE LINE IS REQUIRED THE STANDARD OF CONSTRUCTION TO BE APPROPRIATE TO 3 PHASE OPERATION, THE CENTRE CONDUCTOR BEING OMITTED

3 FIT M20 POLE BOLTS EACH WITH 2 WASHERSAT POLE TOP. (ANTI SPLIT BOLTS

E508


2 N0. M20*45 BOLTSEACH COMPLETEWITH 1 ROUNDWASHER

1000

E230

E243

E228

E113

DISTRIBUTION TIE

SEE NOTE 3500

175

1000

Networks Business

Database Ref: 42

File Ref: Pole Mounted Switchgear Drawings Materials Jul 2006.doc

Manual Name: Overhead Line Manual Vol.1


Pole Mounted Fuse-gear, Auto-Reclosers and

Air Break Switch Disconnectors

Drawings and Material Lists

East Midlands Electricity Pole Mounted Fuse-gear, Auto-Reclosers and Air Break Switches Disconnectors Drawings and Material Lists


File Ref: Pole Mounted Switchgear Drawings & materials July 2006 Page 2 of 16 Version: 3

Revision Log For Pole Mounted Fuse-Gear, Auto-Reclosers & Air Break Switches, Disconnectors Drawings & Materials Lists


Section Notes about the change 7 Drawings A020 revised – expulsion fuse bracket changed


Section Notes about the change 7 All drawings and materials list revised – composite 36kV insulator

shown as preferred method of sectioning. Separate drawings for Low Level & High Level ABSD handles. ‘H’ pole drawing for ABSD withdrawn. Commodity codes included in materials lists


Section Notes about the change 7 Drawings A034, A035, A040 and A040-A revised




CONTENTS

A020. EXPULSION FUSEGEAR MATERIALS LIST 4

A020. EXPULSION FUSEGEAR - DRAWING 5

A021. AUTO-RECLOSER - MATERIALS LIST 5

A021. AUTO RECLOSER DRAWING 5

A034. 11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR – 5

A034. 11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR

GROUND LEVEL HANDLE – DRAWING 5

A035. 11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR –

HIGH LEVEL ACTUATOR -MATERIALS LIST 5

A035 11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR

HIGH LEVEL ACTUATOR –DRAWING 5

A036. 11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR

EXISTING SECTION POLE - DRAWING 5

A040. REMOTELY CONTROLLED POLE MOUNTED AUTO-RECLOSER – DRAWING 5

A040A. REMOTELY CONTROLLED POLE MOUNTED AUTO-RECLOSER EARTH MAT AND EARTH NEST – MATERIALS 5

A040A. REMOTELY CONTROLLED POLE MOUNTED AUTO-RECLOSER

PLAN VIEW OF EARTH MAT AND EARTH NEST 5




A020. EXPULSION FUSEGEAR MATERIALS LIST

DRG Commodity Code

DESCRIPTION QTY

FOR BASIC POLE SEE APPROPRIATE MATERIALS LIST

E231 Fuse Mounting Crossarm 1

E233 Crossarm Support And Support Strut 1

151 605 Expulsion Fuse 3

E615 512 261 Steel Block Earth Clamp 1

802 305 50mm2 bare copper conductor AR

OHJ 26 261 614 50mm2 copper lug L1C1-12 1

OHJ 35 261 547 Bi-metal Lugs Single Bolt 50 mm2 6

OHJ 20 261 503 Aluminium Double bolt lug 50 mm2 6

261 793 Back Plate 6

238 871 36kV composite ball / ball insulator 3

OHJ 61 261 900 Socked ended compression dead-ends 50mm2 6

E311 235 430 Insulator Pin Screw-in 1

E308 235 424 Insulator Pin Cranked 2

E303 234 813 Pin Insulator 3

235 418 Pre-formed Side Tie 50mm2 ACSR 3

232 200:550 M20 Bolts (Pole) 2

- M20 x 50mm Bolts 4

- M20 Round Washers 6

OHJ 110 Wedge Taps (Existing section only) 6

704 065 50mm2 ACSR AR

The bonding conductor from the fuse mount must be connected to the crossarm tie strap using a live line steel block earth clamp E615 to enable the fuse steelwork to be isolated from the crossarm during maintenance.




A020. EXPULSION FUSEGEAR – DRAWING



DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT JAN 1994Scale Class-N.T.S.

RKP

A020

ARRANGEMENT OF POLE MOUNTEDFUSEGEAR 3 PHASE SPUR

SEP 1978YMPDIM TO GL ALTERED

A11-11-80

B22-6-82

DRG NO. WAS11L/A22

DIM 6400 WAS 6100.NOTE RE-JUMPER ADDED

C21-10-82

NOTE 2 ADDED11-5-88D

WAS 11L/A16 WITH MODS

E25-6-91

UNSUPPORTED JUMPER LENGTH2.5m MAXIMIMUM

1200mm

OHJ 52 or OHL61Socket Ended Compression Dead-ends

EARTHING

BOND FUSE CROSSARMTO POLE TOP STEELWORK WITH LIVE LINE CLAMP DO NOT EARTH FUSE STEELWORK

36 kV Double BallComposite Insulator

Installation on Existing Section Pole

26-7-00

F Re-Drawn with barrier insulator

TH

E615 STEEL BLOCK EARTH CLAMP

Jul 2006

THG Details of expulsion

fuse bracket changed




A021. AUTO-RECLOSER - MATERIALS LIST

DRG Commodity Code

DESCRIPTION QTY






OHJ 61 Socked ended compression dead-ends to suit conductor 6

OHJ 130 Bail Clamps to suit conductor 6

OHJ 141 263 201 Live Line Taps 9

OHJ 62 263 211 Cable Pins 95 mm2 9

OHJ 35 2612 544 Bi-metal Lugs Single Bolt 95 mm2 6


OHJ 20 261 506 Aluminium Double bolt lug 100 mm2 for by-pass jumper 3

- 235 674 Fibre Glass Parking Bar 1

232 200:550 M20 Bolts (Pole) AR

- 708 165 95 mm2 Live Line Tapping Cable A.R

The bonding conductor from the Auto Recloser must be connected to the crossarm tie strap using a live line steel block earth clamp E615 to enable the Auto Recloser steelwork to be isolated from the crossarm during maintenance.




A021. AUTO RECLOSER DRAWING


DRAWN BYCAD INPUT

NOTE

DURING LIVE LINE ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE RECLOSER THE RED BAND SHOULD BE POSITIONED 1.1m FROM THE NEAREST LIVE POINT. THE TOP OF THE RECLOSER , ANY PARKING BAR AND THE CRAFTSMAN PLUS TOOLS SHOULD ALL BE BELOW THIS POINT.

THE CROSSARM EARTH BOND MUST BE REMOVED DURING ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE

MAXIMUM UNSUPPORTED JUMPER LENGTH IS 2.5m.

ARRANGEMENTOFAUTO-RECLOSER

A

B

ADB

ADBDEC 91

STEADY INSULATORADDED

JULY 91

WAS 11L/ A17MODIFIED DC

Cl ass-N. T. S.Scal e


A021? JULY 91

JULY 94? ?? ?

LIVE LINE TAPPING CABLE TO BE USED FOR ALL CONNECTIONSTO RECLOSER AND ALSO FOR SHORTING JUMPERS

SAFETY SIGN (E509)

NUMBER PLATE (E503)

280 M20 BOLTS

EARTHING

BOND RECLOSERTO POLE TOP STEELWORK WITH LIVE LINE CLAMP DO NOT EARTHRECLOSER

BARRIER INSULATOR AND BY PASS TAPS ADDED

TH28/7/00

PARKING BAR






A034. 11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR – GROUND LEVEL HANDLE - MATERIALS LIST

DRG Commodity Code

DESCRIPTION QTY


E254 235 167 Universal Steelwork 1

232 200:550 M20 Bolts (Pole) 2


807 815 50mm2 PVC covered copper conductor AR

OHJ 26 261 614 50mm2 copper lug L1C1-12 AR

OHJ 10 261 145 Copper ‘C’ Tap AR

235 604 Copper Bonded Rods AR

235612 Phosphor bronze earth clamp AR

E263 234 500 Anti Climbing Guard & barbed wire 1




OHJ 41 2612 551 Bi-metal Lugs Double Bolt 95 mm2 6


OHJ 20 261 506 Aluminium Double bolt lug 100 mm2 for by-pass jumper 3




OHJ 61 Socket ended compression dead-ends to suit conductor 6 A.R - AS REQUIRED

A fibre glass parking bar should be fitted for parking of the live line taps during maintenance.

The bonding conductor from the ABSD must be connected to the crossarm tie strap using a live line steel block earth clamp E615 to enable the ABSD steelwork to be isolated from the crossarm during maintenance.




A034. AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR GROUND LEVEL HANDLE – DRAWING

DRAWING NO.S 'E'CHANGED

U/L POSITION OFSWITCH MODIFIED.DRG NO. WAS11L/A28

MAY 90

ADBJUNE 91

F

JUNE 97

D

E

GAUG 98

DH

ABSD PARKING BARADDED.NOTES AMENDED

STEELWORK E254

C

NOTE ADDED

WAS 11L/A7MODIFIED

A

B

SEPT 77

MIDDLE PHASEREPOSITIONED

JUNE 78

JUNE 82

RED BAND CHANGEDTO SAFETYCLEARANCE MARKER.HIGH LEVEL ACTUATORDEVICE ADDED

N.T.S.


A034

EARTHING

BOND ABSD TO POLETOP STEELWORK AND CONNECT TO EARTH ELECTRODE VIA INSULATED 50mm CONDUCTOR

PROVIDE OPERATING HANDLE EARTH MAT

11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR GROUND LEVEL HANDLE


DRAWN BYCAD INPUT

ScaleMHM MAY 77DC JULY 94GS MAY 77? MAY 77

Class-

MOUNTING HEIGHT MUST BESUCH AS TO ENSURE THATTHERE IS A MINIMUMCLEARANCE OF 2.6 METRESBETWEEN A BROKEN JUMPER AND GROUND LEVEL

'H' POLE MOUNTING

EARTHINGNOTES AMENDED

H

JUN 99DH


1200mm

INSULATOR

IJUN 00TH

TOP MOUNTING OPTION REMOVED DRAWING RE-TITLED"- LOW LEVEL ACTUATOR"



ANIT CLIMBING GUARDSIN ACCORDANCE WITH EATS 43-90

INSULATED

D5m or 1.5D

BARE

PARKING BAR FOR ABSD JUMPERS





A035. 11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR – HIGH LEVEL ACTUATOR -MATERIALS LIST

DRG Commodity Code

DESCRIPTION QTY


E254 235 167 Universal Steelwork 1

232 200:550 M20 Bolts (Pole) 2







OHJ 41 261 551 Bi-metal Lugs Double Bolt 95 mm2 6


OHJ 20 261 506 Aluminium Double bolt lug 100 mm2 3




OHJ52/61 Socket ended compression dead-ends to suit conductor 6 A.R - AS REQUIRED

A fibre glass parking bar should be fitted for parking of the live line taps maintenance.

The bonding conductor from the ABSD must be connected to the crossarm tie strap using a live line steel block earth clamp E615 to enable the ABSD steelwork to be isolated from the crossarm during maintenance.

A second fibre glass parking bar must be fitted 2 metres below the operating hook to allow the ABSD to be used as a Point of Isolation by applying the approved locking off device.




A035 AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR HIGH LEVEL ACTUATOR –DRAWING



PARKING BAR FOR LOCKING DEVICE

MAY 90

ADBJUNE 91

F

JUNE 97

D

E

GAUG 98

DH


STEELWORK E254

C

NOTE ADDED

WAS 11L/A7MODIFIED

A

B

SEPT 77


JUNE 78

JUNE 82


N.T.S.


A035

11 kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR HIGH LEVEL ACTUATION


DRAWN BYCAD INPUT


Class-


'H' POLE MOUNTING


H

JUN 99DH


IJUN 00TH

TOP MOUNTING OPTION REMOVED DRAWING RE-TITLED"- HIGH LEVEL ACTUATOR"

2000mm

1200mm


EARTHING

BOND ABSD TO POLE TOP STEELWORK WITH LIVE LINE CLAMP DO NOT EARTH ABSD


P

OIN

T O

F I

SO

LATI

ON

D

o N

ot In

terfe

re

East

Mid

land

s E

lect

ricity

APPROVED LOCKING OFF DEVICE

PARKING BAR FOR ABSD JUMPERS





A036. 11kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR EXISTING SECTION POLE - DRAWING



MAY 90

ADBJUNE 91

F

JUNE 97

D

E

GAUG 98

DH


STEELWORK E254

C

NOTE ADDED

WAS 11L/A7MODIFIED

A

B

SEPT 77


JUNE 78

JUNE 82


INSULATED PARKING BARFOR CENTRE BYPASS JUMPER

N.T.S.


A036

11 kV AIR BREAK SWITCH DISCONNECTOR EXISTING SECTION POLE WITH BY PASS JUMPER ON CENTRE PHASE

NETWORK DEVELOPMENT


DRAWN BYCAD INPUT


Class-


'H' POLE MOUNTING


H

JUN 99DH


FOR TERMINATION SEE DRG A032

IJUN 00TH

TOP MOUNTING OPTION REMOVED DRAWING RE-TITLED"- HIGH LEVEL ACTUATOR"

DETAIL BELOW ABSD AS PER:

A034 - GROUND LEVEL HANDLE

A035 - HIGH LEVEL ACTUATOR

750mm

1200mm

STAY WIREON ANGLE POLE




A040. REMOTELY CONTROLLED POLE MOUNTED AUTO-RECLOSER MATERIALS

DRG Commodity Code

DESCRIPTION QTY



OHJ 61 Socked ended compression dead- 6

OHJ 42 BLX Aluminium Lug 6

OHJ 43 BLX Bi-Metal Lug 6

720 005 720 015 720 025

50 mm2 BLX Conductor for jumpers 120 mm2

185 mm2

AR


232 200:550 M20 Bolts (Pole) AR

Remotely Controlled Auto Recloser with Control Box and Aerial

A.R - AS REQUIRED

The bonding conductor from the Auto Recloser must be connected to the crossarm tie strap using a live line steel block earth clamp E615 to enable the Auto Recloser steelwork to be isolated from the crossarm during maintenance




A040. REMOTELY CONTROLLED POLE MOUNTED AUTO-RECLOSER – DRAWING

MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEENRECLOSER BASE AND TOP OFCONTROL CABINET WILL BE 5m(ASSUMING 8m CONTROL CABLE)

CONNECTION BELOWGROUND LEVEL

ROUTE CONTROL CABLE, SUPPLY CABLE AND EARTHAS CLOSE TOGETHER AS POSSIBLEMAX SPERATION TO BE 200mm (8")

GENERAL NOTES:

1. THE TRANSFORMER MUST ONLY BE USED TO PROVIDE A SSUPPLY TO THE CONTROL CABINET AND RTU

2. IF ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED ON THE POLE THEN AN 'H' POLE ARRANGEMENT SHOULD BE CONSIDERED

EARTH MAT OF 25mm²COPPER LAID AT 300mmDEPTH TO BE POSITIONED UNDER CONTROL CABINET

MAR 98A

50mm² COPPER LAIDAT 600mm DEPTH

MAXIMUM HEIGHT 2mTO ALLOW GROUNDLEVEL CONTROL

CONTROL CABINETAND RTU (POSSiBLYSEPERATE CABINETS)

2m2m

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT FORREMOTELY CONTROLLED POLEMOUNTED AUTORECLOSER


NOTES :-EARTH VALUE IS FORDRY SUMMER CONDITIONS.

EARTHING DESIGN TO BEIN ACCORDANCE WITHSECTION 10 VOLUME 3 &SECTION 11 VOLUME 1

A040N.T.S.

SEP 9722/5/97

CHECKED BYCAD INPUTDRAWN BY

APPROVED BY

DHTR Scale

EARTH VALUE MUSTBE BELOW 10 OHMS

Class-

GROUND LEVEL

ANTI- CLIMBING GUARD (MIN HEIGHT 2.75m),DANGER NOTICES, ETC. TO BE FITTEDAS APPROPRIATE

ALL JUMPERS TO BE OF A COVEREDCONDUCTOR CONSTRUCTION(BLX OR SIMILAR)

30° DROPPER PLATE DEAD END SOCKET ASSEMBLY

HV ARRESTERS ARE TO BE FITTED TO BOTH SIDESOF THE RECLOSER ONLY, (HV ARRESTERS NOT REQUIRED ON THE TRANSFORMER

LV ARRESTERS NOT REQUIRED AS THE NEUTRALAND EARTH ARE BONDED TOGETHER.

NOTE :-1.1m MINIMUM SAFETY CLEARANCEMUST BE MAINTAINED BETWEENHV AND LV EQUIPMENT, eg. FUSE,AERIALS, CONTROL EQUIPMENT

2.5m MAXUNSUPPORTEDJUMPER LENGTH

HV BUSHINGS TO BE 4.3mMINIMUM ABOVE GROUND

6m5m

L/NE

TYPICAL DIMENSIONS ABOVE GROUND FORTOTAL POLE LENGTHS AS INDICATED

12mPOLE

10.5m

9.5m8m

EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS50mm² COVERED COPPER WIRE.

NOTE :- FOR POLE TOP ARRG'T SEEAPPROPRIATE BASIC STRUCTURE INTHE OVERHEAD LINE MANUAL

COMPOSITE TENSION INSULATOR (BALL/BALL FITTING)

LV SWA 3 CORE CABLE FOR CONTROLCABINET SUPPLIES FUSED IN CONTROL CABINET

2m

X

BJUN 99 REDRAWN.

GRANITE CHIPPINGS& CONCRETE ADDEDDH

(INTERIM ISSUE)

100mm GRANITECHIPPINGS

CONDUCTIVE CONCRETEIF REQUIRED

TO TENSIONINSULATOR.LV SUPPLY CABLE




A040A. REMOTELY CONTROLLED POLE MOUNTED AUTO-RECLOSER EARTH MAT AND EARTH NEST – MATERIALS

DRG Commodity Code

DESCRIPTION QTY








A.R - AS REQUIRED




A040A. REMOTELY CONTROLLED POLE MOUNTED AUTO-RECLOSER PLAN VIEW OF EARTH MAT AND EARTH NEST

A

REMOTELY CONTROLLED POLE MOUNTEDAUTORECLOSER PLAN VIEW OF EARTH MATAND EARTH NEST


A040-AN.T.S.

SEP 9722/5/97

CHECKED BYCAD INPUTDRAWN BY

APPROVED BY

DHTR Scale Class-

JUN 99REDRAWN.DIMENSIONSADDEDDH

R

R

R

R = 1.2m OR 2.4m COPPER ROD OR 50mm² DEEP DRIVEN EARTH CONDUCTOR

50mm² COPPERLAID AT 600mmBELOW GROUND

25mm² COPPERLAID AT 300mmBELOW GROUND

LINE OF FRONT OFCONTROL CABINET

2m

2m

2m

1m

2m

1300mm

300mm


Database Ref: 37 File Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 7Cable Terminations Drawings &Materials Jan 2002



Cable Terminations


East Midlands Electricity Cable Terminations -Distribution Business Drawings and Materials

Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section Cable TerminationsDrawings & Materials Jan 2002


REVISION LOG

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date1 M. Richardson D. Howard I.E. Burton T. Haggis 12/02/99Notes:

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date2 T Haggis T Haggis T haggis 2/8/00Notes: Drawings and material lists for A028, A029, A037 and A037A withdrawn. Drawing and

material list for A013 and A026 modified to cover 33kV in addition to 11kV. A033 re-drawn.

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date3 - DEC2000

T Haggis Dec 2000

Notes: Drawing A027 created for 400 sq mm 33kV terminations

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date4 - Jan2001

T Haggis Jan 2002

Notes: Cable cleat commodity codes included for 11kV & 33kV triplex cables




CONTENTS

TABLE A013.11kV AND 33kV SINGLE POLE SINGLE CORE XLPE CABLESMATERIALS LIST .................................................................................................... 4

DRAWING A013..................................................................................................................... 5

TABLE A026.33 kV AND 11kV TERMINAL ‘H’ POLE SINGLE CORE XLPECABLES MATERIALS LIST ................................................................................... 6

DRAWING A026..................................................................................................................... 7

TABLE A027.400 sq mm 33 kV ‘H’ POLE SINGLE CORE XLPE CABLESMATERIALS LIST .................................................................................................... 8

DRAWING A027..................................................................................................................... 9

TABLE A033.JUMPERS AND LUGS FOR XLPE CABLE TERMINASTIONMATERIALS LIST .................................................................................................. 10

DRAWING A033................................................................................................................... 11




TABLE A013. 11kV AND 33kV SINGLE POLE SINGLE CORE XLPE CABLESMATERIALS LIST

DRG CommodityCode

DESCRIPTION QTY


E240 232 581 Support channel for heatshrink cable termination 1

E247A 232 583 Surge Arrester Mounting Bracket 1

E358

E359

234 322

234 323

Surge Arrester 11kV

Surge Arrester 33kV

3

E714 533 210

533 211

533 212

70 / 150 mm2 11kV triplex Cable Cleat

185 / 300 mm2 11kV triplex cable cleat

150 / 400 mm2 33 kV triplex cable cleat

4

E509 513 643 Safety Sign 1

E708 234 604 PVC Cable Guard 100 mm 1

E709 232 985 Pole Earth Wire Cover 1


232 200:550 M20 Bolts (Pole) 2

E260 238 800 Curved Square Washer 2

Jumper Lugs – see A033






A.R - AS REQUIRED

Notes:

Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance with EATS 43-90.




FOR POLE TOP ARRANGEMENT SEE APPROPRIATE BASIC STRUCTURE


A013

SURGE DIVERTERCONNECTIONS MODIFIED

WAS 11L/A8DMODIFIED

STAND OFFINSULATORSREMOVED

PB7.11.96

PB3.3.97

D

E

EARTHING &BONDING REF.CHANGED

MOD. TO L.C.NOTE ADDED

E247 AMENDEDTO E247A.OWNER TONET.DEV.

JUNE 91

FEB 92

ADB

ADB

A

B

19.9.96

MAY 89JUNE 94

JUNE 89NOV 89APPROVED BY

CHECKED BY

DRAWN BYCAD INPUT DC

MHM

PNHBH

Scale N.T.S. Class-

CABLE CLEAT E714

SUPPORT CHANNELE240

MAX. LENGHT OFUNSUPPORTEDJUMPER 2.5m

MOUNTING BRACKETE247A


NOV 99

GDH

REDRAWN WITH 33 kV CABLEINCLUDED ANDOTHER MODS.

CABLE GUARD (E708)

POLE EARTH WIRE COVER(E709)

SURGEARRESTERS11 kV - E35833 kV - E359

TERMINATIONDETAILSSEE DRG A032

SUPPORT CHANNELE240

SAFETY SIGN(E509)

LIGHTNINGCONDUCTOR50mm² CuINSULATEDDIRECT TOGROUNDELECTRODE

FRAME EARTH INSULATED1.5X

CABLE

RO

D

X

33 kV AND 11kV SINGLE POLESINGLE CORE XLPE CABLES

50 ACSR

150mm² ACSR & 300mm² HDA 50, 100 & 150mm² ACSR

2.75

1.1 MIN2.5 MAX

For 400 sq mm 33 kV XLPE see drawing A027

Jan 2002

HTH

E714 Cable cleat added

DRAWING A013




TABLE A026. 33 kV AND 11kV TERMINAL ‘H’ POLE SINGLE CORE XLPECABLES MATERIALS LIST

DRG CommodityCode

DESCRIPTION QTY


E240 232 581 Support channel for heatshrink cable termination 1

E247A 232 583 Surge Arrester Mounting Bracket 1

E358

E359

234 322

234 323

Surge Arrester 11kV

Surge Arrester 33kV

3

E714 533 210

533 211

533 212

70 / 150 mm2 11kV triplex Cable Cleat

185 / 300 mm2 11kV triplex cable cleat


4


E708 234 604 PVC Cable Guard 100 mm 1



232 200 - 550 M20 Bolts (Pole) 2







Jumper Lugs – see A033

E303

E311

234 813

235 430

235 418:19:20

11kv Pin Insulator

Pilot Insulator Spindle Timber Fixing

Helical Distribution Tie (50:100:150)

1

1

1

E305

E243

E208

234 822

233 560

235 804

235 433:34

33kV Line Post Insulator

Bracket - Insulator - (H.V.)

Coach Screw

Helical Distribution Tie (150:300)

1

1

2

1

A.R - AS REQUIRED

Notes: Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance with EATS 43-90.




SURGE DIVERTERCONNECTIONS MODIFIED

CABLE GUARD (E708)


FOR POLE TOP ARRANGEMENT SEE APPROPRIATE BASIC STRUCTURE

NUMBER PLATE(E503)

SURGEARRESTERS11 kV - E35833 kV - E359


MHM/ADBJUNE 91

MHM/ADBFEB 92

A WAS 11H/A4GMODIFIED

B33 kV AND 11kV TERMINAL 'H' POLESINGLE CORE XLPE CABLES

Scale



DRAWN BYCAD INPUT DC

MHM MAY 89JUNE 94

PN JUNE 89HBH NOV 89

Class-N.T.S.

A026

TERMINATIONDETAILSSEE DRG A032

SURGE ARRESTERS REMOVED

CMAY 96

PB

G

AUG 98DH

EMAR 97

PB

D14/11/96

PB

E247 TO E247A

'ARRESTERS' NOTE ADDED

Earthing & bonding ref ammended

F

NOV 99TH

300mm² HDA

100 & 150mm² ACSR

SUPPORT CHANNELE240

SAFETY SIGN(E509)

LIGHTNINGCONDUCTOR50mm² CuINSULATEDDIRECT TOGROUNDELECTRODEMAX. LENGHT OF

UNSUPPORTEDJUMPER 2.5m

REDRAWN WITH 33 kV CABLEINCLUDED ANDOTHER MODS.

E 311

E 305E 243

E 208

PILOT INSULATOR

11 kV

33 kV

E 303

1.5X

CABLE

RO

D X

2750

LIGHTNING EARTH50mm² COPPER OR COPPER BONDED RODSLESS THAN 10 OHMS

SEE A033 FOR CONNECTOR DETAILS

1.1 MIN2.5 MAX

For 400 sq mm 33 kV XLPE drawing A027 may be used

CABLE CLEAT E714

Jan 2002

HTH


DRAWING A026




TABLE A027. 400 sq mm 33 kV ‘H’ POLE SINGLE CORE XLPE CABLESMATERIALS LIST

DRG CommodityCode

DESCRIPTION QTY


E213 233 148 Crossarm 1

E359 234 323 Surge Arrester 33kV 3

E714 533 212

533 213


400 mm2 single cable cleats

2 or 3

3


E112 Trefoil Cable Support Board 1

E235 233 300 Pilot insulator Xarm for H poles 1

E242 232 455 Mounting Bracket for Trefoil cable support 4

234 580 Steel Cable Guard 1



232 200 - 550 M20 Bolts (Pole) 12







Jumper Lugs – see A0332357950 Coach screw 1.5" x 0.25" 20

A.R - AS REQUIRED

Notes: Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance with EATS 43-90.




STEEL CABLE GUARD cc 234 5800



400 sqmm 33 kV 'H' POLESINGLE CORE XLPE CABLES

Scale



DRAWN BYCAD INPUT TH

TH JAN 2001 Class-N.T.S.

A027

300mm² HDA

SAFETY SIGN(E509)

SEE A033 FOR CONNECTOR DETAILS

2.0

2.75

SURGEARRESTERS33 kV - E359

300mm² HDA

JAN 2001

OHJ 133E213E305

E235

Trefoil cable support board E112

1.0

1.5

50 mm PVCInsulated Copper

50 mm Bare Copper

50 mm Bare Copper

DO NOT BOND LOWER CROSSARMS TO MAIN HV EARTH

E242

E242

300mm² HDA

1.5

1.934

1 x 1.2m rod

INTERMEDIATE POLE OPTION

LIGHTNING EARTH50mm² COPPER OR COPPER BONDED RODSLESS THAN 10 OHMS

1.5 X

X

Jan 2002

ATH


SINGLE CABLE CLEATS E714

CABLE CLEAT E714

DRAWING A027




TABLE A033. JUMPERS AND LUGS FOR XLPE CABLE TERMINATIONMATERIALS LIST

DRG CommodityCode

DESCRIPTION QTY


OHJ 41 2615500 50 ACSR Rabbit Double hole BiMetal lug LB20RL12D 3

OHJ 41 2615510 100 ACSR Dog Double hole BiMetal lug LB34RL12D 3

OHJ 41 2615520 150 ACSR Dingo Double hole BiMetal lug LB42R12D 3

OHJ 41 2615530 300 AAC Butterfly Double hole BiMetal lug LB48A12D 3

OHJ 31 261 593 50 HD Copper Double hole lug L1C3-12D 3

OHJ 31 261 594 70 HD Copper Double hole lug L1C4-12D 3

OHJ 143 261 7930 Back Plate 3

Cable Adapter Plate, Earthing Bolt & Cable Lugs aresupplied in the Cable Termination Kit




METHOD OF TERMINATION MODIFIEDTITLE AMENDED

NOTE

1 CABLE TERMINATION TO BE POSITIONED SO THAT WHEN DISCONNECTEDFROM THE OVERHEAD LINE A MINIMUM OF 1.1m CLEARANCE WILL BEMAINTAINED FROM ANYONE WORKING ON THE CABLE TERMINATION AND / OR SURGE ARRESTERS, INCLUDING THE LENGTH OF TOOLS AND THE NEAREST LIVE POINT.

2 MAXIMUM UNSUPPORTED JUMPER LENGTH IS 2m.

3 JUMPER TO BE OF SAME SIZE AS OVERHEAD LINE.

4 THIS ARRANGEMENT APPLIES TO ALL 11kV AND 33kV CABLE TERMINATIONS.

ONLY CENTRE PHASE OF POLYMERIC INSULATOR SHOWN FOR CLARITY

MHM/ADBFEB 92

D

11 kV AND 33kV CABLE TERMINATIONPREFERRED ARRANGEMENT(ALL SITUATIONS)

EAST MIDLANDS ELECTRICITYNETWORK DEVELOPMENT

APPROVED BYCHECKED BYCAD INPUTDRAWN BY JULY 91

JUNE 94JULY 91JULY 91

MHM

ADBADB

DC

CONNECTED TO OVERHEAD LINE

Class-N.T.S.Scale

A033A

D.H.NOV 99

REDRAWNWITHAMENDMENTS

BPB

ARRESTERSREMOVED

MAY 96

CPB

NOTE AMENDED

MAR 97

(INTERIM COPY)

50mm copper L1C3-12D70mm coper L1C4-12D

33kv cable150 mm BTHW159C12D300 mm BTHW300C12D400 mm BTHW400C12Dstranded copper

Cu

Al

Cu

Cu

Cu

Cu

Cu

Al

50 ACSR Rabbit - LB20RL12D100 ACSR Dog - LB34RL12D 150 ACSR Dingo - LB42R12D300 HDA Butterfly - LB48A12D

11kv cable70 mm solid Al - BAP70A12B2B150 mm solid Al - BAP120A12B2B185 mm solid Al - BAP150A12B2B300 mm soilid Al - BAP240A12B2B

Cu

Cable Adaptor Plate

Cu

Backing Plate

EARTHING POINTM12 x 110mm Galvanised Bolt 2 Nuts 2 Washers

DRAWING A033


Database Ref: 43

File Ref: Pole Transformers Drawings Materials Jul 2006 (2).doc

Manual Name: Overhead Line Manual Vol.1


Pole Transformers


East Midlands Electricity Pole Transformer Drawings & Materials Overhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Pole Transformers Drawings & Materials July 2006 Page 2 of 20 Version: 3

Revision Log For Pole Transformer Drawings & Materials

Changes made in version 3 July 2006

Notes about the change

Section 7 All drawings Details of expulsion fuse bracket changed. Orientation of bolted anchor clamps corrected



Section 7 Changes made in version 1


Section 7



CONTENTS

1. A014 Single Phase Transformer on Single Pole 4

1.1 Material List A014 4

1.2 Drawing A014 5

2. A015 Three Phase Transformer on Single Pole 6


2.2 Drawing A0015 7

3. A016 Single Phase Transformer on Single Pole with Expulsion Fuses 8


3.2 Drawing A016. 9

4. A017 Three Phase Transformer on Single Pole with Expulsion Fuses 10


4.2 Drawing A017 11

5. A018 Pole Transformer - In-Line Stub Leg 12


5.2 Drawing A018 13

6. A019 Pole Transformer - In-Line Stub Leg & Expulsion Fuses 14


6.2 Drawing A019 15

7. A022 Free Standing Pole Mounted Transformer 16



8. A023. Fixing Of Pole Mounted Distribution Cabinet 18



9. Terminal ‘H’ Pole with Transformer & cable Termination 20


9.2 Drawing A024 20



1. A014 Single Phase Transformer on Single Pole

1.1 Material List A014 DRG DESCRIPTION QTY

For Basic Pole See Appropriate Materials List E509 Safety Sign 1 E709 Pole Earth Wire Cover 1

- Transformer 1 - LV Fuse 1 - Barbed Wire A.R - Earthing/Bonding Bolt A.R - Copper Lugs 3 - M20 Bolts (Pole) 1

E260 Curved Square Washer 1 50mm2 Copper Conductor (PVC) A.R - 11kv Surge Arrester (Fitted By Manufacturer Or Workshop) 2 - LV Surge Arrester (Fitted By Manufacturer Or Workshop) 1 6 - Flat Round Washer M16 2 M20 X 40mm BOLT 2 - Flat Round Washer M12 6 - M12 X 40mm BOLT 2

Notes:

A.R - AS REQUIRED

Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance EATS 43-90



1.2 Drawing A014



DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

Scale N.T.S.

A014

Single Phase Pole Transformer up to 50 kVA

Dec 2000TH

EARTHING

Bond Crossarm to Transformer Steelwork (Use Live Line Earth Clamp if Erected Live Line)

Install Deep Earth + Crowsfoot EarthsAccording to Earthing Manual : "E5 Distribution Standard Earthing Layouts"

ANIT CLIMBING GUARDS IN ACCORDANCE WITH EATS 43-90

E706Earth Wire Guard

E509DANGERLabel

Bird clearance !Keep Jumpers well clear of tank top

E615 Steel Block Earth Clamp(If installed under live line)Solid Jumpers or Live Line Taps ?

See Section 7 "Jumpers - Drawing & Materials"

2.0

2.75

5.0

3.5

0.6

MAX

MINMIN

2.5

Fuse # 2 for 480 v System

MIN to HV Bushings

1.1

Maximum Unsupported Jumper Length not to Exceed 2.5 m

THJul 2006

A Orientation of bolted anchor clamps corrected



2. A015 Three Phase Transformer on Single Pole


DRG DESCRIPTION QTY

E509 E709

- - - - -

E234 E262

- E249

- - - - - - - - -

For Basic Pole See Appropriate Materials List Safety Sign Pole Earth Wire Cover Transformer LV Fuses Barbed Wire Earthing/Bonding Bolt Copper Lugs Transformer Platform `J` Bolts M20 Bolts (Pole) Tie Rod M20 X 40mm Bolts Round Washer M20 M12 X 40mm Bolts Round Washer M12 M12 X 25mm Bolts Round Washer M16 11kV Surge Arrester (Fitted By Manufacturer Or Workshop) LV Surge Arrester (Fitted By Manufacturer Or Workshop) 50mm2 Copper Conductor (PVC)

1 1 1

SET A.R A.R A.R

1 4 2 1 2 8 3 4 6 2 3 1 1

A.R

A.R - AS REQUIRED

Notes:

Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance EATS 43-90



2.2 Drawing A0015



DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

Scale N.T.S.

A015

Three Phase Pole Transformer up to 100 kVA

Dec 2000TH

EARTHING





E509DANGERLabel

E234


E262'J' Bolts


See Section 7 "Jumpers - Drawings & Materials"

2.8

2.75

5.0

3.5

0.6

0.40.4

MAX

MINMIN

2.5

1000 kg Max

MIN to HV Bushings

1.1


Jul 2006THA Orientation of bolted

anchor clamps corrected



3. A016 Single Phase Transformer on Single Pole with Expulsion Fuses


DRG DESCRIPTION QTY

E509 E709

- - - - -

E234 E231

- E260

- - - - - - - -

For Basic Pole See Appropriate Materials List Safety Sign Pole Earth Wire Cover Transformer LV Fuses Barbed Wire Earthing/Bonding Bolt Copper Lug Crossarm Support And Support Strut Fuse Mounting Crossarm M20 Bolts (Pole) Curved Square Washer Round Washer M20 M20 X 40mm Bolts 11kV Surge Arrester (Fitted By Manufacturer Or Workshop) LV Surge Arrester (Fitted By Manufacturer Or Workshop) M12 X 25mm Bolt Round Washer M16 Round Washer M12 M12 X 40mm Bolt 50mm2 Copper Conductor (PVC)

1 1 1

SET A.R A.R A.R

SET 1 3

A.R 8 2 2 1 6 2 6 2

A.R

A.R - AS REQUIRED

Notes:

Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance with EATS 43-90



3.2 Drawing A016.



DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

Scale N.T.S.

A016

Single Phase Pole Transformer up to 50 kVA with Expulsion Fuses

Dec 2000TH

EARTHING





E509DANGERLabel




1.2

2.75

1.5

E231

MIN

MIN

MIN2.0 MAX

MIN2.5 MAX

5.0

3.5

0.6

Fuse # 2 for 480 v System

MIN to HV Bushings

1.1


Jul 2006THA Details of expulsion

fuse bracket changedOrientation of bolted anchor clamps corrected



4. A017 Three Phase Transformer on Single Pole with Expulsion Fuses


DRG DESCRIPTION QTY

E509 E709

E234 E262 E249

E234 E231

- - - - - - - -

For Basic Pole See Appropriate Materials List Safety Sign Pole Earth Wire Cover Transformer LV Fuses Barbed Wire Earthing/Bonding Bolt Copper Lug Transformer Platform `J` Bolts Tie Rod HV Fusegear Crossarm Support And Support Strut Fuse Mounting Crossarm M20 Bolts (Pole) M20 X 40mm Bolts Round Washers M20 50mm2 Copper Conductor (PVC) M20 X 40mm Bolts M12 X 25mm Bolts Round Washer M16 11kV Surge Arrester (Fitted By Manufacturer Or Workshop) LV Surge Arrester (Fitted By Manufacturer Or Workshop)

1 1 1

SET A.R A.R A.R

SET 4 1

SET

SET 1 4 6 12

A.R 6 6 2 3 1

A.R - AS REQUIRED

Notes:

Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance EATS 43-90.



4.2 Drawing A017



DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

Scale N.T.S.

A017

Three Phase Pole Transformer up to 100 kVA with Expulsion Fuses

Dec 2000TH

EARTHING





E509DANGERLabel

E234


1000 kg Max

E262'J' Bolts



1.2

2.75

5.0

2.6

E231

3.5

1.1 MIN

0.6

0.40.4

MINMIN

MIN2.0 MAX

MIN3.5 MAX

MIN to HV Bushings

1.1


E234E231





5. A018 Pole Transformer - In-Line Stub Leg


DRG DESCRIPTION QTY

E113 E111

E509 E709

E235 E262

E235 E308 E303

- -

E260 E261

- - - - - - -

E233 E272

FOR BASIC POLE SEE APPROPRIATE MATERIALS LIST Stub Pole Brace Block Safety Sign Pole Earth Wire Cover Transformer LV Fuses Barbed Wire Earthing/Bonding Bolt Copper Lug Copper Conductor (PVC) Transformer Support Crossarm `J` Bolts Pilot Insulator Support Cranked Insulator Pin Pin Insulator Helical Distribution Ties M20 Bolts Pole Curved Square Washer Flat Square Washer Round Washer M20 11kV Surge Arrester LV Surge Arrester M12 X 40mm Bolt Round Washer M12 M12 X 25mm Bolt M20 X 40mm Bolt Crossarm Support And Support Strut Surge Diverter Support Crossarm

1 1 1 1 1

SET A.R A.R A.R A.R

2 4 1 3 3 3 4 4 2 2 3 1 3 3 4 4

SET 1

A.R - AS REQUIRED

Notes:

Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance with EATS 43-90.



5.2 Drawing A018



DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

Scale N.T.S.

A018Dec 2000TH

EARTHING




E706

E509DANGERLabel


E262'J' Bolts



1.2

2.75

5.0

2.6

3.5

1.1

0.6

0.40.4

MIN

MINMIN

MIN2.0 MAX

MIN3.5 MAX

Pole Transformer 200 kVA In - Line Stub Leg

1.1 MIN to HV Bushings

E235

E235

E303

E308

2000 kg Max


Jul 2006THA

Orientation of bolted anchor clamps corrected



6. A019 Pole Transformer - In-Line Stub Leg & Expulsion Fuses


DRG DESCRIPTION QTY

E113 E111

E509 E709

E235 E262

E233 E231 E260 E261

FOR BASIC POLE SEE APPROPRIATE MATERIALS LIST Stub Pole Brace Block Safety Sign Pole Earth Wire Cover Transformer LV Fuses Barbed Wire Earthing/Bonding Bolt Copper Lug Transformer Support Crossarm `J` Bolts HV Fusegear Crossarm Support And Support Strut Fuse Mounting Crossarm Curved Square Washer Flat Square Washer M20 Bolt (Pole) Round Washer M20

1 1 1 1 1

SET A.R A.R A.R

2 4

SET 2 1 6 2 8 2

A.R - AS REQUIRED

Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance with EATS 43-90



6.2 Drawing A019



DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

Scale N.T.S.

A019Dec 2000TH

EARTHING




E706

E509DANGERLabel


E262'J' Bolts



1.2

2.75

5.0

2.6

3.5

1.1

0.6

0.40.4

MIN

MINMIN

MIN2.0 MAX

MIN3.5 MAX

Pole Transformer 200 kVA In - Line Stub Leg with Expulsion Fuses


E235

2000 kg Max

E233

E231






7. A022 Free Standing Pole Mounted Transformer


DRG DESCRIPTION QTYE114 Pole 2 E111 Brace Baulk 1

Transformer 1 E247 Insulator Mounting Bracket 1 or 2E235 Transformer Support Crossarm 2 E310 Insulator Pins 3 or 6E303 Insulator 3 or 6E231 Fuse Mounting Crossarm 1 E233 Fuse Mount Crossarm Support and Strut 2 E263 Anti-Climbing Guard SET E262 'J' Bolts 4 E706 PVC Cable Saddle AR E708 Cable Guard 2 or 3E709 Pole Earth Wire Cover 2

Expulsion Fuses E509 Safety Sign 2 E229 Intermediate Crossarm 1 or 2E230 Crossarm Strut 2 or 4E240 Cable Support Channel 1 or 2

A.R - AS REQUIRED

Notes:

Anti Climbing guards must be in accordance with Section 6 of Volume 3.



7.2 Drawing A022.



DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

Scale N.T.S.

A022Dec 2000TH

EARTHING

Bond Crossarm to Transformer Steelwork



E706

E509DANGERLabel


E262'J' Bolts

1.2

2.75

5.0

2.6

3.5

0.6

0.40.4

MINMIN

MIN3.5 MAX

Free Standing Pole Transformer

1.1MIN to HV Bushings

E235

2000 kg Max

E233

E231

NOT TO BE USED Except with express permission from Asset Management, Network Strategy & Regulation where is not practical to use a Padmount Transformer


fuse bracket changed



8. A023. Fixing Of Pole Mounted Distribution Cabinet


DRG DESCRIPTION QTY

E260 E240

FOR BASIC POLE SEE APPROPRIATE MATERIALS LIST POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION CABINET M20 X 450 BOLTS (LOCK NUTS REQUIRED) CURVED SQUARE WASHER SUPPORT CHANNEL 76 X 38

1 2 2 1



8.2 Drawing A023.

NOV 81

JUNE 82

NOV 83CLT

MHM

AEBA

B

D WAS DRG 11L/ A19WITH MODS

JUNE 91MHM

C

LOWER CABLE GUARD EXTENDS250mm INTO GROUND


FIXING OF POLE MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION CABINET

DRAWN BYCAD INPUTCHECKED BYAPPROVED BY

ANTI- CLIMBINGGUARD MODIFIED

WAS DRG.CE/ C/ 100/ 2034.2

REAR SUPPORTMODIFIED

HEAD OFFICE

N. T. S.Scal e Cl ass-

A023MHMDCGHJEAN

SEPT 81JUNE 94SEPT 81OCT 81

UPPER AND LOWER CABLE GUARDS OMITTED FOR CLARITY

NUT / LOCKNUTCOMBINATION

500mm CABINETBASE TO GROUND

'U' SECTION CHANNEL 76 X 38mm USED AS REAR SUPPORT WITHFLANGE EDGES TO POLE



9. Terminal ‘H’ Pole with Transformer & cable Termination

9.1 Materials List A024 See Drawing A018

9.2 Drawing A024



DRAWN BY

CAD INPUT

Scale N.T.S.

A024Dec 2000TH

EARTHING




E706

E509DANGERLabel


E262'J' Bolts

Solid Jumpers or Live Line Taps ?See Section 7 "Jumpers - Drawings & Materials"

1.8

2.75

5.0

2.6

3.5

1.1

0.6

0.40.4

MIN

MINMIN

2.5 MAX

MIN3.5 MAX

Terminal 'H' Pole withTransformer & Cable Termination


E235

2000 kg Max

E233E231 E308

E303

Expulsion Fuse Alternative


Jul 2006

THA Details of expulsion



File Ref: Pole Transformers Drawings & Materials May 2005.doc Page 21 of 21 Version: 3

9. Terminal ‘H’ Pole with Transformer & cable Termination

9.1 Materials List A024 See Drawing A018

9.2 Drawing A024



DRAWN BYCAD I NPUT

Scale N.T.S.

A024Dec 2000TH

EARTHING




E706

E509DANGERLabel


E262'J' Bolts

Solid Jumpers or Live Line Taps ?See Section 7 "Jumpers - Drawings & Materials"

2.75

5.0

2.6

3.5

1.1

0.6

0.40.4

MIN

MINMIN

2.5 MAX

MIN3.5 MAX

Terminal 'H' Pole withTransformer & Cable Termination


E235

2000 kg Max

E233E231 E308

E303

Expulsion Fuse Alternative



Database Ref: 41 File Ref: Jumpers Drawings &Materials Feb 2001



Jumpers


East Midlands Electricity Jumpers, Drawings & MaterialsOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Jumpers Drawings & MaterialsFen 2001.doc Page 2 of 6 Version: 3

Revision Log For Jumpers, Drawings & Materials




Section Notes about the change7 Items E313B and C replaced by item E361. Titles of Tables A032.1

& A032.2 amended.Changes made in version 3

Section Notes about the change7 33kV Teminal pole removed



CONTENTS

1. Clearances 4

2. Use of Live Line Taps, Wedges or Lugs 4

2.1 New Construction 4

2.2 Connections to existing O/H Lines 4

3. A011. Transformer and Tee-off Jumpers 5

4. A032. 11kv & 33kv Section and Termination 6



1. Clearances

MINIMUM CLEARANCES IN AIR (m)ARRANGEMENT LV* 11kV 33kV

Phase/Phase 0.20 0.25 0.43

Phase/Earth 0.20 0.20 0.30

*Not applicable to LV ABC.

See the document ‘OVERHEAD LINE JOINTING CHARTS’ for details of connectors.

2. Use of Live Line Taps, Wedges or Lugs

2.1 New Construction

Live line taps shall only be installed during new construction on the following plant:

• Air Break Switch Disconnectors (ABSD)

All other connections shall be made with wedge connectors or lugs.

2.2 Connections to existing O/H Lines

Connections to existing O/H lines shall normally be made with wedge connectors orlugs. This also applies to transformer & cable replacements after fault.

Exceptionally, live line taps may be used if:

• It is not reasonably practicable to make the existing line dead.

AND

• It is not justifiable according to risk assessment or is not cost effective to make theconnection using ‘hot glove’ techniques



3. A011. Transformer and Tee-off Jumpers

N.T.S. Class-Scale

JAN 1994CAD INPUT

DRAWN BY

ADBAPPROVED BYCHECKED BY


RKP

JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS

AUG 1991AUG 1991ADB A011

FIG3 'JUMPERS FOR PLANT' ANDFIG2 FROM'TEE OFF JUMPERSREMOVEDFIGS. RENUMBERED

JUMPERS FOR PLANT

'TEE-OFF' JUMPERS

A

B BALL ENDED HOOKREPLACES TENSIONINSULATOR STEELWORKJUMPERS REARRANGED.'TEE' FROM COPPER LINEADDED.

JUN 99DH

CD.H.

OCT 99

JUMPER TO COPPERLINE ADDED

Back to Back LugsBolted with backing plate

Live Line Tap with Cable PinCOPPER ALUMINIUM

ALUMINIUMALUMINIUM

ACSR95 mm AlLive Line Tapping Cable

95 mm AlLive Line Tapping Cable

70 mm CuLive Line Tapping Cable ACSR

OHJ 100Wedge Tap

ACSR

Single Bolt BiMetalSingle Bolt BiMetal

ALUMINIUM

COPPER ALUMINIUM

OHJ 80Split BoltLine TapOHJ 130

Al BailOHJ 132 Cul Bail

OHJ 130 Al Bail

AL

AL

ALCu

Cu CuALCu

Cu Cu

'Drip Loop' forcopper salts



4. A032. 11kv & 33kv Section and Termination


ARRANGEMENT OF 11/33KV TERMINATIONS

Scale


CAD INPUT

DRAWN BY

ADBADB JUL 1991

JUL 1991RKPMHM JUN 1991 N.T.S. Class-

A032

E30611kV - 1 No. TENSION INSULATOR33kV - 3 No. TENSION INSULATORS

E306

Compression Fitting

E312C

E326Bolted Anchor Clamp

E317

E361

E361

ADH

JUNE 99

REDRAWNE318B & 318C REPLACEDBY E361.LABELS AMENDED

11kV - PIN INSULATOR33kV - POST INSULATOR

3 bolt - 50mm² 4 bolt - 100mm² & 150mm² ACSR

50mm² 100mm²150mm² ACSR

300mm² HDA

300mm² HDA


Database Ref: 44 File Ref: Design of 25 kV DCOverhead Lines Feb 2001



Design of 25kV Double Circuit


East Midlands Electricity Design Of 25kV Double Circuit Overhead Lines On WoodPoles


File Ref: Design Of 25kV DC OverheadLines Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 14 Version: 2

Revision Log For Design Of 25kV Double Circuit OverheadLines On Wood Poless








CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 5

2. DESIGN DETAILS 5

2.1 Design Basis 5

3. CONDUCTOR 5

4. CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS 6

5. CONDUCTOR JOINTS 6

6. CONDUCTOR ERECTION 6

7. SPAN LENGTHS AND CONDUCTOR SPACING 6

8. MAXIMUM ANGLES OF DEVIATION 6

9. INSULATORS 7

10. POLE SIZES 7

11. STAYS 7

12. SWAN GUARDING, ORCHARD AND RIVER CROSSINGS 7

13. TABLES 8

13.1 Erection Sag Tables 8

13.2 Maximum Wind Loading Spans for Intermediate Poles (8 x200mm² ACSR JAGUAR) 10

13.3 Sizes of Angle/Section and Terminal Poles (200mm² ACSR)JAGUAR 11

13.4 Stay Schedule (200mm² ACSR) JAGUAR 13

14. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 14




TABLES

TABLE 1 (ERECTION SAGS) FOR 200mm² ACSR - CODE NAMEJAGUAR 8

TABLE 2 (ERECTION SAGS) FOR 200mm² ACSR (PVC COVERED) CODENAME JAGUAR 9

TABLE 3. MAXIMUM WIND LOADING SPANS FOR INTERMEDIATEPOLES (8 x 200mm² ACSR JAGUAR) 10

TABLE 4a. SIZES OF ANGLE/SECTION POLES FOR ANGLES UP TO 30°AND ANGLES UP TO 45° - (200mm² ACSR) JAGUAR 11

TABLE 4b. SIZES OF ANGLE/SECTION FOR ANGLES UP TO 60° ANDTERMINAL POLES- (200mm² ACSR) JAGUAR 12

TABLE 5. STAY SCHEDULE (200mm² ACSR) JAGUAR 13




1. FOREWORD

The standard design for 25kV single phase double circuit overhead lines of heavy constructionon wood poles is specifically for use in supplying electrical energy to Rail Track. Each circuitcomprises 2 x 200mm² ACSR phase conductors and 2 x 200mm² ACSR return conductors.

These lines are a special requirement built to standards controlled by Network Performance &Standards, therefore advice on this Section should be referred to them.

2. DESIGN DETAILS

2.1 Design Basis

The Electricity (Overhead Lines) Regulations 1988.Temperature for maximum load, -5.6°CTemperature for maximum sag, 75°C

Augmented mass of conductors for purposes of calculation:Bare conductors 1456 grammes per metrePVC covered conductors 1762 grammes per metre

Wind pressure on:Augmented diameter of conductor 380 Newtons per m²Poles 380 Newtons per m²

Maximum working tension per conductor for design of supportsand fittings 17.78kNMaximum working stress for imported redwood poles,

40% of ultimate extreme fibre stress(Factor of Safety 2.5)

Maximum working stress for steelwork,40% of UTS(Factor of Safety 2.5 on UTS)

3. CONDUCTOR

200mm² (18/3.86mm Al. + 1/3.86mm St) Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR)bare and PVC covered. Code Name Jaguar.




4. CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS

Bolted dead-end clamp.

5. CONDUCTOR JOINTS

Non-tension - Compression, sleeve type.

6. CONDUCTOR ERECTION

Conductors to be pre-stressed by pulling up to 17.78kN using a dynamometer. This tension tobe maintained for one hour by adjustment at 15 minute intervals. Conductors shall then beerected to the sags and tensions given in Tables 1 and 2.

7. SPAN LENGTHS AND CONDUCTOR SPACING

Intermediate PolesConductor Spacing - horizontal 1220mmNormal Span 106mMaximum Span between Intermediate Supports or

between Intermediate Support andAngle/Section or Terminal Support

Bare Conductors 135mPVC Covered Conductors 120m

Angle/Section PolesConductor Spacing - horizontal 1370mmMaximum Span between Angle/Section Supports or

between Angle/Section Support andTerminal Support

Bare Conductors 150mPVC Covered Conductors 135m

8. MAXIMUM ANGLES OF DEVIATION

Intermediate Poles 5°Angle/Section Poles 60°




9. INSULATORS

Line post type for phase conductors and pin type for return conductors.

10 inch (255mm) disc type, four units on phase conductors and one unit on return conductors.

Preformed Helical Binders for Intermediate, Running Angle and Pilot Insulators.

Codes:Post Insulator Pin Insulator

Top Binds DDT 5071436-RP DT 5070736-RPSide Binds FT 5081436-RP FT 5080736-RP

10. POLE SIZES

Maximum wind loading spans for intermediate poles Table 1.Sizes of angle/section and Terminal poles Tables 2a. and 2b..

11. STAYS

Stay schedule for angle and terminal poles Table 3.

All stays to be 7/4.00mm, Grade 1150 staywire with preformed stay make offs. The 22mmdiameter standard adjustable stayrod shall be used on all stays.

Where two or more stays are attached to a pole, the distance between stays shall not be lessthan 2m, at ground level.

Arcing horns are not required on stay insulators.

12. SWAN GUARDING, ORCHARD AND RIVER CROSSINGS

Where it is necessary to guard against swan faults or to cross orchards or navigable waterways,all conductors should be PVC covered. The PVC covered conductors to be Type 16 ofBS6485.

PVC covered conductors should be erected in accordance with Table 2 and should always beterminated on section poles.or terminal poles. At binding-in and clamping positions the PVCmust be removed and all exposed ends of PVC sealed with Denso (or other approved) tape.




13. TABLES

13.1 Erection Sag Tables

TABLE 1 (ERECTION SAGS) FOR 200mm² ACSR - CODE NAME JAGUAR

Pre-stressing Tension 17.78kN

ERECTION SAG/TENSION - 110m BASIC SPAN

TEMP TENSION SAG (m) FOR SPAN LENGTH (m)°C kN 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150-5.5 10.45 0.53 0.64 0.79 0.95 1.13 1.33 1.54 1.77

0 9.30 0.57 0.72 0.88 1.07 1.27 1.49 1.73 1.995 8.39 0.63 0.79 0.98 1.18 1.41 1.65 1.92 2.2010 7.62 0.69 0.87 1.08 1.30 1.55 1.82 2.11 2.4315 6.98 0.75 0.95 1.18 1.43 1.70 1.99 2.31 2.6520 6.44 0.82 1.03 1.28 1.54 1.84 2.16 2.50 2.8725 5.98 0.88 1.11 1.38 1.66 1.98 2.32 2.70 3.0930 5.59 0.94 1.19 1.47 1.78 2.18 2.49 2.88 3.3135 5.24 1.00 1.27 1.57 1.90 2.26 2.65 3.07 3.5240 4.96 1.06 1.34 1.66 2.00 2.39 2.80 3.25 3.7350 4.48 1.17 1.49 1.84 2.22 2.64 3.10 3.60 4.13




TABLE 2 (ERECTION SAGS) FOR 200mm² ACSR (PVC COVERED) CODENAME JAGUAR

Pre-stressing Tension 17.78kN

ERECTION SAG/TENSION - 110m BASIC SPAN

TEMP TENSION SAG(m) FOR SPAN LENGTH (m)°C kN 80 90 100 110 120 130-5.5 9.75 0.70 0.89 1.09 1.32 1.58 1.85

0 8.92 0.76 0.99 1.20 1.45 1.72 2.025 8.29 0.82 1.04 1.29 1.56 1.85 2.1710 7.73 0.88 1.12 1.38 1.67 1.98 2.3315 7.26 0.94 1.19 1.47 1.78 2.12 2.4820 6.83 1.00 1.26 1.56 1.89 2.25 2.6425 6.52 1.05 1.32 1.64 1.98 2.35 2.7630 6.15 1.11 1.40 1.73 2.10 2.50 2.9335 5.86 1.16 1.47 1.82 2.20 2.62 3.0740 5.61 1.22 1.54 1.91 2.30 2.74 3.2150 5.18 1.32 1.67 2.06 2.49 2.96 3.48




13.2 Maximum Wind Loading Spans for Intermediate Poles (8 x 200mm² ACSRJAGUAR)

TABLE 3. MAXIMUM WIND LOADING SPANS FOR INTERMEDIATEPOLES (8 x 200mm² ACSR JAGUAR)

Pole Dimensions Depth Max: Wind Loading SpanHeight above Dia at 1.5m Overall in Bare PVC Covered

Ground from Butt Length Ground Conductors Conductorsm mm m m m m

295 100 909 320 11 2 129 117

335 135 120300 99 89

9.5 320 11.5 2 121 110335 135 120305 98 88

10 320 12 2 114 103335 132 120350 135 -320 101 92

11 335 13 2 118 106350 135 120335 109 99

11.7 350 14 2.3 126 114365 135 120350 113 103

12.7 365 15 2.3 130 118375 135 120365 121 110

13.4 375 16 2.6 133 120390 135 -

14.4 375 17 2.6 121 110390 135 120

15.4 390 18 2.6 127 115415 135 120

BASIS: The Electricity (Overhead Lines) Regulations 1970. Imported Redwood Poles- Maximum working stress 40% of ultimate extreme fibre stress.Loading point 0.4m below pole top.




13.3 Sizes of Angle/Section and Terminal Poles (200mm² ACSR) JAGUAR

TABLE 4a. SIZES OF ANGLE/SECTION POLES FOR ANGLES UP TO 30°AND ANGLES UP TO 45° - (200mm² ACSR) JAGUAR

Pole Diameter at 1.5m from ButtAngles up to 30°

For Wind Loading For Wind LoadingOverall spans not exceeding spans not exceedingLength 100m 120m 135m 150m 100m 120m 135m 150m

of bare bare bare bare bare bare bare barePole 90m 109m 122m 135m 90m 109m 122m 135m

PVC PVC PVC PVC PVC PVC PVC PVCm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm11 295 320 335 335 320 320 335 335

11.5 320 320 335 350 320 320 335 35012 320 335 350 350 320 335 350 35013 320 350 365 365 350 350 365 36514 335 350 365 375 365 365 365 37515 350 365 375 390 375 375 375 39016 365 365 390 390 390 390 390 39017 390 390 390 415 415 415 415 41518 415 415 415 415 435 435 435 435

BASIS: Maximum Working Tension 17.78kN per conductor Stays in accordance withTable 3.Imported Redwood Poles - Factor of Safety 2.5




TABLE 4b. SIZES OF ANGLE/SECTION FOR ANGLES UP TO 60° ANDTERMINAL POLES- (200mm² ACSR) JAGUAR

Pole Diameter at 1.5m from ButtAngles up to 60°

For Wind Loadingspans not exceeding

Overall 100m 120m 135m 150mLength bare bare bare bare Terminal

of 90m 109m 122m 135m PolesPole PVC PVC PVC PVC

m mm mm mm mm mm11 320 320 335 335 295

11.5 335 335 335 350 32012 335 335 350 350 32013 365 365 365 365 32014 375 375 375 375 33515 415 415 415 415 35016 415 415 415 415 36517 435 435 435 435 39018 - - - - 415

BASIS: Maximum Working Tension 17.78kN per conductor Staysin accordance with Table 3.Imported Redwood Poles - Factor of Safety 2.5




13.4 Stay Schedule (200mm² ACSR) JAGUAR

TABLE 5. STAY SCHEDULE (200mm² ACSR) JAGUAR

Angles up to 10°- 1 StayAngles up to 20°- 2 StaysAngles up to 45°- 4 StaysAngles up to 60° - 5 StaysTerminal Poles - 4 Stays

Overall Minimum Stay Spread at Ground LevelLength Angles up to Angles up to Terminal Poles

of 10° 60°Pole Upper Lower Upper Lower

Stays Stays Stays Staysm m m m m m

11.0 6.3 9.0 7.5 9.0 7.711.5 6.8 9.5 8.0 9.5 8.212.0 7.2 10.0 8.5 10.0 8.713.0 8.0 11.0 9.5 11.0 9.714.0 8.6 11.7 10.2 11.7 10.415.0 9.4 12.7 11.2 12.7 11.416.0 10.0 13.4 11.9 13.4 12.117.0 10.9 14.4 12.9 14.4 13.118.0 11.7 15.4 13.9 15.4 14.1

Note:

All Stays to be 7/4.00mm stay wire with 22mm dia. stay rod




14. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS

Each of the General Arrangement Drawings, listed below, contains an Equipment Schedule ofitems of equipment which are required on that arrangement.

DRG CONTENT

2774.1 Angle/Section Pole

2774.2 Terminal Pole

2774.3 Intermediate Pole

Please refer to the Central Records Updating Facility for copies of these drawings.


Database Ref: 46 File Ref: Design of 33kV DoubleCircuit Overhead Lines Feb 2001



Design of 33kV Double Circuit


East Midlands Electricity Design Of 33kV Double Circuit Overhead Lines On Wood PolesOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Design Of 33kV Double CircuitOverhead Lines Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 14 Version: 3

Revision Log For Design Of 33kV Double Circuit OverheadLines On Wood Poles




Section Notes about the change9 Table 5 revised.





CONTENTS

1. SCOPE 5

2. DESIGN DATA 5

2.1 Conductors 5

2.2 Insulators and Fittings 5

2.3 Crossarm assemblies 5

2.4 Supports 6

3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ERECTION OF LINES 6

3.1 Span lengths 6

3.2 Section Lengths 6

3.3 Supports 6

3.4 Maximum Angles of Line Deviation 6

3.5 Wind Loading Spans 6

3.6 Helical Distribution Ties 7

3.7 Staying Arrangements and Crippling Loads for Angle and TerminalSupports 7

3.8 Conductor Design Sags and Tensions 7

3.9 Provision of Safety Sign 7

3.10 Anti-Climbing Devices 7

3.11 Minimum Height of Line Conductors and Clearances 8

3.12 Erection of Auxiliary Equipment 8

3.13 Relationship With Other Bodies 8

4. TABLES 9

4.1 Maximum Working Tensions, Factors of Safety and Limiting DesignFeature

9

4.2 Standard Support Sizes with Maximum Wind Spans on ‘H’ PoleIntermediate Supports.

9



4.3 Design Sag/Tension Tables For 150mm² ACSR 11

4.4 Design Sag/Tension Tables For 300mm² HDA 11

4.5 Maximum Angle of Deviation for 'H' Poles 13

TABLES

TABLE 1. MAXIMUM WORKING TENSIONS, FACTORS OF SAFETYAND LIMITING DESIGN FEATURE 9

TABLE 2a. MEDIUM SUPPORT SIZES WITH MAXIMUM WIND SPANSON ‘H’ POLE INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. 9

TABLE 2b. STOUT SUPPORT SIZES WITH MAXIMUM WIND SPANS ON‘H’ POLE INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. 10

TABLE 2c. EXTRA STOUT SUPPORT SIZES WITH MAXIMUM WINDSPANS ON ‘H’ POLE INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. 10

TABLE 3. DESIGN SAG/TENSION FOR 150mm² ACSR - 120m SPAN 11

TABLE 4. DESIGN SAG/TENSION FOR 300mm² HDA - 120m SPAN 12

TABLE 5. MAXIMUM ANGLE OF DEVIATION FOR 'H' POLES 13



1. SCOPE

This Specification covers 3 phase 33kV, double circuit, overhead lines of heavy constructionon wood poles, employing the following conductors:-

Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR) - Bare150mm² Code Name Dingo. (18/3.35mm Al. + 1/3.35mm St)

Hard Drawn Aluminium (HDA)300mm² Code Name Butterfly. (19/4.65mm)

2. DESIGN DATA

This Specification is designed in accordance with the requirements of The Electricity SupplyRegulations, 1988.

2.1 Conductors

Design tensions take into account the following conditions:-

The minimum factors of safety on conductors should be 2.0 on their calculated breakingloads.

The maximum working tension of conductors shall not exceed 23.3kN (i.e. a factor of safetyof 3.0 on 70kN tension insulator fittings).

The design tensions of aluminium based conductors at 5°C In still air shall not exceed 20% oftheir calculated breaking load to obviate the risk of vibration.

The actual maximum working tensions and factors of safety are shown in Table 1., togetherwith the limiting design feature:

2.2 Insulators and Fittings

Insulator assemblies shall have a minimum factor of safety 3.0.

2.3 Crossarm assemblies

The minimum factor of safety on all crossarm assemblies is 2.5 on the ultimate tensilestrength of the steel.

Crossarm assemblies in general are designed to support conductor downpull on each side ofthe support corresponding to a gradient of 1 in 10 on the maximum span length.



2.4 Supports

The stresses created in intermediate supports are bending stresses due to windage onconductors, the loading point being 600mm below the pole top.

3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ERECTION OF LINES

3.1 Span lengths

The maximum basic span is 120m.

Special conductor tension considerations may be required in single span sections having alength of 90% or less of the recommended span length where the deflection ability ofadjacent pole tops is minimal e.g. heavy angles and terminal positions.

The occasional long span (i.e. 1 in 10) shall be 140m to 150m in length and provide aminimum ratio of 0.4 between mid-span spacing and the still air design sag at 50°C.

3.2 Section Lengths

Section lengths shall be limited to 10 spans.

3.3 Supports

Supports shall be 'H' poles as specified in Table 2 and erected in accordance with DrawingsNos. EME 33D/A1 to EME 33D/A2.

Terminal poles shall conform to Drawing A009. (See the document ‘General ArrangementDrawings for HV Lines’.)

Pole foundation depths are 2.4m.

3.4 Maximum Angles of Line Deviation

The maximum angle of line deviation on post insulators is 5°. The maximum angle of linedeviation on tension insulator strings is given in Table 5.

3.5 Wind Loading Spans

Wind Loading Spans are given in Tables 2a., 2b. and 2c. The table could also apply to anglepost and section angle poles having an angle deviation below 5°. Poles are assumed to haveminimum top dimensions in accordance with BS 1990.



3.6 Helical Distribution Ties

Helical ties shall be fitted to all intermediate supports in accordance with ESI Standard 43-15.Single Ties can be used in all situations, however Double Ties may be used in areas prone tohigh winds.

3.7 Staying Arrangements and Crippling Loads for Angle and Terminal Supports

Stay assemblies shall be to the specifications set out in the document ‘Design of Stays forOverhead Lines’.

The crippling loads imposed on angle and terminal supports shall be determined and theseloadings shall then be related to maximum allowable crippling loads of the poles.

When out of balance tension exists on a section pole, balancing stays should be fitted asrequired. Failure containment stays should be considered as included in the document‘Design of HV Single Circuit Overhead Lines on Wood Poles’.

3.8 Conductor Design Sags and Tensions

The conductor design sags and tensions are given in Tables 3 and 4, and the conductorerection data is contained in the document ‘Erection of HV Conductors’.

3.9 Provision of Safety Sign

Each support on a line to this Specification shall be provided with a Safety Sign to DrawingNo. EME E508.

Where necessary property plates to Drawing No. EME E509 and crane jib height plates toDrawing No. EME E507 shall be fitted.

3.10 Anti-Climbing Devices

All supports carrying auxiliary equipment shall have anti-climbing devices. The methods tobe employed are detailed in ESI Standard 43-90, "Anti-Climbing Devices for HV lines up toand including 400kV".

Additional precautions will be required in high risk areas, such as areas where childrencongregate.



3.11 Minimum Height of Line Conductors and Clearances

The minimum height of line conductors shall comply with The Electricity SupplyRegulations 1988. Data given in this Specification for conductors operating at a maximumtemperature of 50°C and 75°C.

Conductors shall be erected with an additional clearance of 300mm above those specified inthe document ‘Erection of HV Conductors’ to compensate for long term creep.

Clearance to other lines, plant or property shall be as given in the document ‘Overhead LineClearances’.

3.12 Erection of Auxiliary Equipment

Where a support carries auxiliary equipment, the construction of the support shall be to theappropriate Drawing Number as shown in the document ‘General Arrangement Drawings andMaterial Lists for HV Lines’.

The earthing of these supports shall comply with the details given in the Section “E7 EarthSpecification Overhead Network” of the Earthing Manual.

Allowance has been made to the basic support consideration for the additional mechanicalloadings which would be imposed by auxiliary equipment and additional conductors.

3.13 Relationship With Other Bodies

Where lines to this Specification are erected over or alongside the plant of British Telecom orBritish Rail the provisions detailed in the document ‘Overhead Line Clearances’ shall becomplied with. Additionally, the requirements of British Waterways Board should be noted.



4. TABLES

4.1 Maximum Working Tensions, Factors of Safety and Limiting Design Feature

TABLE 1. MAXIMUM WORKING TENSIONS, FACTORS OF SAFETYAND LIMITING DESIGN FEATURE

CONDUCTORSSIZE STRANDING TYPE MWT FOS LIMITING DESIGNmm² (mm) kN FEATURE

ACSR 18/3.35 Al+ BARE 15.9 2.24 Vibration Limit150 1/3.35 St

HDA 300 19/4.65 Al BARE 23.3 2.09 Tension Insulator Fittings

4.2 Standard Support Sizes with Maximum Wind Spans on ‘H’ Pole IntermediateSupports.

TABLE 2a. MEDIUM SUPPORT SIZES WITH MAXIMUM WIND SPANSON ‘H’ POLE INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.

POLE DETAILS WIND SPAN/CRIPP: LOADMIN: MAXIMUM POLE MAX:

TOP DIA. AT WIND HEIGHT CRIPP:LENGTH DIAMETER 1.5m SPAN ABOVE LOAD

FROM 150 300 GROUND FOSMIN MAX BUTT mm² mm² LEVEL * 2.5

m mm mm mm m m m kN10.5 150 190 235 71 60 8.9 22.2011.0 150 190 240 74 62 9.1 21.5811.5 150 190 245 73 62 9.6 20.1112.0 150 190 250 75 64 9.9 19.3413.0 160 200 260 75 64 10.9 19.6814.0 160 205 275 81 68 11.9 18.2915.0 165 210 290 86 73 12.9 18.3416.0 170 215 305 95 81 13.6 18.9217.0 180 220 320 101 86 14.6 20.35

* Hand or Excavator dug Pole Holes ( not augered)



TABLE 2b. STOUT SUPPORT SIZES WITH MAXIMUM WIND SPANS ON‘H’ POLE INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.




m mm mm mm m m m kN10.5 190 250 290 138 117 8.9 54.4211.0 190 250 295 142 121 9.1 58.9611.5 190 250 300 140 119 9.6 48.6212.0 190 250 305 142 121 9.9 46.4713.0 195 255 320 147 125 10.9 44.2114.0 195 255 335 153 130 11.9 40.3315.0 195 260 350 159 135 12.9 37.2516.0 200 265 365 171 145 13.6 37.5817.0 200 265 375 170 144 14.6 34.39


TABLE 2c. EXTRA STOUT SUPPORT SIZES WITH MAXIMUM WINDSPANS ON ‘H’ POLE INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.




m mm mm mm m m m kN10.5 190 250 315 - 152 8.9 63.6911.0 190 250 320 - 156 9.1 61.1811.5 190 250 330 - 161 9.6 58.2012.0 190 250 335 - 163 9.9 55.3813.0 195 255 350 - 166 10.9 52.3514.0 195 255 365 - 171 11.9 47.5815.0 195 260 375 - 169 12.9 42.6516.0 200 265 390 - 179 13.6 42.3417.0 200 265 405 - 185 14.6 39.98




4.3 Design Sag/Tension Tables For 150mm² ACSR

TABLE 3. DESIGN SAG/TENSION FOR 150mm² ACSR - 120m SPAN

TEMP TENSION SAG (m) FOR SPAN LENGTH (m)°C kN 90 100 110 120 130 140 1500 7.78 0.66 0.81 0.98 1.17 1.37 1.59 1.835 7.14 0.72 0.89 1.07 1.28 1.50 1.74 1.9910 6.57 0.78 0.96 1.17 1.39 1.63 1.89 2.1715 6.07 0.84 1.04 1.26 1.50 1.76 2.04 2.3520 5.63 0.91 1.12 1.36 1.62 1.90 2.20 2.5325 5.26 0.97 1.20 1.46 1.73 2.03 2.36 2.7130 4.93 1.04 1.28 1.55 1.85 2.17 2.52 2.8935 4.64 1.10 1.36 1.65 1.96 2.30 2.67 3.0740 4.39 1.17 1.44 1.74 2.07 2.43 2.82 3.2445 4.17 1.23 1.52 1.83 2.18 2.56 2.97 3.4150 3.98 1.29 1.59 1.92 2.29 2.69 3.12 3.5865 3.51 1.46 1.80 2.18 2.60 3.05 3.53 4.0675 3.27 1.57 1.93 2.34 2.79 3.27 3.79 4.35

ERECTION SAG/TENSION CHART FOR 150mm² ACSR CONDUCTOR - DOUBLECIRCUIT

120m Basic Span (Double Circuit) with Overtension 10% at 15°C

TEMP TENSION SAG (m) FOR SPAN LENGTH (m)

°C kN 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 1500 8.61 0.36 0.47 0.60 0.73 0.88 1.05 1.24 1.43 1.652 8.32 0.37 0.49 0.61 0.76 0.92 1.09 1.28 1.49 1.714 8.05 0.38 0.50 0.64 0.79 0.95 1.13 1.33 1.54 1.776 7.80 0.40 0.52 0.66 0.81 0.98 1.17 1.37 1.59 1.838 7.55 0.41 0.54 0.68 0.84 1.02 1.21 1.42 1.65 1.8910 7.31 0.43 0.56 0.71 0.87 1.05 1.25 1.47 1.71 1.9612 7.09 0.44 0.58 0.73 0.90 1.09 1.30 1.52 1.77 2.0314 6.87 0.46 0.60 0.76 0.93 1.13 1.34 1.58 1.83 2.1016 6.66 0.47 0.62 0.78 0.96 1.17 1.39 1.63 1.89 2.1718 6.47 0.49 0.64 0.81 0.99 1.20 1.43 1.68 1.95 2.2420 6.29 0.50 0.66 0.83 1.03 1.24 1.48 1.73 2.01 2.3122 6.11 0.52 0.68 0.86 1.06 1.28 1.52 1.79 2.07 2.3824 5.94 0.53 0.70 0.88 1.09 1.32 1.57 1.84 2.14 2.4526 5.78 0.55 0.72 0.91 1.12 1.36 1.62 1.90 2.20 2.53



4.4 Design Sag/Tension Tables For 300mm² HDA

TABLE 4. DESIGN SAG/TENSION FOR 300mm² HDA - 120m SPAN

TEMP TENSION SAG (m) FOR SPAN LENGTH (m)°C kN 90 100 110 120 130 140 1500 7.98 1.10 1.36 1.65 1.96 2.31 2.67 3.075 7.52 1.17 1.45 1.75 2.08 2.45 2.84 3.2610 7.12 1.24 1.53 1.85 2.20 2.58 3.00 3.4415 6.77 1.30 1.61 1.95 2.32 2.72 3.15 3.6220 6.46 1.37 1.69 2.04 2.43 2.85 3.30 3.7925 6.18 1.43 1.76 2.13 2.54 2.98 3.45 3.9630 5.93 1.49 1.83 2.22 2.64 3.10 3.60 4.1335 5.71 1.54 1.91 2.31 2.74 3.22 3.74 4.2940 5.51 1.60 1.98 2.39 2.84 3.34 3.87 4.4545 5.33 1.66 2.04 2.47 2.94 3.45 4.01 4.6050 5.16 1.71 2.11 2.55 3.04 3.57 4.14 4.7565 4.73 1.86 2.30 2.78 3.31 3.89 4.51 5.1875 4.50 1.96 2.42 2.93 3.48 4.09 4.74 5.45

ERECTION SAG/TENSION CHART FOR 300mm² HDA - CONDUCTOR SINGLECIRCUIT

100m Basic Span with Overtension 10% at 15°C

TEMP TENSION SAG (m) FOR SPAN LENGTH (m)

°C kN 60 70 80 90 100 110 1200 11.02 0.36 0.48 0.63 0.80 0.99 1.20 1.422 10.58 0.37 0.50 0.66 0.83 1.03 1.24 1.484 10.17 0.39 0.52 0.68 0.87 1.07 1.29 1.546 9.79 0.40 0.55 0.71 0.90 1.11 1.35 1.608 9.42 0.42 0.57 0.74 0.94 1.16 1.40 1.6610 9.08 0.43 0.59 0.77 0.97 1.20 1.45 1.7312 8.76 0.45 0.61 0.79 1.01 1.24 1.50 1.7914 8.46 0.46 0.63 0.82 1.04 1.29 1.56 1.8516 8.18 0.48 0.65 0.85 1.08 1.33 1.61 1.9118 7.92 0.49 0.67 0.88 1.11 1.37 1.66 1.9820 7.68 0.51 0.69 0.91 1.15 1.42 1.71 2.0422 7.45 0.53 0.72 0.93 1.18 1.46 1.77 2.1024 7.24 0.54 0.74 0.96 1.22 1.50 1.82 2.1726 7.04 0.56 0.76 0.99 1.25 1.55 1.87 2.23



4.5 Maximum Angle of Deviation for 'H' Poles

TABLE 5. MAXIMUM ANGLE OF DEVIATION FOR 'H' POLES

MAXIMUM ANGLE OF DEVIATIONGRADE 1150 (70T) STAYWIRE - ALL STAYS 7/4.0mm

NUMBER OF INNER LEG OUTER LEGCONDUCTORS MIDDLE MIDDLE BOTTOMAND ANGLE OF CROSSARM CROSSARM CROSSARM

STAY SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL LEVELCOND: DEG: 1 STAY 2 STAYS 1 STAY 2 STAYS 1 STAY 2 STAYS

6 x 45° - - 0° - 24° - - -150mm² 45° - - 24° - 53° - 24° - 53° -ACSR 45° - 53° - 87° 53° - 87° - - -

45° TERM: TERM: - -45° - - 0° - 15° - - -

6 x 45° - - 15° - 30° - 15° - 30° -300mm² 45° - 30° - 45° 30° - 45° - - -

HDA 45° - 45° - 60° 45° - 60° - 45° - 60° -45° - 60° - 80° 60° - 80° - - 60° - 80°45° - TERM: - TERM: - -

N.B. Line Terminated on Two 'H' Poles





Database Ref: 45 File Ref: 33kV Double CircuitDrawings & Materials Feb 2001



33kv Double Circuit

Drawings & Materials

East Midlands Electricity 33kV Double Circuit Drawings & MaterialsOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: 33kV Double Circuit Drawings &Materials Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 8 Version: 3

Revision Log For 33kV Double Circuit Drawings & Materials




Section Notes about the change9 Items E313B and C replaced by item E361





CONTENTS

1. MATERIALS LISTS AND ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 4

FIGURES33D/A1. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF 33KV DOUBLE CIRCUIT, UNEARTHED

CONSTRUCTION. INTERMEDIATE POLE 633D/A2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF 33KV DOUBLE CIRCUIT, UNEARTHED

CONSTRUCTION. SECTION POLE

TABLESTABLE 33D/A1. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF 33KV DOUBLE CIRCUIT, UNEARTHED

CONSTRUCTION. INTERMEDIATE POLE - MATERIALS LIST 5TABLE 33D/A2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF 33KV DOUBLE CIRCUIT, UNEARTHED

CONSTRUCTION. SECTION POLE - MATERIALS LIST 7



1. MATERIALS LISTS AND ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS

This section gives the basic poles and the types of supports used in the construction of 33kVdouble circuit lines for the overhead line network.

The basic pole fabrications are shown in Volume 2, Drawings and Reference Information, ofthe Overhead Line Manual.



TABLE 33D/A1. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF 33kV DOUBLE CIRCUIT,UNEARTHED CONSTRUCTION. INTERMEDIATE POLE -MATERIALS LIST

QTY DESCRIPTION E DRG2 Wood Pole E1062 Crossarm (Top and Bottom) E2201 Crossarm (Middle) E2206 Post Insulator E3051 Safety Sign E508

A.R Number Plate E5032 Circuit Identification Plate E5042 M20 Bolt & Nuts, to suit pole top dia -1 Bonding Strap E6101 Brace Baulk E111

A.R Kicking Block E1112/4 Curved Square Washer E2602/4 Flat Square Washer E2612/4 M20 bolt & nuts to suit pole diameter plus

block-

6 Helical Distribution Ties - Top or -6 Helical Distribution Ties - Side -

A.R - AS REQUIRED



33d/A1. General Arrangement Of 33kv Double Circuit, UnearthedConstruction. Intermediate Pole


33D A1JAN 2001


DRAWN BYCAD INPUT

TH Scale N.T.S. Class-

33kV DOUBLE CIRCUIT UNEARTHEDCONSTRUCTION - INTERMEDIATE POLE

1.526

2894

4114

KICKING & BRACE BLOCKS(E111)

POLE NO. (E503)

SAFETY SIGN (E508)

INTERMEDIATE POLE (E106)

6

TA

TA

BOTTOM CROSSARM (E220)

TOP CROSSARM (E220)

MIDDLE CROSSARM (E220)

POST INSULATOR (E305)

1220

1220

Circuit Identification Plate (E504)

BONDING STRAP (E610)



TABLE 33D/A2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF 33kV DOUBLE CIRCUIT,UNEARTHED CONSTRUCTION. SECTION POLE -MATERIALS LIST

QTY COMPONENT DRG2 Wood Pole E1071 Crossarm (Top) E2211 Crossarm (Middle) E2221 Crossarm (Bottom, Straight Line Sect:) E221

or1 Crossarm (Bottom, Section Angle) E22336 Disc Insulator E3066 Post Insulator E30512 Ball Ended Eye Hook E36112 Socket/Clevis Adaptor E31212 Socket Tongue E31712 Conductor termination - 100/150mm² ACSR E326

or 300mm² HDA OHJ601 Safety Sign E508

A.R Number Plate E5032 Circuit Identification Plate E5046 M20 bolt & nuts, to suit Pole Top dia -

A.R Brace Block E111A.R Curved Square Washer E260A.R Flat Square Washer E261A.R M20 bolt & nuts to suit Pole dia plus block -

1 Bonding Strap E6106 Helical Distribution Ties - Top or -6 Helical Distribution Ties - Side -

A.R - AS REQUIRED



33D/A2. General Arrangement Of 33kv Double Circuit, UnearthedConstruction. Section Pole


33D A2JAN 2001


DRAWN BYCAD INPUT

TH Scale N.T.S. Class-

33kV DOUBLE CIRCUIT UNEARTHEDCONSTRUCTION - SECTION POLE

1.526

2894

4114

KICKING & BRACE BLOCKS(E111)

POLE NO. (E503)

SAFETY SIGN (E508)

INTERMEDIATE POLE (E106)

6

TA

TA

OR BOTTOM CROSSARM IN-LINE E221

TOP CROSSARM (E221)

MIDDLE CROSSARM (E221)

POST INSULATOR (E305)

1220

1220

Circuit Identification Plate (E504)

BONDING STRAP (E610)

1532810 BOTTOM CROSSARM ANGLE E223


Document Ref: Vol 1 Sect 10 Part 2 Document Owner: Network Performance& Standards nt

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed by DateJAN 2001 T Haggis Jan 2001

Design of Stays

East Midlands Electricity Design of StaysDistribution Business

Vol 1 Sect 10 Part 2 Page 2 of 18 Version: JAN 2001

REVISION LOG


Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date2Notes: Bonding Section. Sections renumbered. Addition of paragraph and figure re Fencing in section

9. Note to table 4 re 315 kVA Transformers removed.Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By DateJAN 2001 T Haggis Jan 2001Notes:



CONTENTS

1. STAY STRANDS AND STAY FITTINGS FOR OVERHEAD LINES 5

2. STAY ASSEMBLIES 5

3. ANCHOR ASSEMBLIES 5

3.1 Manual Screw-in Stay Anchor 5

3.2 Power Installed Screw Anchors 6

3.3 Stay Rod and Block. 6

4. INSULATION OF STAYS 7

4.1 Stay Insulators for Lines up to 33kV 8

4.2 Stay Insulator Link 8

5. BONDING OF STAYS 8

6. STAY STRAPS 8

7. MULTIPLE STAY ARRANGEMENTS 9

8. PROTECTION OF STAY RODS 9

9. PRECAUTIONS AGAINST ACCESS 10

9.1 Prevention of Unauthorised Climbing 10

9.2 Protection against Stock 10

10. STAYS ON JOINTLY USED EME/BT POLES 10

11. STRENGTH AND USE OF STAY COMPONENTS 11

11.1 Components 11

11.2 Strength of Stay Components and Permissive Working Load 12

12. STAY CALCULATIONS 13

12.1 Terminal Pole Design Considerations 13

12.2 Angle Pole Design Considerations 14

12.3 Design Data for Stay and Strut Load Calculations 15

12.4 Formulae 16

12.5 Strut Loads (kN) and Stays Required 17



FIGURESFIG.1. STAY ARRANGEMENT 7

FIG.2. EXAMPLES OF FENCING FOR STAYS 10

FIG.3. STAYING OF TERMINAL POLES 13

FIG.4. STAYING OF ANGLES POLES 14

TABLESTABLE 1. STRENGTH OF STAY COMPONENTS 12

TABLE 2. PERMISSIVE WORKING LOADS - HELICAL FITTINGS 12

TABLE 3. DESIGN DATA FOR STAY AND STRUT LOAD CALCULATIONS 15

TABLE 4. STRUT LOADS (kN) AND STAYS REQUIRED FOR A NORMAL45° ANGLE OF STAY SPREAD USING 7/3.25mm (7/4.00mm)STAY STRAND 17

TABLE 5. STRUT LOADS (kN) AND STAYS REQUIRED FOR A MINIMUM30° ANGLE OF STAY SPREAD USING 7/3.25mm (7/4.00mm)STAY STRAND 18



1. STAY STRANDS AND STAY FITTINGS FOR OVERHEAD LINES

This Document describes typical stay assemblies which are suitable for use with overheadlines of wood pole construction and which range from LV services to lines having operatingvoltages of up to 33kV.

Wood brace blocks for ‘H’ poles and foundation blocks are included with the specificationfor stay blocks.

The strength of materials and fittings in the arrangements shown meet the requirements ofESI Standards on the design of overhead lines on wood poles.

2. STAY ASSEMBLIES

All stays will normally be set at a 45 degree angle to the pole leg, that is, the stay spreadshall be the pole height less the sinking depth measured on level ground (for stay anglesgreater than 45 degrees, no reinforcement is needed; less than 45 degrees, (30 degreesminimum) increase staying by extra stay. The recommended stay assemblies, materials andminimum failing load of each fitting (and the weakest fitting of each assembly) are shown inSub-Section 11.2

Uplift calculations are based on installation in sand of density 1595kg/m³ which is consideredto be representative of average worst ground conditions, with a minimum angle between stayand pole of 30 degrees. If very wet soft ground conditions are encountered, specialfoundations should be considered; in such cases the ‘H’ pole bracing block may be used.

Helical fittings for stays are shown on Equipment Drawing No. E406.

3. ANCHOR ASSEMBLIES

3.1 Manual Screw-in Stay Anchor

The Manual Screw-in stay anchor as shown in Equipment Drawing No. E412 is for use withLV service lines, subject to soil conditions being suitable and should resist an uplift of 12kN.It is installed to a depth of 1.2m, by means of a socket wrench.



3.2 Power Installed Screw Anchors

Power installed screw anchors are the preferred type of anchor.

The power installed screw anchors used comprise of one or two steel flanges (discs) normally305mm (12 inches) in diameter welded to a rectangular body to form a single turn helix.

If the anchor has two helix flanges, it is referred to as ‘twin disc’, this type of screw anchor isnormally used on High Voltage overhead line construction while the ‘single disc’ type isusually used on Low voltage and LV service line construction.

The selection of anchor type and connector rod length depends upon the type of ground; softground may require a twin disc anchor with 3 metre rod whereas in firmer ground a singledisc anchor and 2 metre rod may be sufficient.

The anchor is screwed to a 22mm diameter, 3m or 2m long galvanised steel tension connectorrod which, when the anchor assembly is properly installed, will extend just above the groundlevel.

3.3 Stay Rod and Block.

3.3.1 Conditions of useWhere ground or access conditions make installation of screw anchors and anchor rodsimpracticable wooden stay blocks and stay rods may be used.

3.3.2 Excavation and installation of stay blocks

The hole excavated for the stay blocks shall be two metres deep.

In all cases, the block shall be undercut into undisturbed ground and placed with the flat sideuppermost to provide the maximum uplift resistance. The ground must be slotted so that thestay rod is in line with the stay strand. The position and angle of the undercut will depend onthe length of stay rod used and the angle of the stay to the pole.

The wood stay block is designed to have a minimum failing load (MFL) and resistance touplift of 110kN and is for use with Type 1 or Type 2 stay rods.

If very wet soft ground conditions are encountered, the use of the Type 1 ‘H’ pole bracingblock should be considered for use as the stay block.

Use of small concrete stay blocks is only permitted on LV ABC Service Lines to propertieswhere space at ground level does not allow for the installation of a single disc screw anchoror a normal size wooden stay block.



4. INSULATION OF STAYS

All stays shall be insulated except where otherwise stated (e.g. on fully insulated LV ABCsystems) to reduce risk of dangerous potential gradients at ground level and, in the case ofstays on earthed structures, to prevent electrolytic corrosion of stay rods. The height of thestay insulator shall be such that no part of the insulator shall be less than 3m above groundlevel.

For lines up to 33kV, the recommended minimum distance along the stay between the pointof contact with the cross-arm or pole and the top of the stay insulator is 1.8m. This achievesan optimum impulse voltage withstand value for the line.

In situations where a broken jumper or a broken stay may result in the stay becoming ‘live’,the insulator must be placed below any likely point of contact with live metal, but not below aposition which would fail to maintain a minimum of 3m above ground where the stay couldswing if broken.

FIG.1. STAY ARRANGEMENTS

Fig.1. shows the recommended staying arrangements for use with helical fittings. TheArrangement may be used for new construction or stay replacement. In an insulated stay theheight of the insulator can be adjusted by altering the length of the top and bottom staystrands.

NOTE

1. THE HEIGHT OF THE STAY INSULATOR SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 3m ABOVE GROUND LEVEL EVEN WHERE STAY IS BROKEN AND IN CONTACT WITH LIVE CONDUCTOR.

2. FOR POLE TOP MAKE OFF, UNWRAP CENTRE KING WIRE AND BOND TO STEELWORK.

STAY GRIP

STAY ROD

STAY STRAND

STAY GRIP

STAY INSULATOR

POLE TOP MAKE OFF

STAY STRAND

STAY SPLICE

STAY GRIP

STA

Y3-M

D.S

KF

INSULATED STAY UNINSULATED STAY

3m -0+0.2



4.1 Stay Insulators for Lines up to 33kV

Porcelain stay insulators in accordance with Equipment Drawing E403, shall be used asfollows:

Type 1 - Single. For all stays on 11kV lines and all stays on earthed 33kV structures.LV Open wire and Open wire to ABC transitions.

Type 2 - Double. Linked in series for 33kV where steelwork is not earthed.On fully insulated ABC systems no stay insulator is required.

4.2 Stay Insulator Link

The insulator link is a pre-formed helical fitting used to join two Type 2 porcelain insulatorsin series and has a minimum failing load at least equal to the stay assembly.

5. BONDING OF STAYS

All stays supporting HV lines should be bonded at the top of the steelwork (see also thedocument ‘Earthing And Bonding Design For The Overhead Network’)

The method of bonding stays is to take one wire from the stay strand, or the centre ‘king’wire from the pole top make off, and connect it to a convenient bolt on the HV steelwork.

A stay attached to a stay strap need not be bonded separately if it is fitted to a bolt in contactwith the steelwork.

6. STAY STRAPS

Stay straps, to Equipment Drawing No. E408, are provided as an alternative means ofattaching a stay to a pole. The stay strap must be fitted beneath the head of an M20 bolt andnot under the nut. A square, curved washer must be placed between the nut and the pole.

The safe working load of a stay attached to a stay strap must not exceed 28kN, which meansthat the stay strap should not be used with 7/4.00 grade 1150 stay strands.



7. MULTIPLE STAY ARRANGEMENTS

Where multiple stay arrangements are used, on single or ‘H’ poles, the stay anchors or blocksshould be installed with sufficient space between them to ensure an adequate frustum of soilin the line of pull of each block. The length of undisturbed ground between stay assembliesshould not be less than 2m.

When two stays are fitted to a single pole, the preferred arrangement is in tandem (i.e. onebehind the other), but splayed stays are acceptable.

In all cases the length of undisturbed ground between stay anchorings should not be less than2m.

For details of stay arrangements see the drawings based on STAY1 and STAY2(a and b) inthe document ‘Stay Arrangement Drawings’.

Non-symmetrical staying arrangements are not approved for use on ‘H’ poles

‘H’ poles used as angle poles shall be fitted with double stays per leg. ‘H' poles erected asterminals may be equipped with single, double or triple stays per leg as may ‘H’ poles erectedas an out of balance stayed section pole between sections of lines built to dissimilar basicspans.

Triple stays shall comprise two splayed stays as above set at the approved angle to the pole,the third stay being placed equidistant between the two, but entering the ground at least onemetre behind them viewed from the pole.

8. PROTECTION OF STAY RODS

Where Stay Rods to Drawing No E401 are installed in ground with high acid content, such aspeat and refuse disposal areas, it may be necessary to protect the rod against corrosion. Thismay be achieved by application of a suitable tape or heat shrinkable tubing. Anti-corrosiontape, is recommended.



9. PRECAUTIONS AGAINST ACCESS

9.1 Prevention of Unauthorised Climbing

Where necessary, barbed wire shall be fitted to stays in accordance with EATS 43-90, toprevent unauthorised climbing.

Supports near to or in high risk areas may require additional measures.

9.2 Protection against Stock

Where stock are liable to have access to the stay a post and rail fence will need to be erectedto prevent the animals rubbing against the stay and rod. Rubbing posts will not be used asthey can cause damage to animals.

FIG.2. EXAMPLES OF FENCING FOR STAYS

10. STAYS ON JOINTLY USED EME/BT POLES

The practice of tape application for the protection of stays on jointly used LV/BT poles hasbeen discontinued.

The following is an extract from Engineering Recommendation EB/BT1, ‘Conditions forBritish Telecom and East Midlands Electricity Joint Use of Poles’.

“Before climbing an Electricity Board pole, BT staff should look for any damage to thepower conductors or insulators or objects such as tree-branches or kite-strings on the pole,which could put the Company's conductors in contact with metal (e.g. a stay) liable to betouched while working on the BT attachments.”

EXAMPLES OF STAY FENCING

SPLAYED STAYSIN LINE STAYS

SINGLE STAY

FEN

-STA

Y.SK

F



11. STRENGTH AND USE OF STAY COMPONENTS

11.1 Components

Anchor Assemblies:Manual Screw Anchor 150mm diameter helix disc and 1.7m rodPower installed Screw anchor single disc - one 305mm diameter helix disc

twin disc - two 305mm diameter helix discs spaced675mm apart

Anchor rods 3.2m long, 7/8 in. diameter (normal types ofground) (7/8 BSW Threads)2.14m long, 7/8 in. diameter (very hardground) (7/8 BSW Threads)

Turnbuckle for use with anchor rods (7/8 BSW Thread)

Stay Blocks:Wood - 250mm x 125mm x 1300mmConcrete - 460mm x 460mm x 96mm

Stay Rods:Type 1 - 1.8m long x 11/16 in. diam. (11/16 BSW Thread)Type 2 - 2.4m long x 7/8 in. diam.(7/8 BSW Thread)

Stay Strand:7/3.25mm Grade 11507/4.00mm Grade 1150

Stay Strap: Maximum Working Tension 28kN (Onlysuitable for use with 7/3.25mm stay strand)

Stay Insulators: Type 1 - LV/HV porcelainType 2 - 33kV porcelain

Stay Insulator Link: Only to be used for 7/4.00mm Staywire

Application Of Stay Insulators:Fully insulated ABC - noneLV Open Wire lines to ABC - one type 111kV and 33kV earthed poles - one type 1.11kV unearthed poles, - one type 133kV unearthed poles - two type 2 with link assembly.



11.2 Strength of Stay Components and Permissive Working Load

TABLE 1. STRENGTH OF STAY COMPONENTS

SCREW BLOCK AND STAYSTAY ANCHOR ROD ASSEMBLY INSULATOR TYPICAL

STRAND ASSEMBLY ROD BLOCK APPLICATIONSIZE MFL NO OF MFL MFL MFL MFLmm kN DISCS kN TYPE kN kN TYPE kN

7/3.25 66.8 1ma 12 - - - 1 110 LV SERVICES7/3.25 66.8 1 85 1 65 65co 1 110 LV SERVICES7/3.25 66.8 1 85 1 65 110 1 110 LV MAINS7/3.25 66.8 2 135 2 110 110 1 110 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 101.0 2 135 2 110 110 1 110 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 101.0 2 135 2 110 110 2* 110 33kV LINES

shaded cell indicates weakest component of assembly.ma - Manual Screw-in type rod.co - Concrete block restricted to LV Service Lines only.* - Type 2 Insulator and insulator assembly for use on unearthed 33kV structures.

TABLE 2. PERMISSIVE WORKING LOADS - HELICAL FITTINGS

SCREW ROD & BLOCK PERMISS.STAY ANCHOR ASSEMBLY INSUL- WORKING TYPICAL

STRAND NO. OF ROD BLOCK ATOR LOAD APPLICATIONDISCS TYPE TYPE kN

DIRECT TO POLE TOP7/3.25 manual 1 - - 1 4.8 LV SERVICES7/3.25 1 1 concrete 1 26.0 LV SERVICES7/3.25 1 1 wood 1 26.0 LV MAINS7/3.25 2 2 wood 1 34.7 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 2 2 wood 1 40.4 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 2 2 wood 2* 40.4 33kV LINES

TO STAY STRAP7/3.25 manual 1 - - 1 4.8 LV SERVICES7/3.25 1 1 concrete 1 26.0 LV SERVICES7/3.25 1 1 wood 1 26.0 HV/LV LINES7/3.25 2 2 wood 1 28.0 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 Stay strap not Applicable

* Type 2 Insulator and insulator assembly for use on unearthed 33kV structures.



12. STAY CALCULATIONS

The following illustrations, tables and formulae have been included to assist in calculatingwithstand strut loads and staying arrangements.

12.1 Terminal Pole Design Considerations

FIG.3. STAYING OF TERMINAL POLES

P

TU

C

ø

STAY

TER

M.S

KF

P = TOTAL CONDUCTOR PULLø = ANGLE BETWEEN POLE AND STAYT = TENSION IN STAY WIREC = CRIPPLING LOAD ON POLEU = UPLIFT ON STAY



12.2 Angle Pole Design Considerations

FIG.4. STAYING OF ANGLES POLES

STAY

P

R

A

P

T

STAY

T

ø

P

ø

STAY

ANG

.SKF

R = DIRECTIONAL RESULTANT FORCE A = ANGLE OF LINE DEVIATIONT = TENSION IN STAY WIREP = TOTAL CONDUCTOR PULLø = ANGLE BETWEEN POLE AND STAY

ø



12.3 Design Data for Stay and Strut Load Calculations

TABLE 3. DESIGN DATA FOR STAY AND STRUT LOADCALCULATIONS

DESIGN DATA FOR HV CONDUCTORSINGLE CIRCUIT LINES 50mm² 50mm² 100mm² 100mm² 150mm² 300mm²TO ESI STANDARD 43-40 ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR HDA

PVC PVCRELIABILITY FACTOR 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

Weightspan Metres 100 100 100 100 100 100Windspan Metres 100 100 100 100 100 100Maximum Conductor Weight(MCW) kg/m 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.6Maximum Conductor Tension(MCT) kgf 1012 1012 1474 1474 1664 2058Maximum Conductor Pressure(MCP) kg/m 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.4 3.0Maximum Equipment Weight*

kg 74 74 74 74 74 74

NOTE:

* The Maximum Equipment Weight (pole top steelwork, insulators etc.) of 74 kgcovers all pole configurations.

• Assumptions:

Conductor Downthrust is limited to 1:10 in either or both directions (0.199 for AnglePoles, 0.0995 for Terminal Poles).

Stays are installed to have an ultimate uplift capability in excess of 55kN.

The permissible working load in the stay is 34.68kN for the 7/3.25mm stay strand , whichcorresponds to a maximum horizontal component of 2500kg.



12.4 Formulae

The following formulae are taken from ESI Standard 43-40

Single and 'H' Angle poles

Vertical Load kgf =N x [(Weightspan x MCW) + (MCT x Downthrust)] + Equipment Weight

Horizontal Load kgf =N x [(Windspan x MCP x Cos(AΦ/2)) + (2 x MCT x Sin(AΦ/2))]

Single and 'H' Terminal Poles

Vertical Load kgf =N x [(0.5 x Weightspan x MCW) + (MCT x Downthrust)]+ EquipmentWeight

Horizontal Load kgf =N x MCT

NOTE

N = Number of Conductors (N/2 for 'H' Poles).

AΦ = Angle of Line Deviation.

Withstand Values are derived by multiplying the vertical and horizontal loads by 1.6

Strut Load Capability =Vertical Withstand Component + Horizontal Withstand Component

Tan Φ

Number of Stays Required =Horizontal Withstand Component

Sin Φ x Max: Permissible Working Load in Stay

NOTE

ΦΦΦΦ = Angle of Stay Spread



12.5 Strut Loads (kN) and Stays Required

TABLE 4. STRUT LOADS (kN) AND STAYS REQUIRED FOR ANORMAL 45° ANGLE OF STAY SPREAD USING 7/3.25mm(7/4.00mm) STAY STRAND

50mm² ACSR (INCLUDING PVC)STRUT STAYS STRUT STAYS

LINE LOAD REQ: LINE LOAD REQ:DEVIATION kN No DEVIATION kN No

5° 31 1 35° 55 2SINGLE 10° 35 1 40° 59 2

15° 39 1 45° 62 2POLES 20° 43 2 (1) 50° 66 3 (2)

25° 47 2 55° 70 3 (2)30° 51 2 60° 73 3 (2)

'T' OFF/TERMINAL POLE 58 3 (2)

100mm² ACSR(including PVC)

150mm² ACSR 300mm² HDA

LINE STRUT STAYS STRUT STAYS STRUT STAYSDEVIATION LOAD REQ: LOAD REQ: LOAD REQ:

kN No. kN No. kN No.5° 40 1 45 1 56 1

SINGLE 10° 46 2 (1) 52 2 (1) 64 2POLES 15° 52 2 (1) 58 2 72 2

20° 58 2 65 2 81 3 (2)25° 64 2 72 3 (2) 89 3 (2)30° 70 3 (2) 78 3 (2) 97 3

'H' 35° 39 2 43 2 53 2POLES 40° 41 2 46 2 57 2

VALUES 45° 44 2 49 2 61 2ARE 50° 47 2 52 2 65 3 (2)PER 55° 49 2 55 2 68 3 (2)LEG 60° 52 2 58 2 72 3 (2)

'T' /TERM: 42 2 47 2 58 3 (2)Notes: (n) Number of 7/4.00 stays which may be used instead of 7/3.25 stays

‘H’ poles used as angle poles shall be fitted with double stays per leg -section 6.



TABLE 5. STRUT LOADS (kN) AND STAYS REQUIRED FOR AMINIMUM 30° ANGLE OF STAY SPREAD USING 7/3.25mm(7/4.00mm) STAY STRAND



5° 40 2 35° 82 3SINGLE 10° 47 2 40° 88 3

15° 54 2 45° 95 3POLES 20° 61 3 (2) 50° 101 4 (3)

25° 68 3 55° 107 4 (3)30° 75 3 60° 113 4 (3)





kN No. kN No. kN No.5° 52 2 58 2 72 2

SINGLE 10° 63 3 (2) 70 3 (2) 87 3POLES 15° 73 3 (2) 81 3 101 3

20° 83 3 93 3 116 4 (3)25° 93 3 104 4 (3) 130 4 (3)30° 103 4 (3) 116 4 (3) 144 4 (3)

'H' 35° 57 3 64 3 80 3POLES 40° 62 3 70 3 86 3

VALUES 45° 67 3 75 3 93 3ARE 50° 72 3 80 3 99 4PER 55° 76 3 85 3 106 4LEG 60° 81 3 90 3 112 4

'T' /TERM: 67 3 76 3 93 4 (3)

Note:

(n) Number of 7/4.00 stays which may be used instead of 7/3.25 stays

Number of stays for angle poles = Number of stays for a stay angle of 45° increased byextra stay in accordance with Section 2.


Database Ref: 17 File Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 10 -Design Of Stays JAN 2002



Design of Stays

East Midlands Electricity Design of StaysOverhead Line Manual Vol. 1

File Ref: OHL Vol 1 Section 10 –Design Of Stays JAN 2002

2 of 19 Version : 3

Revision Log For Design of Stays



REVISION LOG


Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date2 Jan 01 T Haggis Jan 2001Notes: Bonding Section. Sections renumbered. Addition of paragraph and figure re Fencing in section

9. Note to table 4 re 315 kVA Transformers removed.Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date3 Jan 02 T Haggis Jan 2002Notes: Stay fencing drawings re-drawn for clarity



3 of 19 Version : 3

CONTENTS

1. STAY STRANDS AND STAY FITTINGS FOR OVERHEAD LINES 5

2. STAY ASSEMBLIES 5

3. ANCHOR ASSEMBLIES 5

3.1 Manual Screw-in Stay Anchor 5

3.2 Power Installed Screw Anchors 6

3.3 Stay Rod and Block. 6

4. INSULATION OF STAYS 7

4.1 Stay Insulators for Lines up to 33kV 8

4.2 Stay Insulator Link 8

5. BONDING OF STAYS 8

6. STAY STRAPS 8

7. MULTIPLE STAY ARRANGEMENTS 9

8. PROTECTION OF STAY RODS 9

9. PRECAUTIONS AGAINST ACCESS 10

9.1 Prevention of Unauthorised Climbing 10

9.2 Protection against Stock 10

10. STAYS ON JOINTLY USED EME/BT POLES 11

11. STRENGTH AND USE OF STAY COMPONENTS 12

11.1 Components 12

11.2 Strength of Stay Components and Permissive Working Load 13

12. STAY CALCULATIONS 14

12.1 Terminal Pole Design Considerations 14

12.2 Angle Pole Design Considerations 15

12.3 Design Data for Stay and Strut Load Calculations 16

12.4 Formulae 17



4 of 19 Version : 3

12.5 Strut Loads (kN) and Stays Required 18

FIGURES

FIG.1. STAY ARRANGEMENT 7

FIG.2. EXAMPLES OF FENCING FOR STAYS Error! Bookmark not defined.

FIG.3. STAYING OF TERMINAL POLES 14

FIG.4. STAYING OF ANGLES POLES 15

TABLES

TABLE 1. STRENGTH OF STAY COMPONENTS 13

TABLE 2. PERMISSIVE WORKING LOADS - HELICAL FITTINGS 13

TABLE 3. DESIGN DATA FOR STAY AND STRUT LOAD CALCULATIONS 16

TABLE 4. STRUT LOADS (kN) AND STAYS REQUIRED FOR A NORMAL45° ANGLE OF STAY SPREAD USING 7/3.25mm (7/4.00mm)STAY STRAND 18

TABLE 5. STRUT LOADS (kN) AND STAYS REQUIRED FOR A MINIMUM30° ANGLE OF STAY SPREAD USING 7/3.25mm (7/4.00mm)STAY STRAND 19



5 of 19 Version : 3

1. STAY STRANDS AND STAY FITTINGS FOR OVERHEAD LINES

This Document describes typical stay assemblies which are suitable for use with overheadlines of wood pole construction and which range from LV services to lines having operatingvoltages of up to 33kV.

Wood brace blocks for ‘H’ poles and foundation blocks are included with the specificationfor stay blocks.

The strength of materials and fittings in the arrangements shown meet the requirements ofESI Standards on the design of overhead lines on wood poles.

2. STAY ASSEMBLIES

All stays will normally be set at a 45 degree angle to the pole leg, that is, the stay spread shallbe the pole height less the sinking depth measured on level ground (for stay angles greaterthan 45 degrees, no reinforcement is needed; less than 45 degrees, (30 degrees minimum)increase staying by extra stay. The recommended stay assemblies, materials and minimumfailing load of each fitting (and the weakest fitting of each assembly) are shown in Sub-Section 11.2

Uplift calculations are based on installation in sand of density 1595kg/m³ which is consideredto be representative of average worst ground conditions, with a minimum angle between stayand pole of 30 degrees. If very wet soft ground conditions are encountered, specialfoundations should be considered; in such cases the ‘H’ pole bracing block may be used.

Helical fittings for stays are shown on Equipment Drawing No. E406.

3. ANCHOR ASSEMBLIES

3.1 Manual Screw-in Stay Anchor

The Manual Screw-in stay anchor as shown in Equipment Drawing No. E412 is for use withLV service lines, subject to soil conditions being suitable and should resist an uplift of 12kN.It is installed to a depth of 1.2m, by means of a socket wrench.



6 of 19 Version : 3

3.2 Power Installed Screw Anchors

Power installed screw anchors are the preferred type of anchor.

The power installed screw anchors used comprise of one or two steel flanges (discs) normally305mm (12 inches) in diameter welded to a rectangular body to form a single turn helix.

If the anchor has two helix flanges, it is referred to as ‘twin disc’, this type of screw anchor isnormally used on High Voltage overhead line construction while the ‘single disc’ type isusually used on Low voltage and LV service line construction.

The selection of anchor type and connector rod length depends upon the type of ground; softground may require a twin disc anchor with 3 metre rod whereas in firmer ground a singledisc anchor and 2 metre rod may be sufficient.

The anchor is screwed to a 22mm diameter, 3m or 2m long galvanised steel tension connectorrod which, when the anchor assembly is properly installed, will extend just above the groundlevel.

3.3 Stay Rod and Block.

3.3.1 Conditions of useWhere ground or access conditions make installation of screw anchors and anchor rodsimpracticable wooden stay blocks and stay rods may be used.

3.3.2 Excavation and installation of stay blocks

The hole excavated for the stay blocks shall be two metres deep.

In all cases, the block shall be undercut into undisturbed ground and placed with the flat sideuppermost to provide the maximum uplift resistance. The ground must be slotted so that thestay rod is in line with the stay strand. The position and angle of the undercut will depend onthe length of stay rod used and the angle of the stay to the pole.

The wood stay block is designed to have a minimum failing load (MFL) and resistance touplift of 110kN and is for use with Type 1 or Type 2 stay rods.

If very wet soft ground conditions are encountered, the use of the Type 1 ‘H’ pole bracingblock should be considered for use as the stay block.

Use of small concrete stay blocks is only permitted on LV ABC Service Lines to propertieswhere space at ground level does not allow for the installation of a single disc screw anchoror a normal size wooden stay block.



7 of 19 Version : 3

4. INSULATION OF STAYS

All stays shall be insulated except where otherwise stated (e.g. on fully insulated LV ABCsystems) to reduce risk of dangerous potential gradients at ground level and, in the case ofstays on earthed structures, to prevent electrolytic corrosion of stay rods. The height of thestay insulator shall be such that no part of the insulator shall be less than 3m above groundlevel.

For lines up to 33kV, the recommended minimum distance along the stay between the pointof contact with the cross-arm or pole and the top of the stay insulator is 1.8m. This achievesan optimum impulse voltage withstand value for the line.

In situations where a broken jumper or a broken stay may result in the stay becoming ‘live’,the insulator must be placed below any likely point of contact with live metal, but not below aposition which would fail to maintain a minimum of 3m above ground where the stay couldswing if broken.

FIG.1. STAY ARRANGEMENTS

Fig.1. shows the recommended staying arrangements for use with helical fittings. TheArrangement may be used for new construction or stay replacement. In an insulated stay theheight of the insulator can be adjusted by altering the length of the top and bottom staystrands.

NOTE

1. THE HEIGHT OF THE STAY INSULATOR SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 3m ABOVE GROUND LEVEL EVEN WHERE STAY IS BROKEN AND IN CONTACT WITH LIVE CONDUCTOR.

2. FOR POLE TOP MAKE OFF, UNWRAP CENTRE KING WIRE AND BOND TO STEELWORK.

STAY GRIP

STAY ROD

STAY STRAND

STAY GRIP

STAY INSULATOR

POLE TOP MAKE OFF

STAY STRAND

STAY SPLICE

STAY GRIP

STA

Y3-M

D.S

KF

INSULATED STAY UNINSULATED STAY

3m -0+0.2



8 of 19 Version : 3

4.1 Stay Insulators for Lines up to 33kV

Porcelain stay insulators in accordance with Equipment Drawing E403, shall be used asfollows:

Type 1 - Single. For all stays on 11kV lines and all stays on earthed 33kV structures.LV Open wire and Open wire to ABC transitions.

Type 2 - Double. Linked in series for 33kV where steelwork is not earthed.On fully insulated ABC systems no stay insulator is required.

4.2 Stay Insulator Link

The insulator link is a pre-formed helical fitting used to join two Type 2 porcelain insulatorsin series and has a minimum failing load at least equal to the stay assembly.

5. BONDING OF STAYS

All stays supporting HV lines should be bonded at the top of the steelwork (see also thedocument ‘Earthing And Bonding Design For The Overhead Network’)

The method of bonding stays is to take one wire from the stay strand, or the centre ‘king’ wirefrom the pole top make off, and connect it to a convenient bolt on the HV steelwork.

A stay attached to a stay strap need not be bonded separately if it is fitted to a bolt in contactwith the steelwork.

6. STAY STRAPS

Stay straps, to Equipment Drawing No. E408, are provided as an alternative means ofattaching a stay to a pole. The stay strap must be fitted beneath the head of an M20 bolt andnot under the nut. A square, curved washer must be placed between the nut and the pole.

The safe working load of a stay attached to a stay strap must not exceed 28kN, which meansthat the stay strap should not be used with 7/4.00 grade 1150 stay strands.



9 of 19 Version : 3

7. MULTIPLE STAY ARRANGEMENTS

Where multiple stay arrangements are used, on single or ‘H’ poles, the stay anchors or blocksshould be installed with sufficient space between them to ensure an adequate frustum of soilin the line of pull of each block. The length of undisturbed ground between stay assembliesshould not be less than 2m.

When two stays are fitted to a single pole, the preferred arrangement is in tandem (i.e. onebehind the other), but splayed stays are acceptable.

In all cases the length of undisturbed ground between stay anchorings should not be less than2m.

For details of stay arrangements see the drawings based on STAY1 and STAY2(a and b) inthe document ‘Stay Arrangement Drawings’.

Non-symmetrical staying arrangements are not approved for use on ‘H’ poles

‘H’ poles used as angle poles shall be fitted with double stays per leg. ‘H' poles erected asterminals may be equipped with single, double or triple stays per leg as may ‘H’ poles erectedas an out of balance stayed section pole between sections of lines built to dissimilar basicspans.

Triple stays shall comprise two splayed stays as above set at the approved angle to the pole,the third stay being placed equidistant between the two, but entering the ground at least onemetre behind them viewed from the pole.

8. PROTECTION OF STAY RODS

Where Stay Rods to Drawing No E401 are installed in ground with high acid content, such aspeat and refuse disposal areas, it may be necessary to protect the rod against corrosion. Thismay be achieved by application of a suitable tape or heat shrinkable tubing. Anti-corrosiontape, is recommended.



10 of 19 Version : 3

9. PRECAUTIONS AGAINST ACCESS

9.1 Prevention of Unauthorised Climbing

Where necessary, barbed wire shall be fitted to stays in accordance with EATS 43-90, toprevent unauthorised climbing.

Supports near to or in high risk areas may require additional measures.

9.2 Protection against Stock

Where stock are liable to have access to the stay a post and rail fence will need to be erectedto prevent the animals rubbing against the stay and rod. Rubbing posts will not be used asthey can cause damage to animals.

EXAMPLES OF STAY FENCING

SPLAYED STAYS - 2 KITS

IN LINE STAYS - 2 KITS

SINGLE STAY - 1 KIT

4 STAYS IN BOX - 3 KITS




10. STAYS ON JOINTLY USED EME/BT POLES

The practice of tape application for the protection of stays on jointly used LV/BT poles hasbeen discontinued.

The following is an extract from Engineering Recommendation EB/BT1, ‘Conditions forBritish Telecom and East Midlands Electricity Joint Use of Poles’.

“Before climbing an Electricity Board pole, BT staff should look for any damage to the powerconductors or insulators or objects such as tree-branches or kite-strings on the pole, whichcould put the Company's conductors in contact with metal (e.g. a stay) liable to be touchedwhile working on the BT attachments.”




11. STRENGTH AND USE OF STAY COMPONENTS

11.1 Components

Anchor Assemblies:Manual Screw Anchor 150mm diameter helix disc and 1.7m rodPower installed Screw anchor single disc - one 305mm diameter helix disc

twin disc - two 305mm diameter helix discs spaced675mm apart

Anchor rods 3.2m long, 7/8 in. diameter (normal types ofground) (7/8 BSW Threads)2.14m long, 7/8 in. diameter (very hardground) (7/8 BSW Threads)

Turnbuckle for use with anchor rods (7/8 BSW Thread)

Stay Blocks:Wood - 250mm x 125mm x 1300mmConcrete - 460mm x 460mm x 96mm

Stay Rods:Type 1 - 1.8m long x 11/16 in. diam. (11/16 BSW Thread)Type 2 - 2.4m long x 7/8 in. diam.(7/8 BSW Thread)

Stay Strand:7/3.25mm Grade 11507/4.00mm Grade 1150

Stay Strap: Maximum Working Tension 28kN (Onlysuitable for use with 7/3.25mm stay strand)

Stay Insulators: Type 1 - LV/HV porcelainType 2 - 33kV porcelain

Stay Insulator Link: Only to be used for 7/4.00mm Staywire

Application Of Stay Insulators:Fully insulated ABC - noneLV Open Wire lines to ABC - one type 111kV and 33kV earthed poles - one type 1.11kV unearthed poles, - one type 133kV unearthed poles - two type 2 with link assembly.




11.2 Strength of Stay Components and Permissive Working Load

TABLE 1. STRENGTH OF STAY COMPONENTS

SCREW BLOCK AND STAYSTAY ANCHOR ROD ASSEMBLY INSULATOR TYPICAL

STRAND ASSEMBLY ROD BLOCK APPLICATIONSIZE MFL NO OF MFL MFL MFL MFLmm kN DISCS kN TYPE kN kN TYPE kN

7/3.25 66.8 1ma 12 - - - 1 110 LV SERVICES7/3.25 66.8 1 85 1 65 65co 1 110 LV SERVICES7/3.25 66.8 1 85 1 65 110 1 110 LV MAINS7/3.25 66.8 2 135 2 110 110 1 110 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 101.0 2 135 2 110 110 1 110 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 101.0 2 135 2 110 110 2* 110 33kV LINES

shaded cell indicates weakest component of assembly.ma - Manual Screw-in type rod.co - Concrete block restricted to LV Service Lines only.* - Type 2 Insulator and insulator assembly for use on unearthed 33kV structures.

TABLE 2. PERMISSIVE WORKING LOADS - HELICAL FITTINGS

SCREW ROD & BLOCK PERMISS.STAY ANCHOR ASSEMBLY INSUL- WORKING TYPICAL

STRAND NO. OF ROD BLOCK ATOR LOAD APPLICATIONDISCS TYPE TYPE kN

DIRECT TO POLE TOP7/3.25 manual 1 - - 1 4.8 LV SERVICES7/3.25 1 1 concrete 1 26.0 LV SERVICES7/3.25 1 1 wood 1 26.0 LV MAINS7/3.25 2 2 wood 1 34.7 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 2 2 wood 1 40.4 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 2 2 wood 2* 40.4 33kV LINES

TO STAY STRAP7/3.25 manual 1 - - 1 4.8 LV SERVICES7/3.25 1 1 concrete 1 26.0 LV SERVICES7/3.25 1 1 wood 1 26.0 HV/LV LINES7/3.25 2 2 wood 1 28.0 HV/LV LINES7/4.00 Stay strap not Applicable

* Type 2 Insulator and insulator assembly for use on unearthed 33kV structures.




12. STAY CALCULATIONS

The following illustrations, tables and formulae have been included to assist in calculatingwithstand strut loads and staying arrangements.

12.1 Terminal Pole Design Considerations

FIG.3. STAYING OF TERMINAL POLES

P

TU

C

ø

STAY

TER

M.S

KF

P = TOTAL CONDUCTOR PULLø = ANGLE BETWEEN POLE AND STAYT = TENSION IN STAY WIREC = CRIPPLING LOAD ON POLEU = UPLIFT ON STAY




12.2 Angle Pole Design Considerations

FIG.4. STAYING OF ANGLES POLES

STAY

P

R

A

P

T

STAY

T

ø

P

ø

STAY

ANG

.SKF

R = DIRECTIONAL RESULTANT FORCE A = ANGLE OF LINE DEVIATIONT = TENSION IN STAY WIREP = TOTAL CONDUCTOR PULLø = ANGLE BETWEEN POLE AND STAY

ø




12.3 Design Data for Stay and Strut Load Calculations

TABLE 3. DESIGN DATA FOR STAY AND STRUT LOADCALCULATIONS

DESIGN DATA FOR HV CONDUCTORSINGLE CIRCUIT LINES 50mm² 50mm² 100mm² 100mm² 150mm² 300mm²TO ESI STANDARD 43-40 ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR HDA

PVC PVCRELIABILITY FACTOR 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

Weightspan Metres 100 100 100 100 100 100Windspan Metres 100 100 100 100 100 100Maximum Conductor Weight(MCW) kg/m 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.6Maximum Conductor Tension(MCT) kgf 1012 1012 1474 1474 1664 2058Maximum Conductor Pressure(MCP) kg/m 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.4 3.0Maximum Equipment Weight*

kg 74 74 74 74 74 74

NOTE:

* The Maximum Equipment Weight (pole top steelwork, insulators etc.) of 74 kgcovers all pole configurations.

• Assumptions:

Conductor Downthrust is limited to 1:10 in either or both directions (0.199 for AnglePoles, 0.0995 for Terminal Poles).

Stays are installed to have an ultimate uplift capability in excess of 55kN.

The permissible working load in the stay is 34.68kN for the 7/3.25mm stay strand , whichcorresponds to a maximum horizontal component of 2500kg.




12.4 Formulae

The following formulae are taken from ESI Standard 43-40

Single and 'H' Angle poles

Vertical Load kgf =N x [(Weightspan x MCW) + (MCT x Downthrust)] + Equipment Weight

Horizontal Load kgf =N x [(Windspan x MCP x Cos(AΦ/2)) + (2 x MCT x Sin(AΦ/2))]

Single and 'H' Terminal Poles

Vertical Load kgf =N x [(0.5 x Weightspan x MCW) + (MCT x Downthrust)]+ EquipmentWeight

Horizontal Load kgf =N x MCT

NOTE

N = Number of Conductors (N/2 for 'H' Poles).

AΦ = Angle of Line Deviation.

Withstand Values are derived by multiplying the vertical and horizontal loads by 1.6

Strut Load Capability =Vertical Withstand Component + Horizontal Withstand Component

Tan Φ

Number of Stays Required =Horizontal Withstand Component

Sin Φ x Max: Permissible Working Load in Stay

NOTE

ΦΦΦΦ = Angle of Stay Spread




12.5 Strut Loads (kN) and Stays Required

TABLE 4. STRUT LOADS (kN) AND STAYS REQUIRED FOR ANORMAL 45° ANGLE OF STAY SPREAD USING 7/3.25mm(7/4.00mm) STAY STRAND



5° 31 1 35° 55 2SINGLE 10° 35 1 40° 59 2

15° 39 1 45° 62 2POLES 20° 43 2 (1) 50° 66 3 (2)

25° 47 2 55° 70 3 (2)30° 51 2 60° 73 3 (2)





kN No. kN No. kN No.5° 40 1 45 1 56 1

SINGLE 10° 46 2 (1) 52 2 (1) 64 2POLES 15° 52 2 (1) 58 2 72 2

20° 58 2 65 2 81 3 (2)25° 64 2 72 3 (2) 89 3 (2)30° 70 3 (2) 78 3 (2) 97 3

'H' 35° 39 2 43 2 53 2POLES 40° 41 2 46 2 57 2

VALUES 45° 44 2 49 2 61 2ARE 50° 47 2 52 2 65 3 (2)PER 55° 49 2 55 2 68 3 (2)LEG 60° 52 2 58 2 72 3 (2)

'T' /TERM: 42 2 47 2 58 3 (2)Notes: (n) Number of 7/4.00 stays which may be used instead of 7/3.25 stays

‘H’ poles used as angle poles shall be fitted with double stays per leg -section 6.




TABLE 5. STRUT LOADS (kN) AND STAYS REQUIRED FOR AMINIMUM 30° ANGLE OF STAY SPREAD USING 7/3.25mm(7/4.00mm) STAY STRAND



5° 40 2 35° 82 3SINGLE 10° 47 2 40° 88 3

15° 54 2 45° 95 3POLES 20° 61 3 (2) 50° 101 4 (3)

25° 68 3 55° 107 4 (3)30° 75 3 60° 113 4 (3)





kN No. kN No. kN No.5° 52 2 58 2 72 2

SINGLE 10° 63 3 (2) 70 3 (2) 87 3POLES 15° 73 3 (2) 81 3 101 3

20° 83 3 93 3 116 4 (3)25° 93 3 104 4 (3) 130 4 (3)30° 103 4 (3) 116 4 (3) 144 4 (3)

'H' 35° 57 3 64 3 80 3POLES 40° 62 3 70 3 86 3

VALUES 45° 67 3 75 3 93 3ARE 50° 72 3 80 3 99 4PER 55° 76 3 85 3 106 4LEG 60° 81 3 90 3 112 4

'T' /TERM: 67 3 76 3 93 4 (3)

Note:

(n) Number of 7/4.00 stays which may be used instead of 7/3.25 stays

Number of stays for angle poles = Number of stays for a stay angle of 45° increased byextra stay in accordance with Section 2.

East Midlands Electricity Stay Drawings

Version: 3 Jan 2001 1 of 7

Stay Drawings



REVISION LOG

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date 1 M. Richardson D. Howard I.E. Burton T. Haggis 12/02/99 Notes: Full revision of content and style.

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date 2 Notes: Figure- Stay arrangements using helical fittings withdrawn. Extracts of STAY2a and 2B

combined.

Version Prepared by Checked by Approved by Reviewed By Date 3 T Haggis Jan 2001 Notes:



CONTENTS

1. STAY ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 4 2. SPECIAL STAYING ARRANGEMENTS 6

FIGURES

FIG.1. STAYING ARRANGEMENTS SINGLE CRCUIT LINES - (Based on STAY 1)

4

FIG.2. DETAILS OF STAY POSITIONS FOR 33kV DOUBLE CIRCUIT ‘H’ POLE LINES - (Based on STAY 2a and 2b)

5

FIG.3 FLYING STAY - (Based on EMEB/LV/A11) 6

FIG.4. OUTRIGGER STAY BRACKET - (Based on EMEB/LV/A9 and E407) 6

FIG.6. POLE STRUT - (Based on EMEB/LV/A8 and E410) 7



1. STAY ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS

FIG.1. STAYING ARRANGEMENTS SINGLE CRCUIT LINES - (Based on STAY 1)



FIG.2. DETAILS OF STAY POSITIONS FOR 33kV DOUBLE CIRCUIT ‘H’ POLE LINES - (Based on STAY 2a and 2b)



2. SPECIAL STAYING ARRANGEMENTS

FIG.3 FLYING STAY - (Based on EMEB/LV/A11)

FIG.4. OUTRIGGER STAY BRACKET - (Based on EMEB/LV/A9 and E407)



FIG.6. POLE STRUT - (Based on EMEB/LV/A8 and E410)


Database Ref: 20 File Ref: Requirements ForEarthing & Bonding Of OHNetwork Feb 2001



Requirements for Earthing and Bonding

of the Overhead Network

East Midlands Electricity Requirements for Earthing and Bonding of the Overhead Network Overhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Requirements For Earthing & BondingOf The OH Network Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 4 Version: 2

Revision Log For Requirements for Earthing and Bondingof the Overhead Network




Section Notes about the change11 Earth mat for switchgear operating handles added section

3.5Changes made in version 3




CONTENTS

1. EARTHING & BONDING 4



1. EARTHING AND BONDING

This section of the Overhead Line Manual has been superseded by the issue of the EarthingManual.

Please refer to following Sections of the Earthing Manual:

• E3 Soil Resistivity Measurements

• E4 Earth Electrode Resistance Test 132, 33, 11 & 0.4 kV

• E5 Distribution Standard Earthing Layouts

• E6 Protective Multiple Earthing

• E7 Earth Specification Overhead Network


Database Ref: 19 File Ref: Lightning Protection OfThe LV & HV System Feb 2001



Lightning Protection

of the LV & HV System

East Midlands Electricity Lightning Protection of the LV & HV SystemOverhead Line Manual Vol.1

File Ref: Lightning Protection Of TheLV & HV System Feb 2001.doc Page 2 of 8 Version: 1

Revision Log For Lightning Protectionof the LV & HV System


Section Notes about the change



CONTENTS

1. Specification for Surge Arresters for LV, 11kv and 33kv Systems 4

1.1 General 4

1.2 Specification 4

1.3 Automatic Disconnect Device 5

1.4 High Voltage Testing of Surge Arresters. 5

1.5 Low Voltage System Surge Arresters. 5

1.6 11kV System Surge Arresters 6

1.7 33kV System Surge Arresters 6

2. Lightning Protection for LV, 11 kV & 33 kV Equipment 6

2.1 General 6

2.2 Surge Arresters 7

2.3 Low Voltage System 7

2.4 Pole Transformers 7

2.5 33 kV & 11 kV Cables 8

2.6 Air Break Switch Disconnectors 8

2.7 Pole Mounted Auto-Reclosers and Sectionalisers 8

2.8 Triggered Gaps 8

2.9 Open bushings of 33kV Switchgear and Transformers 8

2.10 Cable connected 33kV Switchgear and Transformers 8



1. Specification for Surge Arresters for LV, 11kv and 33kv Systems

1.1 General

Surge Arresters, also known as Surge Diverters and referred to in this document as arresters,are designed to protect the Company's system from over-voltages during lightning activityand switching operations. To gain the best protection the arrester should be placed as close aspossible to the apparatus to be protected. Connections should be less than 0.5 metres.

The selection and application of arresters shall be as detailed in Sections 1.5 (LV), 1.6 (11kV)and 1.7 (33kV) of this Manual. Surge arresters are the subject of bulk purchase arrangements,the technical details of the approved types being purchased are shown in Table 1. Thesearresters will be supplied as standard from February 1996.

TABLE 1. APPROVED TYPES OF SURGE ARRESTERS

Arrester Lightning Impulse ResidualRated Voltage

System Voltage Make Type Voltage (kV Peak)(V) 5000A 10000A 20000A

Low Voltage Bowthorpe LTP 500 2.5 2.9 -Transformer LVNeutral

Bowthorpe TVC 6000 18.0 19.8 23.0

11000 Bowthorpe EGA15 15000 45.0 49.5 57.633000 Bowthorpe HEC36 36000 93.4 102.0 116.0

1.2 Specification

To obtain the maximum degree of protection the surge arrester should have impulse spark-over wave front and residual voltages as low as possible. The minimum 50 Hz spark-overvoltage must be higher than the highest power frequency line-to-earth voltage which mayoccur at the arrester location.



1.3 Automatic Disconnect Device

Past practice on some surge arresters has been to incorporate a short flexible lead with anautomatic disconnecting device. This device is designed to eject the flexible earthing leadwhen the surge arrester current reaches a value likely to cause damage to the arrester, thuspreventing excessive leakage currents flowing through the arrester and giving a clearindication of a faulty unit.

Surge arresters shown in Table 1 shall be equipped as follows:-

Low Voltage System. Automatic disconnection devices shall not be fitted to surgearresters on the low voltage system.

11kV System. Automatic disconnection devices shall not be fitted to thepolymeric housed surge arresters listed in Table 1.

33kV System. Automatic disconnection devices shall not be fitted to thepolymeric housed surge arresters listed in Table 1.

1.4 High Voltage Testing of Surge Arresters.

The leaving arresters in place during the high voltage testing of connected cables is to beavoided wherever possible. Arresters may be tested to the following levels :-

33kV System - 50kV to Earth

11kV System - 18kV to Earth

Where voltages higher than the above limits are to be applied the arresters shall bedisconnected.

1.5 Low Voltage System Surge Arresters.

1.5.1 Surge arresters fitted to the LV system

VOLTAGE RATING

The arrester shall be suitable for use on an EFFECTIVELY EARTHED SYSTEM and ratedat 500 volts.

CURRENT RATING

The current rating of the arrester shall be 5000 amps.



1.5.2 Surge arresters fitted to 11/0.415kV pole transformers between the case and theLV neutral.

VOLTAGE RATING

The arrester shall be suitable for use on an EFFECTIVELY EARTHED SYSTEM and ratedat 6,000 volts.

CURRENT RATING

The current rating of the arrester shall be 10,000 amps.

1.6 11kV System Surge Arresters

VOLTAGE RATING

The arrester shall be suitable for use on a NON-EFFECTIVELY EARTHED system beingearthed via earthing resistors, the rated system voltage being 12kV.

Note:- the rating of zinc-oxide arresters shall be not less than 15kV to prevent problems ofthermal runaway.

CURRENT RATING

The current rating of the arrester shall be 10,000 amps, Class 1.

1.7 33kV System Surge Arresters

VOLTAGE RATING

The arrester shall be suitable for use on a NON-EFFECTIVELY EARTHED system beingearthed via earthing resistors, the rated system voltage being 36kV.

CURRENT RATING

The current rating of the arrester shall be 10,000 amps, Class 2.

2. Lightning Protection for LV, 11 kV & 33 kV Equipment

2.1 General

On overhead lines of unearthed construction it is particularly important that suitable lightningprotection be installed to protect the associated transformers, switchgear and cables.



2.2 Surge Arresters

This Manual shall be applied to all new installations. When considering their application toexisting installations, priority should be given to installations in areas which experience hasshown to be most lightning prone, and/or to installations where the consequences, financial oroperational, of persistent damage would be the greatest.

Arresters should be installed for the protection of equipment in accordance with the followingsections.

2.3 Low Voltage System

Low voltage arresters as described in Section 1.5.1 of this document may be installed inlightning prone areas of the low voltage overhead line network to protect the system andsensitive installations. When connected to the low voltage overhead distribution system thearrester should be installed between the phases and neutral, and a PME earth installed. SeeOverhead Line Manual.

A pole transformer neutral arrester as described in Section 1.5.2 of this document shall beinstalled as detailed in Section 2.4c. of this Manual.

2.4 Pole Transformers

To protect pole transformers connected to the overhead line system from lightning it isnecessary to take a number of measures.

Please refer to The Earthing Manual section “E5 - Distribution Standard Earthing Layouts”for the number of rods and HV/LV separation distances required for commonly encounteredsoil resistivities.

a) The tank of the transformer must be provided with a lightning conductor of less than10 ohms comprising:

• “Deep Earth” – a continuous 50mm2 copper conductor driven directly down intothe ground at the base of the pole for at least 3 metres.

• Additional “Counterpoise Earths” as required to bring the total resistance below10 ohms in dry summer conditions.

b) The neutral connection on the transformer shall be earthed outside of the 430 volt hotzone contour around the HV earth. The value shall be less than 20 ohms in drysummer conditions. See the Earthing Manual for distances.

c) New or replacement transformers shall have a 6,000 volt arrester assembly connectedbetween the neutral connection of the transformer and the tank.

d) New or replacement transformers shall be fitted with arresters fitted to the HVbushings of the transformer.



2.5 33 kV & 11 kV Cables

33kV & 11kV Cables connected to the overhead line system shall be fitted with arresters.

2.6 Air Break Switch DisconnectorsArresters shall not be fitted to ABSDs.

2.7 Pole Mounted Auto-Reclosers and Sectionalisers

All pole mounted reclosers and sectionalisers shall be fitted with arresters on both theincoming and outgoing bushings.

This applies to earthed and un-earthed installations.

2.8 Triggered Gaps

Single triggered gaps connected to the centre phase have in the past been used to reduce theimpulse level of 11kV overhead lines to lower the induced over-voltages from lightningstrikes.

No new triggered gaps shall be installed

Existing ones shall be removed when the overhead line is refurbished.

Triggered gaps shall not be installed on 33kV lines.

2.9 Open bushings of 33kV Switchgear and Transformers

Arresters shall be installed on the overhead line side of outdoor switchgear and transformerbushings.

The arrrestors shall be installed as close to the equipment to be protected as practicable.

2.10 Cable connected 33kV Switchgear and Transformers

Where 33kV switchgear and transformer are connected to overhead lines via cable lightningprotection is afforded by the arrrestors on the terminal poles.

The provision of additional arrestors on the cable termination of the equipment is presentlyunder review. Theses may take the form of elbow type arresters plugged onto the back ofseparable connectors. Refer to Network Performance & Standards for further guidance.

33735869 Ohl Manual Vol 1 Lv to 33kv Specifications v4 July 2006

Documents

east midland

east midlands

engineering

high pressure

high load

suspension

overhead power

open wire